v/av/nv/nv/civ/nv/c 
 
 IN THE 
 DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 JOHN SAMSON 
 
 v/iv/i\y 
 
 v/v/ 
 
 .123, 
 
 \ 
 
 v/av/nv/nv/iziv/axyc 
 
SWINGING THE BOLAS 
 Page 184 
 
 Frontispiece 
 
In the Dictator's Grip 
 
 A Story of Adventure 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN SAMSON 
 
 With Illustrations by Paul Hardy 
 
 BLACKIE AND SON LIMITED 
 
 LONDON AND GLASGOW 
 
Blackie & Son Limited 
 50 Old Bailey, London 
 xy Stanhope Street, Glasgow 
 
 Blackie & Son (India) Limited 
 
 Warwick House, Fort Street, Bombay 
 
 Blackie & Son (Canada) Limitbd 
 Toronto 
 
 Zenith Library 
 
 BOYS 
 In the Great White Land. Gordon Stables. 
 The Disputed V.C. Frederick P. Gibbon. 
 The First Mate. Harry Collingwood. 
 The Boy Castaways. H. Taprell Dorling. 
 " Qujlls,." Walter C. Rhqades. 
 'Tw&£ School* ah& JGf>$ege. Gordon 
 
 Stables. • '•" '» J' I •./ 
 The ilaasedaje. §chool Mystery. David L. 
 
 /,-. :sr*ftbA.: : \ , :: • .... : 
 
 GIRL'S *'*' 
 
 A Canadian Farm Mystery. Bessie 
 
 Marchant. 
 The Youngest Sister. Bessie Marchant. 
 A Princess of Servia. Bessie Marchant. 
 A True Cornish Maid. G. Norway. 
 Meriel's Career. Mary B. Whiting. 
 A Girl of the Fortunate Isles. Bessie 
 
 Marchant. 
 The Mystery Term. E. E. Cowper. 
 
 Printed in Great Britain by Blackie & Son, Ltd., Glasgow 
 
PEEFACE 
 
 It may interest readers to learn that, although this book 
 has been written in the form of fiction, it is also intended 
 to give a true account of a period of South American 
 history with regard to which information has hitherto 
 been difficult to obtain by those unacquainted with the 
 Spanish language. The historical events have been re- 
 lated with strict attention to accuracy in dates and details; 
 the manners and customs, both of the Spanish colonists and 
 of the Indians of the time, have been depicted from data 
 given by contemporary writers, and many of the localities 
 have been described from personal experience. 
 
 JOHN SAMSON. 
 
 M13264 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAP. Page 
 
 I. Uncongenial Environments 9 
 
 II. A Revelation and a Resolution 15 
 
 III. Stephen leaves Home 21 
 
 IV. On the Road to Bristol Town 26 
 
 V. An Ideal Shattered 33 
 
 VI. A Chance at Last 38 
 
 VII. On the Good Ship Adventure 44 
 
 VIII. A Story of British Enterprise 50 
 
 IX. " Irish hot and Scotch cold " 60 
 
 X. A " Brush" and a "Shave" 6Q 
 
 XI. A Wreck and a Rescue 73 
 
 XII. Don Antonio's Startling Story 81 
 
 XIII. Pepita 86 
 
 XIV. A Calm and a Storm 95 
 
 XV. "Into the fulminant deadly breach" .... 100 
 
 XVI. A Plot and an Escape 109 
 
 XVII. A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 117 
 
 XVIII. On an Uruguayan Estancia 124 
 
 XIX. The Makings of a New British Colony . . .131 
 
 XX. Incompetence and Arrogance 138 
 
 XXI. Marched to Destruction 145 
 
 XXII. Ignominious Surrender 152 
 
 XXIII. What Next? 155 
 
 XXIV. The Pampas. A Gaucho Tracker 158 
 
 XXV. A Mysterious Guest 162 
 
 XXVI. A Trip to Patagonia 166 
 
 5 
 
VI CONTENTS 
 
 CHAP. Page 
 
 XXVII. Amongst the Tehuelche Indians 174 
 
 XXVIII. A Hunt with the Indians 182 
 
 XXIX. Exit the Power of Spain 186 
 
 XXX. On the Road to Paraguay 190 
 
 XXXI. A South American Arcadia 197 
 
 XXXII. A Modern Dionysius 203 
 
 XXXIII. Elysium and Mammon 210 
 
 XXXIV. An Indian Raid 214 
 
 XXXV. The Tolderia op the Matacos 219 
 
 XXXVI. The Rescue of Manuelita 224 
 
 XXXVII. Unexpected Difficulties 228 
 
 XXXVIII. Through the Gran Chaco 232 
 
 XXXIX. The Jesuits' Treasure 239 
 
 XL. Terrible News 246 
 
 XLI. A Heaven-sent Deliverer 249 
 
 XLII. A Visit to the Prison. A Knotty Problem . 253 
 
 XLI 1 1. The Plan of Escape 257 
 
 XLIV. Captain Rcgerio 261 
 
 XLV. The Escape of Don Antonio 265 
 
 XLVI. The Last of Lopez 270 
 
 XLVII. Safety and Happiness 274 
 
 XLVIII. Captain Rugerio's Story 279 
 
 XLIX. Five Years Later 283 
 
ILLUSTEATIONS 
 
 Facing 
 Page 
 Swinging the Bolab Frontis 
 
 Stephen beached the deck of the sinking ship ... 80 
 The Rescue of Manuelita . , 224 
 
m THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 UNCONGENIAL ENVIRONMENTS 
 
 AND I tell you again, I will not listen to such talk, so 
 go back to your work at once, Steve. You're far 
 too ready to leave it on any pretext. How could 
 you venture to ask me such a thing, knowing what I think 
 of such vanities?" 
 
 " Oh, Father," pleaded a gentle voice, "don't be so hard on 
 the boy; it's but little chance he has of getting pleasure." 
 
 "Woman, you are as bad as he. How can you dream 
 that I would allow anyone belonging to me to go near such 
 a performance 1 Even if he had not his work to do, is not 
 life too solemn a matter to be frittered away in such fri- 
 volities? Go to a circus indeed! it's little, if any, better 
 than those temples of Satan, the theatres. So off you go 
 to your turnip-hoeing, Steve!" 
 
 The speaker, an elderly man, whose iron-gray hair and 
 hard features betokened a strong will, from whose deter- 
 mination there was no appeal, walked to the door as he 
 concluded, casting a fierce glance at the lad who had made 
 the petition so summarily rejected. His dress and appear- 
 ance were indicative of his rank, occupation, and disposition 
 — a working farmer, but one degree higher than a labourer, 
 whose hard struggle for life had accentuated the natural 
 
10 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 austerity ,ov his temper. Truth to tell, these were hard 
 times *or the agricultural classes, even the highest of them 
 — tl.ece years when England was struggling for its existence 
 against a combination of foreign foes headed by the much- 
 dreaded " Corsican Usurper ", whose name alone served to 
 terrify naughty children, when mothers threatened to send 
 them to "Boney". It was in 1806, a year after Nelson's 
 great but final victory had thrilled the world, and fired 
 many a British boy with an eager desire to be off and win 
 laurels in the naval service. 
 
 Even to the remote village, in the most rural district of 
 the West of England, near which the farmhouse stood, the 
 story of these victories had penetrated. It had excited in 
 Stephen Herrick, almost to a passionate degree, the longing 
 to be a sailor, which, as far back as he could remember, he 
 had constantly felt. That he should have such a desire was 
 to himself a mystery; for he had never, to his recollection, 
 seen the sea, nor even a lake upon which boats could be 
 sailed. His environment had been always that of ploughed 
 fields and pasture-lands. The few companions he had made 
 amongst the congregation of the meeting-house, with whom 
 he conversed before and after the service on Sunday, could 
 talk of nothing but cattle and crops, or such simple matters 
 as interest the rustic mind. In habit of body he was as 
 different from the villagers as in ideas. They, heavy in 
 gait and slow of speech; he, active as a cat, alert in word 
 and gesture. The clodhoppers stared in amazement as 
 they saw him scramble rapidly up the highest trees and 
 swing lightly from branch to branch like a monkey. At 
 the village feasts he carried off easily, against all com- 
 petitors, the prizes for climbing the greasy pole, walking 
 the spar, and other feats of agility. Although only fifteen 
 and a half years of age, he looked almost a man. Dark in 
 complexion, with curling black hair, handsome and muscular, 
 
UNOONGBNIAL ENVIRONMENTS 11 
 
 any stranger who met him would at once have said he was 
 certainly a seafaring lad masquerading in a smock-frock. 
 
 Sometimes Stephen thought that his longing for the sea 
 must have originated from the effect on his imagination 
 of a picture which hung over the chimney-piece in the 
 principal room of the farmhouse. It was a scene in a 
 naval battle, one of those works which were so frequently 
 produced at that time, when England's glory on the seas 
 was at its highest. On the right, two ships, with every 
 stitch of canvas spread and flying the French ensign, were 
 evidently doing their best to get away; whilst on the 
 left a majestic British squadron, as shown by the meteor 
 flag, was rapidly coming up in pursuit. From the bow of 
 the leading English ship a cannon had just been fired, the 
 waves of smoke standing out against the broad white fore- 
 sail. A crowd of blue- jackets looked eagerly from the 
 topgallant forecastle, whilst from the mizzen rigging an 
 officer watched the "chase" with a telescope. Whence 
 came the picture, and what did it portray ? Stephen never 
 could learn. His father was not one to whom he could 
 venture to put many questions. Scarcely a word passed 
 the lips of the stern old man as he sat there, night after 
 night, gloomily poring over his big Bible upon a small table 
 near his arm-chair, until sometimes he dropped off to sleep, 
 worn out by his toil in the fields. A whispered appeal to 
 his gentle mother brought little information. 
 
 " The picture had been given to them many years ago," 
 she said, " by a dear friend now dead." 
 
 That solved some of the mystery, for he well knew that 
 his father was not one to buy works of art. All things of 
 beauty were regarded by this stern Puritan as " vanities, 
 carnal vanities", and Stephen had noticed that he never 
 raised his eyes to the picture. 
 
 Though his mother professed to be unable to tell him 
 
12 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 anything about the picture, it sometimes seemed to the boy 
 that she had some secret and sad associations with it, for 
 he observed, as she gazed upon the canvas, that her eyes 
 were full of moisture; but nothing she had ever said con- 
 firmed this idea. 
 
 There were no books of history, nor indeed any but 
 a few devotional works, in the scanty library of the farm- 
 house, so that there was nothing to be learned elsewhere, 
 and the interpretation of the scene had to be left to the 
 boy's imagination. But freely did his fancy play around 
 it. Every night his eyes were riveted upon the view. 
 It was indeed the only object worthy of attention in that 
 dismal and poorly-furnished room. Ignorant of seafaring 
 matters as he was, he seemed to have some intuition which 
 served to explain it. Whenever the old man was absent, 
 even if for a short time while he went to attend to his 
 horses and cattle, Stephen would burst out with: "I know 
 all about it now, Mother," and would proceed to tell her 
 some story he had framed. Each ship had a name, and 
 even the officers and men. He would say, too, whither they 
 were bound, and when the events happened. Wild as 
 these conjectures naturally were, considering the boy's 
 ignorance of history and geography, they always seemed to 
 excite admiration and wonder in his mother, who would 
 gaze upon him tenderly, at times sighing sadly; why, he 
 could never comprehend. 
 
 With such a temperament as his, it was easy to under- 
 stand why he revolted against the unceasing drudgery 
 of a farm, and the laborious, uninteresting work he was 
 compelled to perform. From early morn till night, the old 
 man, who was indeed a severe taskmaster, kept him hard 
 at it, with always another work to take up so soon as that 
 which he was at could be finished. No word of sympathy 
 did he ever receive. What relaxation he obtained was 
 
UNCONGENIAL ENVIRONMENTS 13 
 
 given grudgingly. For his mother's sake — she scarcely 
 dared to speak, but appealed by her looks — the boy bore 
 it as patiently as he could; but youthful nature will occa- 
 sionally assert itself, and he would sometimes leave his 
 work on a summer afternoon, and go off with some other 
 lads to indulge in his favourite pastime, bird-nesting, the 
 temptation of exciting the admiration of his companions 
 by his climbing feats being greater than he could resist. 
 When this happened, and the old man discovered it, the 
 penalty Stephen had to bear was severe. First, a long 
 lecture upon the sins of idleness and disobedience, in which 
 quotations from the Scriptures were freely used; and then 
 physical chastisement, the instrument of which was gener- 
 ally a horsewhip. As he grew bigger and stronger, Stephen 
 gradually felt impelled to defend himself and even to 
 retaliate, but the awe which he had felt for the old man 
 since his infancy, and consideration for his mother, restrained 
 him. Sometimes he would be sent supperless to bed, but 
 at these times he knew that, if possible, his kind mother 
 would slip up furtively to his room, and thrust some food, 
 a piece of bread and butter only in most cases, into his 
 hand, and whisper a few words of consolation. 
 
 " Be patient, my boy." 
 
 " Mother, dear," he would say, " I cannot long stand it; 
 I shall run off to sea some day. I know I shall." But his 
 mother's influence prevailed to stimulate endurance. 
 
 On the morning upon which the conversation related at 
 the opening of this story took place, the whole country-side 
 was in a state of wild excitement. Something unprecedented 
 had happened. A circus troupe had actually come to the 
 village, and the report quickly spread that a performance 
 would be given that afternoon. 
 
 It was a bright day in autumn. Stephen was engaged 
 hoeing turnips in a field near the high-road when the pro- 
 
14 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 cession of vans and horses made its appearance. Unable to 
 resist the attraction of the novel sight, he threw down his 
 hoe and ran to the roadside. Never had he seen such a 
 sight before, and his wonder grew to amazement when the 
 long line wound up with two enormous animals of uncouth 
 appearance, which somebody said were elephants. Nothing 
 could have induced him to return to his labour. He at 
 once went to the house, even though he had little hope of 
 success, to beg permission from his father to go to the 
 village to see the show. What the result was can be 
 gathered from the opening sentences of this chapter. 
 
 When the old man had left the room, Mrs. Herrick, 
 though she had pleaded with her husband to indulge her 
 son, apparently thought it her duty to chide him for pro- 
 posing to play truant, and gently asked him to go back 
 to his work. The lad went off sullenly towards the field, 
 but as he got farther from the house his step became less 
 resolute, and finally he appeared to take a sudden decision, 
 and, turning quickly, ran off towards the village. 
 
 Arrived at the village green, he found the vans drawn 
 up, the horses unharnessed and feeding from their nose- 
 bags, and the men busily engaged in erecting a large tent. 
 Eagerly he watched every proceeding. Suddenly he ob- 
 served a poster stuck up announcing the performance. It 
 was headed by a picture showing various equestrian feats, 
 and included a list of the prices of admission. Despair at 
 once seized him. The pictures had more than ever excited 
 his curiosity, but the cost — he had no money, his father 
 took care of that, he had never let him have a penny in his 
 life. What could he do? 
 
 At this moment a man, apparently the proprietor, came 
 to the door of the tent and shouted: "Come, my lads! 
 Those of you who lend us a hand in making the ring shall 
 see the performance free!" 
 
A REVELATION AND A RESOLUTION 15 
 
 Stephen was the first to jump at the chance, and was at 
 once selected, with two or three other stalwart youths, for 
 the job. For the next hour he worked harder than he had 
 ever done on the farm, and then he hung about, impatiently 
 waiting for the time of his reward. 
 
 Who can describe the ecstasy of a lad's first view of a 
 circus performance, especially one with such a temperament 
 as Stephen's! All thoughts of his disobedience and its 
 probable consequences disappeared, and he became entirely 
 absorbed in the spectacle. Never could he have imagined 
 such cleverness as that shown by the acrobats, nor that 
 such beauty and grace could be displayed by horses. The 
 rope-dancers, trapeze performers, and jugglers all gave him 
 new ideas of feats which he hoped to attempt himself some 
 day. The performing elephants filled him with wonder, 
 whilst the antics and jokes of the clowns — all new to him — 
 threw him into uncontrollable mirth. When at last the 
 show was over, and he was wending his way homeward, 
 his joy was suddenly clouded by the thought of the re- 
 ception he might expect at his journey's end. 
 
 CHAPTER n 
 
 A REVELATION AND A RESOLUTION 
 
 WHEN Stephen reached the farmhouse he found that 
 the evening meal had just been placed upon the 
 table. The savoury smell made a direct appeal to his 
 appetite, for he had had nothing to eat since the morning, 
 though in the excitement of the performance he had for a 
 time forgotten his hunger. The boy slid into his accus- 
 tomed place as quietly as possible, hoping against hope to 
 
16 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 escape observation; but there was a glare in the old man's 
 eye which showed that his entrance had not been over- 
 looked. The explosion he expected did not come at once. 
 Slowly the farmer rose to his feet, and began the long grace 
 it was his invariable custom to repeat before meals. Stephen 
 could scarcely avoid a shudder as he heard the familiar 
 words : " For what we are about to receive, &c", uttered in 
 what appeared to him a fierce rather than a thankful tone. 
 The formality over, the old man turned at once to the boy, 
 the scowl upon his hard features giving them a terrific 
 expression. 
 
 "Where have you been?" he cried. "Have you really 
 dared to disobey me by leaving your work to go to that 
 vile circus?" 
 
 Stephen hung his head, but made no answer. 
 
 "Leave the room at once!" roared the enraged farmer. 
 "No supper will you get to-night. Go to the barn, and 
 wait there till I come ! " 
 
 The boy walked quietly away, his only consolation being 
 a compassionate glance from his mother as he went. To 
 Stephen, as he lay huddled up in the cold barn, it appeared 
 as if hours passed before the farmer appeared, with a 
 candle in one hand and a heavy riding-whip in the other. 
 
 "And now," said the old man, "I must do my duty by 
 chastising you for your disobedience; but the Lord above 
 knows that I am a just man, and I ask you, first, have you 
 anything to say to justify your conduct?" 
 
 Stephen remained silent. Experience had taught him 
 that it was of no use to speak; he knew the formula and 
 its usual sequence. 
 
 Without further delay the farmer proceeded with his 
 self-imposed task. It is needless to enter into a description 
 of its harrowing details. Never had he wielded the whip 
 more vigorously, or displayed such animosity in the remarks 
 
 ( M 800 ) 
 
A REVELATION AND A RESOLUTION 17 
 
 with which he seemed to incite himself to further efforts. 
 Strong in his frame as Stephen was, he felt sorely inclined 
 to resistance, but was restrained by that feeling of awe 
 towards the old man in which he had been brought up, and 
 especially by the idea of respect due to parents, which had 
 been so carefully inculcated into his mind by his mother. 
 
 Yet it seemed to him that there could be little parental 
 love in one who could treat him so harshly, and whose 
 every tone expressed fierce hatred. Even in his agony it 
 seemed to the boy incongruous to hear his father call him 
 "Son of Belial", "Child of the Evil One". 
 
 At length, wearied by his exertions, the farmer threw 
 the boy from him on to a heap of straw, and commanded 
 him to go to bed at once. 
 
 More dead than alive, Stephen crawled to the wretched 
 attic which served him as bedchamber, flung himself on 
 his bed without undressing, and, burying his head in the 
 clothes, sobbed himself into a sort of stupor. 
 
 Utterly worn out with pain, hunger, and cold, he lay, 
 how long he could not tell, until he was aroused by a soft 
 cool hand laid upon his brow. He knew it could be no one 
 but his mother. Taking advantage of the old man's absence 
 on his nightly tour of inspection round the farmyard, she 
 had stolen up to give what comfort she could to the 
 lad. 
 
 For a time she could say nothing but "Oh, my poor boy, 
 my poor boy!" mingling her warm tears with Stephen's as 
 he, utterly broken down, sobbed upon her shoulder. Then 
 she gently tried to induce him to eat some of the food she 
 had brought with her. Hungry as he was, the lad refused. 
 A feeling of burning rage had now risen within him which 
 almost choked him. 
 
 "I hate him! I hate him!" he cried wildly. "He'll 
 never get a chance again to thrash me ! " And he continued 
 
 (M806) s 
 
18 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 for minutes giving vent to his feelings in incoherent ex- 
 clamations. 
 
 " Hush, Stephen, dear! you must not speak of your father 
 like that," gently remonstrated the mother. 
 
 "He my father! I cannot believe it!" almost shrieked 
 the boy. "He's a monster! a brute! I will acknowledge 
 no duty to him." 
 
 It was too dark for Stephen to see his mother's face, but 
 he was surprised to discover that his words had a terrible 
 effect upon her. She endeavoured to draw her hand from 
 his grasp, she trembled violently, and suddenly her tears 
 gushed forth in torrents. She tried to speak several times, 
 but her voice failed her, and she could only continue to sob 
 spasmodically. 
 
 "Mother, dear!" said the alarmed boy, clasping her more 
 closely, "what is the matter? You know that I shall always 
 love you, and — and — perhaps, for your sake, I will try to 
 do my duty — with him." 
 
 " Stephen, my son," at length said the mother in a quaver- 
 ing voice, " I must tell you — I ought to have told you long 
 ago. He is not your father!" 
 
 "What!" cried the boy, rising excitedly; "what! not my 
 father! Mother, what do you mean?" 
 
 "Be calm, dear, be calm, and you shall hear all. No; 
 your father was as gallant a sailor as ever breathed." 
 
 It was easy to tell the boy to be calm, but how could he 
 be expected to remain tranquil? "What! his father a sailor!" 
 A flood of thoughts rushed through his brain. "A sailor! 
 that accounted for his longing for the sea." 
 
 "Quick, Mother, quick! tell me more!" he cried, clasping 
 her waist tightly in his excitement. 
 
 " Yes," she resumed in a slow, reflective voice, as if look- 
 ing into the past, " he was a sailor, and my first love. We 
 had grown up together, and though he was frequently away 
 
A REVELATION AND A RESOLUTION 19 
 
 at sea, he always declared, when he came back to Bristol 
 (where we were both born), that his love for ' his little girl ' 
 grew stronger with each absence. Ah ! it was a happy day 
 when he came at last and said that he had been promoted 
 to the rank of mate, and there was nothing now to prevent 
 our getting married. And happy was the year which fol- 
 lowed our marriage, the year in which you were born, even 
 though he had been away on the ocean for some months of 
 it. In our little cottage home near the sea I waited patiently 
 for him, eagerly watching every sail when the time came 
 that his ship was expected home. Alas! alas! You and 
 that picture which hangs downstairs, together with my fond 
 memories, are all that I have now left to me of two short 
 years. Only a month or two more of happiness was vouch- 
 safed to us, for at length a day came when he joyfully 
 sailed, proud of his new position as mate of a larger ship 
 than he had ever been in before, and from that day to this 
 neither he nor his ship has ever been heard of. You were 
 only about a year old at the time, and of course can re- 
 member nothing of this, nor of the weary, weary waiting, 
 the anxiety, and at last despair, which came upon me when 
 his ship, many months overdue, was finally given up by 
 the owners as lost. 
 
 "And not only had I to bear my grief, but I soon had 
 to contend with poverty as well. When the owners con- 
 cluded that the vessel was lost, they ceased to pay me the 
 wages my husband was entitled to, the greater part of 
 which he had left for me. Then came a hard struggle; 
 yet when I had gradually to part with all I could possibly 
 do without, I always managed to keep that picture. It 
 was a present which my loved one had given me, and 
 which he had prized as the best of our possessions. 
 Often he had pointed out its beauties to me, and told me 
 its story — Oh, my boy! when I have heard you so 
 
20 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 frequently speak about it, and ask its meaning, I have 
 again and again felt tempted to tell you the story, but I 
 could not do so, for reasons which, when I have told you 
 all, you will understand. 
 
 "Ebenezer Herri ck, a distant cousin of my husband, your 
 father, who, I should have told you, was named Roger 
 Herrick, was very kind to me at this time. He was al- 
 ways a somewhat austere man, but at that period he was 
 not so hard, at least to me, as now. He had then a farm 
 of considerable size near the town, and was far more pros- 
 perous than at present — the misfortunes he has since met 
 with have helped to sour his disposition. At that time, 
 however, he was apparently a kind man, always in a quiet 
 and discreet way. What I could have done without his 
 aid I do not know; not to have felt gratitude towards him 
 would have been impossible. But when, about three years 
 after Roger had gone, he proposed that I might form a 
 closer relationship with him, my heart revolted, nor would 
 I think of it until another year had gone, and then I at 
 last consented, mainly for your sake, my son. Oh that 
 it should have turned out as it has ! 
 
 "Ebenezer strongly desired that you should be taught 
 to consider him as your real father, and, hoping that I was 
 acting for the best, I weakly gave way." 
 
 A sound below announced that the farmer had returned 
 from his round, and, fearful that he might discover her 
 absence, the mother wished her son a hasty good-night. 
 Whispering once more : " Be patient, Stephen ! Be patient 
 for my sake ! " she slipped away. 
 
 Quickly throwing off his clothes, Stephen tumbled into 
 bed. Exhausted though he was with the labours and 
 excitement of the eventful day, he found himself quite 
 unable to sleep. The surprising story he had just heard 
 set his brain in a whirl. The thought of that dead father 
 
STEPHEN LEAVES HOME 21 
 
 whom he had never seen, nor till that moment heard of, 
 filled his mind for hours, to the exclusion of the incidents 
 of the day. He conjured up in his imagination visions of 
 his appearance and of his career. He saw him walking the 
 deck of a white-sailed ship gliding over the blue water. 
 Then at last his thoughts turned to what he had just passed 
 through, and he contrasted his father with the hard-faced 
 old farmer downstairs, and again anger filled his breast. 
 More than ever did he long to be off to sea, and then and 
 there he finally resolved he would go, in spite of all 
 difficulties, cost what it might. At last, completely worn 
 out, he fell into a troubled sleep. 
 
 CHAPTER III 
 
 STEPHEN LEAVES HOME 
 
 THE morning found Stephen more than ever confirmed 
 in his resolution to leave home and go to sea, but as 
 he began to consider ways and means, he soon realized the 
 difficulties which confronted him. He had not a farthing 
 he could call his own, for the farmer had never allowed 
 him any wages, nor could he expect him to do so without 
 a struggle. Both the nature and the poverty of the man 
 were against his parting with money; besides, it was a 
 principle amongst the sect to which he belonged, that it 
 was wrong to let young people have cash, as it only led 
 them into temptation. 
 
 Nevertheless, the boy saw that without money he could 
 do nothing to accomplish his object, and he resolved to 
 make every effort to obtain it. As he went down to the 
 tool-house for his hoe he suddenly met the farmer, who 
 
22 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 gave him a short command to " Hurry, and make up for 
 lost time ". 
 
 Stephen took a sudden determination, and stopped and 
 faced him. "I have something to say to you, sir," he 
 said, " before I begin work." 
 
 The old man looked at him with astonishment. Well 
 he might, for there was a remarkable change in the bearing 
 of the lad. But yesterday he would have slunk away 
 before the farmer's lowering gaze; to-day he stood erect 
 and looked him firmly in the face. A single night had 
 wrought a transformation. 
 
 "Well, what is it?" growled the farmer; and Stephen 
 was also surprised to observe, or fancy he detected, a 
 lurking dread in the old man's eye. Was it possible, he 
 wondered, that his mother had told her husband what had 
 passed between them last night? 
 
 "This," he boldly replied. "I want you to understand 
 that I shall not go on working for you unless you agree to 
 pay me some wages, and also come to an arrangement as 
 to the number of hours I am expected to work." 
 
 For a moment the farmer was too astonished to speak; 
 then came the explosion. "What!" he roared; "what is 
 the meaning of this? Are you not lodged, clothed, and 
 fed at my expense? How dare you expect more, you un- 
 grateful wretch!" and so he continued his objurgations for 
 some minutes, mixing his violent language with Scriptural 
 quotations as was his wont. At length, having exhausted 
 his vocabulary of expletives, he concluded with : " Be off to 
 your work, and let me hear no more of such talk." 
 
 Stephen had stood quietly weathering the storm, without 
 faltering from his determined attitude. When it was over 
 he picked up his hoe and said : " Yes, I am going to work 
 now, but I only give you until to-morrow to make up your 
 mind on the subject." 
 
STEPHEN LEAVES HOME 23 
 
 During the day they met in the course of their work and 
 at meals as usual. It was evident, however, that the old 
 man was thinking seriously over the matter. He knew 
 perfectly well that a strong lad like Stephen would have 
 little difficulty in finding work on some of the neighbouring 
 farms. Men were not plentiful in those days, when so 
 many were being drafted into the army to fill up the gaps 
 in the ranks made by the numerous battles England was 
 then fighting. The farmer knew that if he lost Stephen 
 he would have to employ someone else, who would certainly 
 ask for more wages than what he believed would satisfy the 
 lad, so he at length concluded that it would be better for 
 his interest to accede to the demand. 
 
 Next morning, therefore, he grudgingly informed Stephen 
 that he had decided to allow him wages at the rate of six 
 shillings a week, out of which he would have to pay for his 
 clothes; and his hours would be from six in the morning 
 until six at night, with the usual hours for meals. 
 
 It was very little to earn, but Stephen felt elated, never- 
 theless, at having gained the first step. 
 
 He saw, however, that it would take many months before 
 he could save the amount which he thought would be 
 necessary for his purpose, and he therefore began to cast 
 about for some other means to augment his income. In 
 earlier years his mother had, with much pains, taught him 
 reading, writing, and elementary arithmetic. These were 
 no ordinary acquirements amongst the rural population of 
 the time, and he began to think that he might make use 
 of them. Being now at liberty to go where he chose after 
 the evening meal, he began by paying visits to all the 
 people in the neighbourhood above the rank of cottagers, 
 and offered his services in whatever way they could be 
 useful. To his gratification he soon found plenty to do. 
 Stephen had always been popular, and the farmers were 
 
24 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 struck with such admiration at his wanting more work 
 after having laboured in the fields all day that, in mere 
 good-nature at first, they contrived to put little jobs in his 
 way; but soon they found him to be almost indispensable. 
 He helped them to make up their accounts and to write 
 their letters. Some even asked him to give lessons to their 
 children, for there were few schools in those days. 
 
 It was a life of constant toil, more especially as he had 
 generally to walk considerable distances to the houses 
 where he was employed. His mother was greatly as- 
 tonished at the sudden change which she observed in 
 the lad's character. Often she would remonstrate and 
 ask him why he need work himself so hard; but Stephen 
 only smiled, and said that he wanted to relieve her hus- 
 band from the expense of keeping him. Frequently the 
 mother and son would, when the farmer's absence gave 
 them the chance, revert to the subject of that eventful 
 night's conversation, so intensely interesting to both. 
 Stephen urged his mother to tell him more about his 
 father, but she had little to add. She could only say that 
 he had been mate of the Flying Fish, in which he had 
 traded regularly to the West Indies for some years, and 
 that his last voyage had been in the ship Bristol Clipper 
 on a voyage to the East Indies, round the Cape of Good 
 Hope. He had sailed in 1791, and no tidings had ever 
 been heard of the ship. 
 
 Although unfaltering in his determination to leave home, 
 Stephen never breathed a word of his project to his mother. 
 He feared her gentle pleadings, the only thing which might 
 make him swerve from his decision. 
 
 At length, after some months of this industrious life, 
 Stephen began to think that he had come within measure- 
 able distance of carrying his plans into execution. It had 
 been no light task, and had called for much self-denial. 
 
STEPHEN LEAVES HOME 25 
 
 Several times he had had a set-back owing to the absolute 
 necessity of replacing his boots or other articles of clothing 
 which had worn beyond repair. But he nightly counted 
 his store of shillings and pence, which he kept in a little 
 bag in a hole in his mattress. 
 
 It was well towards the end of October before he had 
 collected the meagre fund with which he thought it prudent 
 to venture. But now he had reached it at last, and he 
 determined to wait no longer. 
 
 On the night on which he had made up his mind to take 
 his flight he did not go to rest at all, but spent the short 
 period between bed-time and the hour he had fixed for setting 
 out in anxious reflection and in packing up his few belong- 
 ings. He wrote a long and tender farewell to his mother, 
 begging her to pardon him for the step he was about to 
 take, and lamenting that circumstances would not permit of 
 saying farewell. He promised to write to her as soon as he 
 could, and to keep her informed of his movements as often 
 as possible. 
 
 About two in the morning he slipped noiselessly down- 
 stairs. Upon the living-room table he had laid the note to 
 his mother. There was no moon, so he could not take a 
 last glance at the dear old picture as he wished. 
 
 As he opened the house door he was startled by a loud 
 growl from old Roger, the watch-dog, but a pat on the 
 head reassured the faithful guardian that it was only a 
 friend passing. Cautiously he wended his way across the 
 farmyard and was soon out on the road. Familiar as he 
 was with the path, the deep gloom was scarcely a hindrance 
 to his progress. Soon the dark mass of the house, against 
 the sombre sky, vanished from his sight, and then, in spite 
 of all the misery he had experienced there, Stephen's eyes 
 filled with tears. He wondered how long it would be 
 before he would again see his mother. 
 
26 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 CHAPTER IV 
 
 ON THE ROAD TO BRISTOL TOWN 
 
 STEPHEN'S first thought was to get away as far as 
 possible from the farmhouse which had been so long 
 his home. Not that he feared pursuit, he knew that 
 Ebenezer Herrick would not make any great endeavour 
 to bring him back; the farmer's only regret would probably 
 be that of having to pay someone to do his work at a 
 higher rate. So he ran along the road at his top speed, 
 without caring what direction he took. He had long ago 
 made up his mind that his destination would be Bristol, 
 the port from which his father had sailed, and where he 
 himself had been born. But though he had made cautious 
 enquiries in the village and round about with regard to the 
 distance and route to the capital of the west of England, he 
 had never found anyone who could give him any definite 
 information. Poor folk did not travel much in those days 
 of costry coaches and post-chaises. 
 
 He had gathered that Bristol was about sixty or seventy 
 miles distant in a westerly direction, but as he had no 
 compass, and had never, to his recollection, been far be- 
 yond the village, such knowledge did not help him much. 
 
 He walked on steadily all night and until nearly an hour 
 after sunrise, which happened about half-past seven at that 
 time of the year. Then he stopped for rest and refresh- 
 ment at a roadside ale-house. Having called for a half-pint 
 of ale and some bread and cheese, he began his breakfast 
 with the good appetite which exercise and the morning air 
 had given him in spite of his anxiety. Then he began 
 putting questions to the landlord as to the best road to 
 take for Bristol. The yawning landlord, who apparently 
 
ON THE ROAD TO BRISTOL TOWN 27 
 
 had scarcely got over the effects of last night's potations, 
 replied in a husky voice that he had never been so far from 
 home, and could not give him explicit directions. 
 
 At that moment a man who had just entered the ale- 
 house, and had overheard the conversation, exclaimed: 
 
 "Is it Bristol ye want, sor 1 Sure you're in luck, for it's 
 meself that knows every fut of the way, the more betoken 
 I'm on the road there this blessed minit, an' afther going 
 back to me own counthry." 
 
 The speaker was a man of short stature, but apparently 
 well-knit and active. He was dressed like a labourer, such 
 as those who tramp the country in harvest-time, when they 
 come over from Ireland in search of work. He wore a cap 
 made of moleskin and carried a stout stick. After hearing 
 his talk there was no need to ask what country he alluded 
 to. 
 
 " Well, that is lucky," cried Stephen. " Will you allow 
 me to travel with you ? You see that, like yourself, I shall 
 have to get there on 'shanks's pony'." 
 
 "With all the pleasure in life!" replied the Irishman, 
 who appeared to be a genial soul. " Faith, an' it's always 
 heartsome to have company ! " 
 
 Stephen could not do less than offer his new acquaintance 
 some refreshment, and a pot of ale was readily accepted. 
 In settling the score Stephen pulled out his little bag, 
 which appeared to be well filled; silver and coppers are 
 bulky. The sharp glance at it which the Irishman gave 
 might have disquieted him had he been of a suspicious 
 nature. 
 
 Together the new friends set out on the road, and 
 Stephen continued to congratulate himself upon his good 
 fortune in meeting so capable a guide. It was evident 
 that the Irishman, who gave the name of Dan Maguire, 
 was no stranger in those parts. He knew the name of 
 
28 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 every village they passed through, and of every large 
 country house, especially the seats of the country gentry. 
 He greatly surprised Stephen by the intimate and detailed 
 knowledge which he appeared to possess with regard to the 
 people who lived in each. He knew the names, and even 
 the disposition, of each family. 
 
 " If ye were to call up yonder," he would say, pointing 
 to a house, " devil a thing would ye get but a dhrink of 
 water, and grudgingly at that." And again, "Now the 
 folks at that house are what I call rale dacent; it's plenty 
 of bread and cheese they'll give a poor chap, and maybe 
 even a glass of ale if the day's warm." 
 
 It gradually dawned upon Stephen that this was no 
 casual agricultural labourer in search of work, but a regu- 
 lar professional tramp. This discovery was not pleasing, 
 for farming people, among whom the lad had grown up, 
 were apt to look upon tramps as a very bad lot, holding 
 them to be pilferers and nuisances, rogues and vagabonds, 
 all. 
 
 However, Stephen consoled himself with the idea that he 
 would only keep his company as far as Bristol, where he 
 could easily shake him off. In the meantime he was not 
 only an indispensable but a most entertaining companion. 
 He had a great fund of that natural humour so character- 
 istic of his compatriots, and was evidently of that " happy- 
 go-lucky" disposition which, while it takes no thought of 
 the future, takes mighty good care of the present. This 
 Stephen found out on the second day of their journey. 
 
 Dan had, early in their acquaintance, wormed out of him 
 much of his history and many of his plans, also the means 
 he had at his disposal. All that day the Irishman had 
 shown himself " very convanient " in accepting refreshment 
 at Stephen's expense, and had even allowed the lad to pay 
 for his bed at a country ale-house. 
 
ON THE ROAD TO BRISTOL TOWN 29 
 
 Next morning, however, soon after they had started, 
 Dan broke out with: "Look here, Steven, avick, I like 
 you, me boy, an' I'm going to do you a good turn. Ye've 
 none too much rhino for what ye want to do, so why 
 should ye spind it on the road?" 
 
 Stephen replied that he did not see how some expense 
 could be avoided. 
 
 "Bedad, I'll soon show you how," said Dan. 
 
 AVhen they next came to the lodge-gates of a gentleman's 
 house, Dan carefully examined an obscure corner of the 
 gate-pillar, and then exclaimed: 
 
 " It's all right. Just wait here till I come back, Steve." 
 
 "Where are you going?" curiously asked the lad. 
 
 "Just up to the house there. We're sure to get our 
 breakfast from them." 
 
 "How can you know that?" 
 
 " Why, just look at that mark there," said the tramp, 
 pointing to some cabalistic signs drawn in chalk on the 
 side of the gate-pillar. "Ah, but I forgot! Ye're not up 
 to such things yet." 
 
 So saying, he entered the avenue, leaving Stephen by 
 the roadside. 
 
 In a quarter of an hour Dan came back laden with a 
 good supply of bread and meat, and even a can of milk. 
 
 "How did you manage that?" queried the astonished 
 Stephen. 
 
 "Och, just by blarney. I tould them that I had left 
 me wife and five small children just fainting with star- 
 vation on the roadside. But we had better get behind 
 the hedge, for fear the nice ould lady who helped me 
 should come to have a look at the little 'uns." 
 
 After having disposed of as much as they could, and 
 stowed away what was left for future use, Dan said : 
 
 "Now, if there's one thing I pride meself upon, it's 
 
30 IN THE DICTATOR S GRIP 
 
 being honest, so I'll take them back the can. Just go 
 slowly along, and I'll catch ye up." 
 
 The experience of the rest of the day showed the Irish- 
 man to be an adept in cadging, for they did not have 
 to lay out a penny for food. Stephen did not altogether 
 approve of this plan, but he concluded, after all, not to place 
 objections in the way, as he would need the services of his 
 purse when he came to be thrown upon his own resources. 
 
 As night drew near, the boy suggested that they would 
 soon have to be on the look-out for an ale-house in which 
 to take lodgings. 
 
 " Divil a bit," said Dan. " It's too mortal cowld to sleep 
 out, I know, but I'll find ye snug enough quarters free of 
 cost." 
 
 Soon he turned off the highway, up an occupation road, 
 which Stephen saw, in the now rapidly-darkening twilight, 
 led to a good-sized farmhouse, surrounded by outbuildings. 
 Upon nearing it the Irishman, beckoning Stephen to follow, 
 leaped over the hedge and cautiously worked his way round 
 by the back. 
 
 "They've got a mighty comfortable pig-stye here," he 
 said, "an' they killed the pig a fortnight ago, so it's likely 
 to be empty. If ye're not too particular, it is just the 
 place for us." 
 
 It turned out just as Dan had anticipated, and they 
 were fortunate in being able to creep into the shed with- 
 out discovery. By the aid of two bundles of straw, which 
 Dan boldly went out into the farmyard to fetch, they were 
 able to pass quite a warm and cozy night. 
 
 Next morning they were off before daybreak, and were 
 able to make their way, with scarcely any outlay, by similar 
 means to those they had employed the day before. The 
 Irishman was never at a loss for a story or a ruse to extract 
 charity. 
 
ON THE ROAD TO BRISTOL TOWN 31 
 
 On that night, however, they got a terrible fright. They 
 had taken the same course as before to get a lodging, and 
 Dan, closely followed by Stephen, had just crept into a pig- 
 stye, when suddenly he screamed out: 
 
 " Mother o' Moses ! Holy Vargin, preserve us ! What's 
 this?" 
 
 There was a loud growl, whilst two fierce eyes shone 
 through the darkness. Stephen could hear that a terrible 
 struggle was going on inside, and the Irishman's cries 
 became frantic. He ran to his aid, but was afraid to hit 
 out in the darkness, for fear of injuring his friend. The 
 people in the house had also heard the noise, for they 
 rushed out to see what was the matter. One, evidently 
 the farmer, carried a lighted candle. He was followed by 
 two outlandish-looking men, dressed in sheep-skin coats 
 and high-peaked hats with broad brims. To his surprise 
 the foreigners burst into a roar of laughter, and then began 
 calling out words which Stephen did not understand. 
 
 Soon the mystery was solved. The two strangers were 
 men who travelled the country with a performing bear, 
 and in return for their having given an entertainment to 
 the farmer's children they had been invited to stay the 
 night at the house. The bear had been "stabled" in the 
 pig-stye! 
 
 When the farmer threw a light into the shed it was seen 
 that the unfortunate Irishman was being closely hugged in 
 the embrace of Bruin, and it took all the commands of the 
 bear-leaders, emphasized by blows from their sticks, to make 
 the brute let go. 
 
 When Dan at last got free he was a woeful sight, his 
 clothes torn, and the breath nearly squeezed out of his 
 body. 
 
 "Sarves you right, you dirty tramps!" exclaimed the 
 farmer. "What business have you coming round my 
 
32 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 premises like this 1 ? Be off with the pair of you, or I'll 
 have you locked up." 
 
 So, instead of getting sympathy, the unfortunate Dan 
 and his companion were driven away with abuse, whilst 
 they could hear the whole party roaring with laughter at 
 their expense. They spent the rest of the night miserably 
 under the lee of a haystack. Fortunately it did not rain. 
 
 Next day the irrepressible Irishman had recovered his 
 spirits, and he was even able to "blarney" a complaisant 
 servant-girl into mending his coat, whilst breakfasting at 
 her employer's expense. 
 
 "By to-morrow," said Dan, as they crept into a shed 
 that night, "we'll get into Bristol. It's just about ten 
 miles off, straight along this road." 
 
 Stephen was terribly tired, as they had made a long 
 day's march, and he soon fell into a sound sleep upon the 
 straw. 
 
 When he awoke it was daylight, but he could see Dan 
 nowhere. 
 
 "What can have become of him?" thought Stephen; and 
 he searched in every direction, even venturing to call him 
 softly, so as not to alarm the people in the farmhouse, 
 from whom they had taken involuntary hospitality. 
 
 At length a horrible idea flashed through Stephen's 
 brain. He felt for his little bag of money. It was gone ! 
 
 Despair now seized upon him, and he broke down utterly, 
 throwing himself on the turf by the roadside. 
 
 "The rascal! the blackguard!" he groaned. "I see it all 
 now. It was his plan from the first. That was why he 
 was so anxious I should spend as little as possible. I'm 
 done for now! What was the use of all my slaving to 
 make that money?" And again a paroxysm of despair 
 seized him. 
 
 After the first explosion, however, he began to consider 
 
AN IDEAL SHATTERED 33 
 
 his position more calmly. In one of his breeches-pockets 
 he found half a crown. Acting upon the advice of the 
 crafty Irishman, he had been in the habit of carrying a 
 small sum there for any current expenses, so as to avoid 
 displaying all his money. It was but a trifle, but enough 
 to save him from immediate starvation. So he picked up 
 his stick, and with a sturdy step set forth to cover the 
 remaining ten miles between him and Bristol. 
 
 CHAPTER V 
 
 AN IDEAL SHATTERED 
 
 DESPITE the depression caused by his loss, and his 
 anxiety with regard to the future, Stephen's spirits 
 rose quickly as he entered Bristol about noon that day. 
 There was much to excite his wonder, for he had never 
 before been in a large city, and at first he was almost 
 frightened and completely confused amidst the traffic of its 
 busy streets. Every turn, as he advanced, brought new 
 surprises. The buildings seemed to him superb beyond 
 imagination, and the rich display of goods in the shops 
 astounded him. The culmination of his admiration arrived 
 when he stood at last before the magnificent church of St. 
 Mary's Redcliffe, to this day one of the finest specimens of 
 Gothic architecture in England. 
 
 The sea and the ships, however, were the great attractions 
 which had drawn him to Bristol, and he eagerly asked to 
 be directed to the harbour. Then, for the first time in his 
 life he saw a vessel. For hours he stood by the quayside, 
 forgetting his fatigue and hunger, absorbed only in contem- 
 plating the shipping. As a matter of fact they were but 
 
 (M806) C 
 
24 "2* THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 small craft which could then come to Bristol, up the narrow 
 winding river Avon, that looked little more than a ditch 
 at low tide. But to Stephen they were marvels. All that 
 afternoon he did nothing but watch the sailors at their 
 work, sometimes venturing to ask a bystander a question 
 that in many instances evoked a laugh from those who 
 heard it, through its indicating the rustic ignorance of the 
 lad. 
 
 But the sea, where was it, the bright blue expanse, 
 brilliantly painted in the dear old picture he had gazed at 
 so often 1 There were no signs of it in the mud-banks and 
 dirty water of Bristol Harbour. In reply to his enquiries 
 a man explained that the sea did not come any farther 
 up than Avonmouth, six miles off, and that at Bristol there 
 was only fresh water, that of the river. "Down there," 
 he continued, pointing in the direction, " he would find the 
 sea, and all the big ocean-going ships." 
 
 It was too late to go there that evening, so Stephen took 
 a bed for the night at a lodging-house near the river. He 
 thought he could afford the expense (only fourpence, and 
 sixpence for his supper), as he felt certain he would be 
 hired next day to go on some ship. As soon as it was 
 light he started, after a hasty breakfast, for Avonmouth. 
 Alas ! when he arrived, he met with another disappointment. 
 The sea was nothing but an expanse of brown, muddy 
 water. Could the artist of the picture have mistaken the 
 colour, he wondered? 
 
 Round the public-houses near the harbour he soon fell in 
 with groups of men whose appearance unmistakably pro- 
 claimed them to be sailors. To them he was drawn by an 
 irresistible fascination. It was such men as these who had 
 filled his boyish dreams. A closer acquaintance with them, 
 however, brought some disillusion with it. Early in the 
 day as it was, many of them had already managed to get 
 
AN IDEAL SHATTERED 35 
 
 into a pretty far advanced state of intoxication, and their 
 language was none of the choicest, though their loose blue 
 garments, glazed hats, and pigtails, their rollicking gaiety, 
 and evident good-fellowship, made some amends for the 
 loss of his ideal. 
 
 Timidly, Stephen endeavoured to get into conversation 
 with some of those who appeared still sober enough to talk 
 rationally, and he soon found out that the quickest way 
 to win their good graces was by offering them something 
 to drink. Low as was the state of his funds he decided to 
 make the venture. Three glasses of hot rum and water 
 were called for, two of which he offered to a couple of 
 hearty-looking tars, the other he determined to drink him- 
 self, in the interests of good comradeship. 
 
 His guests instantly became quite friendly, and answered 
 all his questions with a fluency and an elaboration which 
 astonished him, though more than half their sea-jargon was 
 quite incomprehensible. He felt unable to judge whether 
 or not they were "quizzing" him, as doubtless they were, 
 his evident ignorance of seafaring matters being too great 
 a temptation. 
 
 At length, warmed with courage by the hot grog, Stephen 
 ventured to take them into his confidence, and tell them 
 how greatly he longed to go to sea. A roar of laughter 
 rang through the bar parlour. 
 
 "What! you, a ploughboy, would like to go to sea!" 
 Stephen was still wearing his smock-frock, leggings, and 
 heavy boots. "Well, that is good! Too good to keep! 
 Mates, here's a chaw-bacon wants to turn shell-back!" 
 
 All the other sailors joined the chorus of laughter. 
 
 Then a gray-bearded old sailor, who was contemplatively 
 smoking in a corner, with his glass of grog before him, had 
 pity on him. 
 
 "Lad," he said, "have you any idea what a sailor's life 
 
36 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 is like? Maybe you think that it's nothing but standing 
 about with folded arms, on the deck of a fine ship, spanking 
 before a favouring wind. If so, you're muchly mistaken. 
 You don't know the drudgery and hardships which we poor 
 fellows have to put up with, the bad grub, sometimes short 
 commons, and, what's perhaps worse than all, the tyranny 
 of the officers. Take my advice, and give up them foolish 
 notions of yourn. It's been well and often said that nobody 
 but fools go to sea." 
 
 The other sailors joined in the conversation, all of them 
 corroborating the old man's views. They declared it to be 
 but a dog's life at the best, and most of them said that if 
 they could get out of it they would never sail again. Deep 
 was the disappointment, and terrible the agitation, of 
 Stephen on hearing these words. What! was it for this 
 that he had run away from home, causing his mother such 
 anxiety? Was the fabric of romance he had woven to be 
 so completely destroyed as to leave not a shred ? 
 
 Still greater was his trouble when the men went on to 
 explain that, even if he would not take their word, but 
 would persist in going to find out for himself, he could not 
 get the chance, for no one would take an inexperienced 
 clodhopper, who, by his own admission, had only seen the 
 sea for the first time that morning. In a very dejected 
 frame of mind was Stephen, as he gloomily trudged back 
 to Bristol in the afternoon. In his pocket there remained 
 but a few coppers, for the sailors had been very ready to 
 drink his health, and the landlord equally ready to accept 
 their orders as long as he saw that the lad had a shilling. 
 
 What was he to do now? Where could he go? Should 
 he put his pride in his pocket, and go back to the farm? 
 If, indeed, he were to accept that alternative, which he 
 certainly did not feel inclined to do, it would be a difficult 
 task. Even if he were to try the Irishman's method, dis- 
 
AN IDEAL SHATTERED 37 
 
 graceful as it was, could he succeed iu making his way on 
 the road ! And then, if he did go back, what a life could 
 he expect to lead with Ebenezer Herrick! 
 
 "No," he finally said to himself, fingering the few re- 
 maining coppers in his pocket. " As I have made my bed, 
 so must I lie upon it. Bed ! As to the luxury of having a 
 bed at all to-night, I shall have to choose between that and 
 the necessity of having a breakfast. Food is more important 
 than sleep just now, so I must pass the night as best I can." 
 
 He wandered disconsolately through Bristol streets until 
 a late hour, when all the shops were shut and the city 
 given up to darkness. Wearily he dragged himself along, 
 looking for a shelter from the cold drizzling rain, which now 
 began to fall steadily. Being unacquainted with the place, 
 he did not know which way to turn, and at length found 
 himself completely lost in the maze. He was attracted 
 suddenly, upon turning a corner, by a blaze of light at a 
 little distance, which appeared likely to give some hope of 
 warmth. Making his way to it, he found that the light 
 emanated from a bright fire of coals in an iron basket 
 standing in the midst of an open square. Round about he 
 could see rows of carts piled high with cabbages and other 
 vegetables. He had, in fact, found his way into the vege- 
 table market. 
 
 Near the fire stood a coffee-stall, at which several men 
 were refreshing themselves. Cold and hungry, he could 
 not resist the temptation to join them. He found that he 
 was amongst carmen and market porters. The thought at 
 once occurred to him, "Why should not I take up work 
 like this 1 I must earn my living somehow," — so he asked 
 one of the men if there was any chance of getting a job. 
 Fortunately for him, some of the regular hands had not 
 turned up that night, and he was taken on, as a temporary 
 worker, to help in unloading the carts. 
 
38 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 By seven in the morning the work was over, and the 
 few shillings he received in payment appeared quite a 
 godsend to him, being enough to provide food and shelter, 
 in a lodging-house near the market, for that day. Greatly 
 reassured by this good luck, he again applied for work on 
 the following night, and as readily obtained it; the market 
 people saw that he was a strong and willing worker, and 
 he soon became recognized as a regular hand. 
 
 CHAPTER VI 
 
 A CHANCE AT LAST 
 
 I710R some weeks Stephen continued to work regularly in 
 the market. But though he earned enough to keep 
 him from want, and to obtain some degree of comfort, he 
 could never for a moment think of this occupation as other 
 than a stop-gap. In his heart of hearts he longed constantly 
 and piningly for the sea, in spite of all he had heard against 
 it from the sailors. 
 
 His work in the market was over early in the morning, 
 leaving him at liberty to spend the rest of the day as he 
 chose. His choice was always to spend it by the ships, 
 and amongst seafaring men. Strong and active, he thought 
 nothing of the journey down to Avonmouth, where he 
 sought the company of sailors as much as possible, and got 
 them to tell him of their experiences, drinking in their yarns 
 with eager interest. 
 
 He soon found out, however, that, as the sailors had said, 
 it was by no means easy to get taken on to a ship. His 
 costume and evident lack of experience were against him. 
 He learned that it was customary for apprentices to pay 
 
A CHANCE AT LAST 39 
 
 a premium, or at least that some little "palm-oil" in the 
 way of bonus would be necessary to secure the interest of 
 those who had the power of securing berths on board; but, 
 alas! his daily earnings were just barely sufficient to pay 
 for his maintenance, so that constant disappointments almost 
 drove him to despair. 
 
 One day he was making the journey to Avonmouth once 
 more, unable to keep away from his beloved sea. He was 
 accompanied by a little fox-terrier which he had picked up 
 as it wandered, apparently ownerless, in the market. In 
 his forlorn position he was glad to have any companionship, 
 even that of a dumb animal, so he and Fido soon became 
 inseparable friends. 
 
 A rabbit sprang out on the roadside from a thicket as 
 they passed. Fido pricked up his ears, and at once started 
 in pursuit, following it right amongst the bushes. Suddenly 
 Stephen heard the dog utter a sharp frightened cry, and 
 immediately after he could hear his barks, apparently com- 
 ing from beneath the ground. 
 
 Greatly alarmed, Stephen at once rushed into the thicket, 
 pushing the branches aside in search of his pet. Not a trace 
 of him could he discover, though that he was not far off 
 was evident by the sound of his barking, which now appeared 
 to come from underneath his feet. Hurrying onward in 
 bewilderment, Stephen tripped over some boards lying on 
 the ground, one of which had broken in half from mere 
 rottenness, leaving an opening through which the dog must 
 have fallen. Excitedly he pushed the planks to one side, 
 when there was revealed an opening apparently leading to 
 some subterranean passage. It led almost vertically down- 
 wards, but a steep ladder stood against one side of the pit. 
 
 Thinking only of the distressed position of his dog, 
 Stephen unhesitatingly rushed to the bottom of the shaft. 
 There he was met by Fido, who expressed his satisfaction 
 
40 IN THE DICTATOR S GRIP 
 
 by excited yelps and caresses. Reassured as to the dog's 
 safety, Stephen now looked round curiously to see what 
 sort of a place he had come upon. A passage, almost hori- 
 zontal, was before him, at the end of which he saw a glimmer 
 of daylight. Advancing cautiously he soon arrived at the 
 end of the passage, and found himself in a lofty and roomy 
 cave, which apparently was lighted from some opening 
 above. 
 
 At once Stephen concluded that he had stumbled upon 
 some disused and forgotten storehouse of smugglers, who 
 had long been driven from this part of the coast. This 
 supposition was confirmed by his discovering many frag- 
 ments of cases and barrel staves strewn over the floor. 
 That the solitude had been undisturbed for years was also 
 evident from the amount of dust which coated them. In a 
 corner stood a triangle of rusty iron bars, from the apex of 
 which depended an equally rusty chain and a mouldering 
 pot. Below were the remains of charred embers. The 
 blackened walls above showed that smoke had often passed 
 over them. 
 
 "Well, this is a lucky find, Fido, old boy!" exclaimed 
 Stephen, " here at least is a shelter for us. I shall be able 
 to save the sum I have been paying for lodgings." 
 
 His first thought, disregarding all romance of the situa- 
 tion and its associations, and flying only to the practical 
 end he had in view, was that of raising money for a bonus. 
 He decided to tell no one of his discovery, but to take up 
 his abode in the cave. Next day he brought some candles, 
 & flint and steel, and a tinder-box, and soon he was com- 
 fortably installed in his new quarters. There was enough 
 wood left in the cave to serve him as fuel for some time. 
 From the neighbouring hill-slopes he gathered some armfuls 
 of ferns from which to make a bed. Food he brought with 
 him daily when he left the market. Water he had in 
 
A CHANCE AT LAST 41 
 
 abundance from a rill flowing down the hillside. Thus he 
 passed some weeks. 
 
 It was his custom at night to stroll down to the landing- 
 place near Avonniouth, always with the idea of meeting 
 seafaring men to talk with. 
 
 One dark night, when thus promenading without special 
 object, he was startled by the sound of shouts, and a noise 
 which indicated that a severe struggle was going on some- 
 where close at hand. Guided by the sound, he made his 
 way rapidly towards the scene of the excitement. As he 
 neared it he heard cries of "The Press-gang! the Press-gang!" 
 and he understood at once the meaning of it all. Evidently 
 a party of man-of-war's men had been prowling round with 
 the object of forcibly recruiting their crew, as was then 
 frequently done, and were endeavouring to make prey of 
 some seafaring men they had come upon. Stephen could 
 hear the officer in charge swearing loudly, though in a some- 
 what bibulous manner, as he urged his men to keep hold of 
 the unlucky mariners they had come across. 
 
 Just as he got near, three men rushed up, almost knock- 
 ing him over in their haste to escape. 
 
 "Where shall we make for 1 ?" he heard one cry. "These 
 fellows are bound to find us if we hide anywhere close by." 
 
 Struck with compassionate sympathy, Stephen called 
 out: 
 
 "Come on, I'll show you a safe place!" 
 
 "Who on earth are you 1 ?" queried the men. 
 
 " A friend of sailors," answered Stephen. " Don't stop 
 to ask questions, but follow at once, or you will be caught." 
 
 A glimpse of moonlight enlightened the scene, and 
 revealed Stephen to the fugitives. 
 
 "Come on, men," cried one, "he is only a lad; he can't 
 do much against us if he wanted to;" and they readily fol- 
 lowed their would-be succourer. Stephen led them swiftly 
 
42 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 to his cave, where, gasping for breath, they lay down to 
 recover themselves. By the light of the candle Stephen 
 was able to dimly observe the men he had rescued. One 
 was evidently an officer, as was manifest by his dress and 
 bearing. He was about thirty -eight years of age, well- 
 knit, of strong, clear-cut features and swarthy complexion. 
 The others were apparently sailors of the crew belonging 
 to his ship. 
 
 " Close shave that, boys," remarked the officer. 
 
 " That it was, cappen," said the men, thereby confirming 
 Stephen's supposition and indicating their relative positions. 
 
 " Of course," resumed the captain, " I would have got off 
 right enough in the morning, as they cannot press officers; 
 but it might have meant a night in the calaboose, and 
 perhaps some rough treatment from that drunken lieutenant, 
 and his equally drunken squad. It would have gone hard 
 with you, boys." 
 
 " Indade it would, sor," said one of the sailors, a short, 
 red-haired, jovial -looking fellow, whose accent strongly 
 reminded Stephen of his quondam companion, Dan Maguire. 
 
 "It's a michty shame," said the other sailor, who was a 
 tall, gaunt man of about forty, with a fair goatee beard. 
 "Why canna they let us alane? That way o' getting men 
 for the navy is against baith common sense and justice, as 
 I could show by mony arguments." 
 
 "That will do, Sandy," said the captain. "You Scotch- 
 men are terribly disputatious, but now isn't the time to 
 talk, we've got to think out how to get off to our ship. The 
 wind has changed to a favourable slant, and we must, if 
 possible, set sail in the morning." 
 
 The captain then turned to Stephen. 
 
 "I must thank you heartily," he said, "for getting us 
 out of a nasty scrape, and you may rely upon me for lend- 
 ing you a hand if I can do anything for you in return." 
 
A CHANCE AT LAST 43 
 
 Like a flash, Stephen saw that his chance had come at 
 last. 
 
 " The greatest favour you can do me, captain," he replied, 
 " would be to take me off with you to your ship." 
 
 The captain gazed upon him with surprise and with 
 evident suspicion. 
 
 11 That's all very well," he said, " for you to propose, but 
 I don't ship men without knowing something about them. 
 I don't mean to be too inquisitive, but what can I know 
 about you ? I come across you prowling round the shore. 
 I find that you have evidently taken up your quarters in 
 what looks for all the world like an old smuggler's hiding- 
 place, and you are eager to get away. How do I know that 
 you hav'n't broken out of jail somewhere, and are now try- 
 ing to escape from justice? Excuse me, my lad, you have 
 done me a good turn and I am grateful, but you see how 
 things look yourself, don't you?" 
 
 Stephen blushed to the roots of his hair; he could see 
 the force of the captain's remarks. 
 
 "Captain," he said, after a pause, "will you allow me to 
 tell you my story ? I will not take long, and you will not 
 lose much time, as you must stay here awhile to let that 
 press-gang get well out of the way. Meantime let me offer 
 you some refreshment, of which you must stand in need 
 after your hard race." 
 
 So saying he produced a bottle of rum that he had 
 provided himself with for emergencies. The men's eyes 
 sparkled. 
 
 "All right, my lad!" said the captain, as he seized the 
 pannikin which Stephen tendered to him; "spin your yarn, 
 but don't draw it out too long." 
 
 As briefly as possible Stephen told his story, and he saw 
 with satisfaction that he was producing a favourable im- 
 pression on his audience. 
 
44 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 "Your name is Herrick, you said," ejaculated the Scotch 
 sailor. " I once knew a man named Roger Herrick, who 
 was mate of the Flying Fish, in the West India trade, when 
 I was an apprentice. Are ye any relation o' his, think 
 ye?" 
 
 " Great heavens ! " exclaimed Stephen, " he was my 
 father. Tell me of him, tell me of him!" 
 
 "No time for more palaver now, boys," exclaimed the 
 captain; "let's be off, you can finish your yarn when we 
 get on board." 
 
 So saying, they started for the landing-place. 
 
 CHAPTER VII 
 
 ON THE GOOD SHIP ADVENTURE 
 
 IT was arranged on the way that Stephen should go in 
 advance to reconnoitre, since, if the press-gang was still 
 lingering about, he, a landsman in a smock-frock, ran little 
 chance of being seized. If he found the coast clear, he was 
 to give a signal by whistling in a prearranged manner. 
 The name of the ship, the captain informed him, was the 
 Adventure, and the boat should be at anchor a few yards 
 from the shore in charge of a boy, who would bring it into 
 the wharf upon hearing the cry, "Adventure, ahoy!" 
 
 This programme was duly carried out. The captain and 
 his men, upon approaching the coast, hid behind some 
 bushes. Stephen went on, and having ascertained that the 
 press-gang had gone away, hailed the boat and signalled to 
 the captain. By the time they arrived at the beach, the 
 boy had got up the anchor and sculled to the wharf. The 
 poor lad had been nearly frightened out of his wits by the 
 
ON THE GOOD SHIP ADVENTURE 45 
 
 noise of the struggle with the press-gang, and the long 
 absence of the captain. 
 
 "Seen anything of Bill and Jack?" asked the captain of 
 the boy. 
 
 "No!" 
 
 "Then I guess they have got them; but let's give them 
 a chance. Sing out for them, one of you!" 
 
 "Ahoy, Bill Johnson! ahoy, Jack Jones!" shouted one 
 of the sailors. 
 
 No reply coming after repeated shouting, the captain 
 said: "It's no use waiting longer, we'll have to go without 
 them. Tumble in, lads, and shove off!" 
 
 The two men took their places at the oars, the boy went 
 to the bow, and Stephen, upon a sign given by the captain, 
 took his place in the stern-sheets. 
 
 The pull was a long one, for the Adventure, as the 
 captain explained, was lying at anchor amongst a fleet of 
 West Indiamen in the King's Eoads. They had been 
 wind-bound for more than a week, but now that the wind 
 had changed, they hoped to get off in the morning. Soon 
 they were amongst the fleet, and Stephen was much struck 
 with what appeared to him the majestic proportions of the 
 vessels. He wondered how the captain could manage to 
 steer the boat direct to his own ship. 
 
 Presently the captain cried: 
 
 "Easy all! vast oars! boat-hook out!" and they steered 
 alongside of a large vessel. A rope-ladder with wooden 
 steps hung over the side. Up this the captain swarmed, 
 followed quickly by Stephen, who then for the first time 
 put his foot on the deck of a ship. 
 
 It was too dark for Stephen to see what sort of a craft 
 he had come on board; nor was he allowed any time for 
 observation, as the captain told him to follow him aft, and 
 made direct for a bright light shining from what Stephen, 
 
46 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 soon discovered to be the door leading to the principal 
 cabin, or "cuddy" as it was then styled. 
 
 Stepping over a high combing, they found themselves in 
 a short passage, with the steward's pantry on one side, and 
 what appeared to be a sleeping-cabin on the other. This 
 led to the cabin, which, to the inexperienced eyes of 
 Stephen, appeared quite a grand saloon. In the middle 
 was a long table, on each side of which was a fixed bench 
 upholstered with horsehair cloth, and fitted with a mahogany 
 swing-back rest. The two sides of the room were formed 
 of wooden partitions, in which were doors leading to several 
 private cabins. Round the farther end, following the 
 horseshoe form of the stern, was a series of lockers with 
 horsehair cushions, forming a species of sofa. At the end 
 of the table stood a stove. Looking up, Stephen saw that 
 the roof was formed by the beams supporting the poop- 
 deck, above which rose a domed skylight. Suspended over 
 the table from one of the beams was a swinging lamp. 
 From another beam hung a large tin parrot-cage. Attached 
 to a third was a mariner's compass. All the woodwork 
 was painted white. 
 
 At the table three men sat chatting, dressed in the style 
 customary amongst ship's officers at the time. 
 
 " You have been longer than you expected 1 sir," said one 
 of them, addressing the captain. 
 
 "Yes, Mr. Roberts, and but for the help of this lad," said 
 the captain, pointing to Stephen, "I should have been a 
 good bit longer; nearly got nipped by a press-gang. As it 
 is, they've got Bill Johnson and Jack Jones, worse luck ! " 
 
 Stephen was then introduced to the officers by the 
 formality of the captain giving their name and rank, as he 
 indicated each with a wave of his hand. 
 
 "Mr. Roberts, chief officer; Mr. Wright, third officer; 
 Mr. Carter, supercargo and purser. Ah! I had forgotten, 
 
ON THE GOOD SHIP ADVENTURE 47 
 
 my name is Captain Sommers. Mr. Hargreaves and Mr. 
 Wainwright, the second and fourth officers, are now on 
 watch on deck." 
 
 "I guess, Herrick," continued the captain, "you are now 
 pretty well played out, so after some refreshment you can 
 turn in upon one of these lockers," pointing to the semi- 
 circular bench at the stern. " The steward will bring you 
 a blanket and pillow. To-morrow I will arrange about 
 your quarters and your rating on board, and you will get a 
 sea rig- out from the slop-chest. You can't go on wearing a 
 smock on board ship." 
 
 Soon a plentiful supper was placed on the table, and 
 having done full justice to it, the captain and Stephen both 
 " turned in ". 
 
 At daybreak next morning Stephen was awakened by 
 the noise of many footsteps tramping overhead. He found 
 the cabin empty, and immediately sought the deck, where 
 a picturesque sight met his view. 
 
 It was one of those mornings, rare in November, when 
 the sun had risen brightly over an almost cloudless sky, 
 illuminating the Welsh hills on the right and the rocky 
 Devonshire coast on the left, whilst the spires of Bristol 
 and the white houses of Avonmouth could be easily dis- 
 cerned over the ship's stern, and each ripple of the water 
 reflected a glint of light. The air felt exhilarating, and the 
 movement all around added animation to the scene. 
 
 The whole fleet was busy weighing anchor. From the 
 forepart of the Adventure, and from every ship near, came 
 the regular "clink, clink" of the windlass pauls, and the 
 choruses of the heaving- songs loudly vociferated by the 
 men. Sails were being loosened, and hung in festoons till 
 they were sheeted home in response to the orders shrilly 
 piped or hoarsely roared by the boatswains. On the poop, 
 or raised after-deck, of each ship stood the captains and 
 
48 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 junior officers, the chief officers superintending the anchor- 
 heaving from the topgallant forecastle. 
 
 Captain Sommers was too busy with his duties to give 
 Stephen more than a hasty nod in response to his salute, 
 but on the poop he met with Mr. Carter, the supercargo, 
 who at this stage of the voyage was an "idler". He 
 received Stephen kindly, and, entering into conversation, 
 pointed out many things which, in the lad's ignorance of 
 nautical affairs, would otherwise have escaped his attention. 
 
 "Yes, all these vessels are West Indiamen, going out 
 under the convoy of those two frigates over there," pointing 
 out two ships which even a landsman's eye could see were 
 men-of-war, His Majesty's ships Swiftsure and Hero. 
 
 " There are too many French privateers about at present 
 for merchantmen to do without such an escort." 
 
 ■ Anchor's apeak, sir ! " shouted the chief officer. 
 
 " Sheets home ! " cried the captain in response. 
 
 A rush of men to the belaying-pins, ropes cast off, then 
 pulled taut with many a "Yo heave oh!" and soon the 
 ship is under way, with the white sails bellying to a favour- 
 able breeze. 
 
 One frigate takes the lead, the merchantmen following 
 in close order, and the other man-of-war brings up the rear. 
 
 A beautiful sight, this setting forth of a fleet, whether 
 seen from the shore or from the deck. Busily the crew are 
 engaged, catting the anchor, lashing the boats, coiling the 
 ropes, and putting all things " ship -shape and Bristol 
 fashion ". 
 
 " Now that we have started, we'd better put you into sea- 
 faring trim also," said Mr. Carter; "so come down with me 
 to the store-room." 
 
 " The captain has not yet told me what rating you are to 
 have," continued the supercargo, when they had the " slop- 
 chest" open before them, "but I presume that he means 
 
ON THE GOOD SHIP ADVENTURE 49 
 
 you to live aft, and so I shall serve out to you a junior 
 officer's outfit." 
 
 When Stephen had thrown off his rustic dress and donned 
 his nautical suit, quite a transformation was wrought in 
 him. No one would have thought from his appearance that 
 he had not been brought up at sea. Nor, though the ship 
 was now rolling considerably, did he feel the slightest 
 symptoms of sea-sickness. There is something in heredity 
 after all. 
 
 Returning to the deck with Mr. Carter, he now began 
 to take more close observation of the ship upon which he 
 had so suddenly embarked, the supercargo aiding him by 
 his explanations. The Adventure was a vessel of consider- 
 able size for that time, 400 tons burden, Mr. Carter 
 informed him. She was modelled upon the roomy lines 
 in vogue in those days, wide in the beam, bluff-bowed, with 
 raised poop and topgallant forecastle. High bulwarks pro- 
 tected the waist, and she was ship-rigged. 
 
 Six carronades on slides stood on the main-deck, and 
 twelve-pounder bow and stern chasers were placed on the 
 forecastle and poop. Round the masts stood muskets in 
 racks and cutlasses in stands below the break of the poop. 
 In these times of war no merchantman went to sea without 
 such accessories, as seamen never knew when they might 
 be called upon to defend their ship. 
 
 The crew, as they mustered on the main -deck to be 
 divided into watches, numbered about sixty men, and a fine 
 lot of fellows they looked. 
 
 There was no need to repeat the summons when the 
 steward announced, at eight bells, that breakfast was on 
 the table. The fresh sea-air had sharpened all appetites. 
 
 The meal over, the captain asked Mr. Carter and Stephen 
 to remain in the saloon, as he wished to talk to them. He 
 put a few questions to Stephen with regard to his edu- 
 
 ( M 806 ) D 
 
50 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 cational attainments, and then said, "I think the best 
 position I can put you in will be that of clerk or assistant 
 to the supercargo, who will require some help by and by. 
 Mr. Carter will instruct you in your duties, and enter your 
 aame in the ship's books." 
 
 This was a satisfactory arrangement, as Stephen, from 
 his inexperience, would have been of little use in any other 
 department. It also promised to leave him some leisure 
 in which he could pick up nautical knowledge. 
 
 Returning to the deck, for he could never stay long out 
 of sight of the sea, Stephen eagerly watched all that was 
 going on, and everything being so novel, he found unending 
 sources of interest, whilst he seemed to learn the meaning 
 of each operation as if by instinct. 
 
 In the afternoon Mr. Carter assigned him a berth in one 
 of the cabins, and then inducted him to his office; giving 
 him manifests and other papers to copy, which he did 
 satisfactorily. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII 
 
 A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 
 
 UNTIL that evening, so completely had his mind been 
 taken up with the novelty of his surroundings, it had 
 not occurred to Stephen to ask to what country the ship 
 was bound. " We're going to the West Indies, I suppose," 
 said he, appealing to Mr. Carter, " since you told me that 
 all these ships were West Indiamen, but to what part?" 
 
 To his surprise, instead of replying directly, the super- 
 cargo put on an air of mystery. 
 
 " Well," said he, after a pause, " I think that there can be 
 no harm in telling you now, as you are sure to find out 
 
A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 51 
 
 sooner or later; but I must ask you to be discreet, and tell 
 no one until the proper time comes." 
 
 Greatly mystified, and with curiosity fully aroused, 
 Stephen replied that his discretion might be relied upon. 
 
 "Yes," went on Mr. Carter, evidently pleased to have 
 someone to whom to communicate the news, " we are bound 
 upon a singular expedition, and none but the officers know 
 our real destination. The men for'ard have all been shipped 
 upon an agreement to serve for a voj^age 'to the West 
 Indies, the South Seas, or elsewhere as the captain may 
 direct ', for a period of one year or more. To get them to 
 join on these terms, we had, of course, to oner them some 
 inducement, and all the crew will, according to the articles, 
 be entitled to a share in the profits of the voyage over and 
 above their wages. We offered a good bonus on their 
 signing on, and had no difficulty in getting as many men 
 as we wanted ; for ' Jack ' as a rule is a reckless fellow, 
 thinking only of present enjoyment, and I believe, if one 
 offered enough, he could fill a ship with sailors, even if she 
 had only bare ribs and was bound for 'Davy Jones's 
 locker'. That is why we were able to pick out good men 
 and to take a larger number than usual. The Adventure 
 has been in the regular West India trade for years, and 
 none of us expected, when we arrived home from our 
 last voyage in October, but that we would now be on our 
 regular course. However, one day Captain Sommers and 
 I received a message telling us that the owners, Messrs. 
 Blount & Co., of Bristol, wished to see us at the office at 
 once. When we got there we found the partners in a state 
 of great excitement. ' We have sent to consult with you, 
 gentlemen,' said the head of the house, 'upon a project 
 we have been thinking over seriously in the last few days, 
 since we value your opinion as old servants of the house, 
 and we shall require your aid in carrying it out '. 
 
52 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 " The captain and I intimated that we were all attention. 
 
 " ' You must know ', went on Mr. John Blount, senior, in his 
 stately manner, * that some remarkable events have recently 
 occurred in South America, of which you, being on the sea 
 at the time, could have no means of hearing. You are 
 aware, of course, that the whole of South and Central 
 America, and Mexico as well, are held by Spain as colonies, 
 and though the richness of these countries and the great 
 harvest of trade which could be gathered there have long 
 attracted British merchants, we have been unable to avail 
 ourselves of them, because the Spanish colonial system 
 strictly prohibits them from trading with any country but 
 Spain. Now, so long as England was on friendly terms 
 with Spain, we could not well disregard the laws of that 
 kingdom without incurring a greater responsibility than we 
 cared to risk. But since Spain had the temerity to form an 
 alliance with France against us, and to send her fleet, in 
 company with that of France, to attack us — which attempt 
 was, thank God, frustrated last year by the gallantry of 
 Lord Nelson at Trafalgar — our Government considers that 
 we are in actual hostilities with that country. It was, 
 therefore, open to any English house to send out vessels to 
 trade with the Spanish colonies. My junior partners here 
 frequently suggested that we might make the venture, but 
 I am rather old-fashioned — and cautious, and thought that 
 we had better wait till we saw a good opportunity. That 
 opportunity appears now to have come.' 
 
 " The captain and I pricked up our ears, eagerly waiting 
 to hear what was to follow; but the old gentleman was 
 not to be hurried, and after taking a pinch of snuff he 
 proceeded : 
 
 " ' You may remember, Captain Sommers, for you were 
 in England at the time, that last year news came of some 
 Spanish galleons, which were captured at the mouth of the 
 
A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 53 
 
 river Plate by an English squadron under Captain Moore, 
 who took booty from them amounting to over two millions 
 sterling. Then another squadron, under Commodore Sir 
 Home Popham, sailed upon a secret expedition, which 
 everybody thought was going in the same direction. It 
 turned out, however, that the Government had another 
 purpose in view, namely, that of taking the Cape of Good 
 Hope settlements from the Dutch. Well, it appears that 
 this expedition found their task quite easy, since the Dutch 
 gave in after a single fight of little importance. Such an 
 easy victory seems quite to have disappointed Commodore 
 Popham and Sir David Baird, the general in command of 
 the troops, though I confess I cannot see why.' 
 
 " ' Ah ! ' broke in young John Blount, who is rather a 
 sporting character, ' but I can. It is easy to see how such 
 fellows as Popham, who is a brave and gallant man, though 
 he makes himself ridiculous sometimes by his awful boast- 
 ing, and Sir David Baird, 'the tiger of Seringapatam ', 
 would be simply spoiling for a fight. What do such men 
 as these care for the causes or the political effects of a war? 
 It's the fighting they love for mere fighting's sake.' 
 
 " ' John,' said the old gentleman testily, ■ pray, don't 
 interrupt me. As I was saying, it appears that an 
 American ship-captain arrived at the Cape just about this 
 time, and told Sir Home Popham that there was a 
 splendid chance for him if he cared to make a dash at 
 Buenos Ayres. The Spaniards, that captain said, had made 
 themselves so odious to the natives (though most of them 
 were of Spanish descent) by their arrogance and oppression, 
 their only idea being to wring as much money as they 
 could out of the colony, that the colonists would not raise 
 a finger to help the mother-country. As Spain itself was 
 in such a state of decrepitude, owing to internal revolts and 
 the intrigues of France, it could not send any troops to 
 
54 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 support its authority, and, moreover, the Spanish fleet had 
 been completely destroyed by Lord Nelson. 
 
 "'Tidings such as these were too much for the equanimity 
 of such a daring man as Commodore Popham. So without 
 waiting for the authorization of the Government, he decided 
 at once to take upon himself the responsibility, and make 
 a raid on the Spanish colonies, assuming, no doubt, that 
 success would justify him in the eyes of his superiors. 
 So it appears that he set out at once with only five men-of- 
 war and five transports, carrying about twelve hundred 
 soldiers, including officers, upon his daring expedition. 
 Nobody in England heard anything about this until the 
 arrival of the frigate Narcissus in the Thames a few weeks 
 ago with despatches from Major-general Beresford, the 
 commander of the troops. 
 
 " ' The news brought in these despatches sent a thrill 
 through England such as had not been experienced since 
 the glorious news of Trafalgar. They told how General 
 Beresford had landed, on the 25th of June, a little to the 
 south of Buenos Ayres, with only about sixteen hundred 
 men, and marched upon the city. How, next morning at 
 daybreak, they met the Spanish forces, which had come 
 out during the night to defend the place; and though 
 the latter had taken up a very strong position, they were 
 unable to withstand the impetuous rush of the English, who 
 drove them from their position at the point of the bayonet, 
 and across a small river which forms the southern boundary 
 of Buenos Ayres, after less than an hour's fighting; the 
 Spaniards leaving behind them, in their precipitate flight, 
 three cannons, and a large quantity of small-arms which the 
 men threw away as they ran. The enemy blew up or 
 burned the bridges over this river, the Eiachuelo, as it is 
 named, but that did not stop our gallant troops, as during 
 the night they kept hard at work making rafts, using the 
 
A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 55 
 
 timbers from the adjoining houses, and tying them together 
 with strings of raw hide. Next morning it was seen that 
 the opposite bank of the river was lined with Spanish 
 troops, but a few volleys from our men raised quite a panic 
 amongst them, and they broke and fled without waiting for 
 the English to get across. It was then an easy business to 
 ferry our troops over, when they immediately formed up 
 and marched on the town. 
 
 "'Soon they saw a Spanish officer, evidently of high rank, 
 riding to meet them with two troopers as escort, one of 
 them bearing a flag of truce, and were astounded to find 
 that he was an emissary from the commandant of the fort, 
 from which they were then more than two miles away, 
 asking for terms of surrender. The officer told them that 
 the Spanish governor, the Marquis of Sobremonte, had 
 been so terrified that he had fled inland during the night 
 with a few followers, taking with him the contents of the 
 treasury, which filled several large carts with gold and 
 silver. The officer asked that the garrison should be 
 allowed to march out with the honours of war. General 
 Beresford, gallant Irishman as he is, was not likely to 
 accept such a proposal, especially when he saw that the 
 enemy was in such a state of 'funk'. So he briefly told 
 the officer to go back and tell his commandant that he 
 would see about arranging terms after he had taken pos- 
 session of the place. He at once ordered the troops to 
 advance. They marched through the streets without 
 meeting the slightest resistance, the people standing at 
 their doors, gaping at them with complete surprise, almost 
 paralysed at their audacity when they saw how few they 
 were in number. They marvelled what sort of men they 
 could be, especially when they saw the 71st Highlanders, 
 who led the van, in a uniform more outlandish than they 
 could have imagined, and heard the unearthly music of the 
 
56 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 bagpipes. Following them came about four hundred blue- 
 jackets and marines, and a few companies of artillery wound 
 up the rear. 
 
 '"When they reached the fort they found the doors open, 
 and learned that the garrison had fled helter-skelter out of 
 the place when they heard the English were coming. A 
 perfect roar of laughter went through the ranks at the 
 cowardice of the 'Dons'. Never could such an easy 
 victory have been anticipated. Great was the enthusiasm 
 of the troops when General Beresford, having formed them 
 into square in the central court of the fort, ordered the 
 British flag to be hoisted amidst the cheers of the men and 
 the strains of ' God Save the King '. 
 
 "'Addressing the troops, General Beresford reminded 
 them that it was in that very month, two hundred and 
 twenty-six years before, in June, 1580, that the Spanish 
 flag had been first raised over that very spot by Juan de 
 Garay; "but now," said he, "it is replaced by our grand 
 old flag, and we hope it will wave there for ever!" 
 
 "'Having set the guards, the troops were broken off, and 
 immediately the inhabitants came in, offering them refresh- 
 ments of all kinds, with the idea of securing the good-will 
 of their captors, regarding whose ferocity they had heard 
 such terrible tales from the Spaniards. Presently a depu- 
 tation of the leading citizens arrived, headed by the 
 trembling mayor, and offered General Beresford a large sum 
 of money if he would spare their lives and their property. 
 
 '"Their crouching terror almost took the gallant general's 
 breath away. He told them to go home and he would soon 
 let them know what he intended to do. 
 
 "'That afternoon the people were surprised beyond mea- 
 sure upon reading a manifesto which the general ordered to 
 be stuck up on the cabildo (town-house). In it he announced 
 that he had taken possession of the country in the name of 
 
A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 57 
 
 His Britannic Majesty, but that no one would be molested 
 who did not take up arms against the British. All Spanish 
 troops would be allowed the honours of war if they laid 
 down their arms and surrendered as prisoners of war; all 
 the native militia might return to their homes if they 
 would take the oath of allegiance to King George; no one 
 would be obliged to take up arms against His Most Catholic 
 Majesty of Spain. All private and ecclesiastical propertj^ 
 would be respected. The local authorities would retain 
 their offices, and the clergy their benefices. No fresh taxes 
 would be imposed. Every respect would be paid to religion 
 and private rights. Any private property made use of 
 would be paid for, but the property of the Spanish crown 
 must be handed over to the British general. 
 
 "'The people could hardly believe their eyes, so different 
 was this treatment from what they expected, and a general 
 feeling of relief, and even of friendliness to the new-comers, 
 pervaded the town. 
 
 "'But the general had not forgotten about the treasure. 
 As soon as the ceremony of hoisting the flag was over he 
 sent off a detachment of only thirty men, such was his 
 contempt for the Spaniards that he did not think they 
 would show fight, even in defence of their money. 
 
 "'It happened just as he imagined, for the guards ran 
 away as soon as the British came up to them, and in a few 
 days the troops were once more roused into tremendous 
 enthusiasm by seeing the treasure-carts come back under 
 the escort of their comrades. 
 
 "'When counted, it was found that their booty amounted 
 to 1,086,208 dollars, or about £300,000 in gold and silver. 
 
 "'In his despatch to the Government, Sir Home Popham 
 has waxed eloquent over this feat of British arms. You 
 know that he is notorious for his boasting and high-flown 
 style, but this time there seems to be some ground for his. 
 
58 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 raptures. He points out that with a handful of men we 
 have captured a city of some sixty thousand inhabitants, 
 occupying several square miles. But that is not all; he has 
 added to the British dominions a territory covering over a 
 million square miles, abounding in every kind of natural 
 wealth. Vast herds of cattle roam upon its plains, its possi- 
 bilities for agriculture are enormous, while its mineral riches 
 are said to be fabulous. 'At length,' he says, 'we have 
 taken the famous El Dorado, so long sought for.' He tells 
 how vast rivers penetrate this domain, navigable for two 
 thousand miles, to the very heart of the South American 
 continent. 
 
 "'He adds that the inhabitants are most anxious to trade 
 with us, being tired of the restrictions so long imposed by 
 Spain, and that he, General Beresford, and all the other 
 officers are being most hospitably entertained by the leading- 
 colonial families. 
 
 " ' You may imagine,' continued Mr. Blount, ' what a 
 sensation was caused in London upon the publication of 
 these despatches. The lord mayor immediately proclaimed 
 a public holiday for the reception of the victors. Never 
 was there such a scene as that of the procession from the 
 Narcissus at the docks up to the Bank of England to deposit 
 the treasure. The crowds were greater than on lord mayor's 
 day. First came a detachment of marines, then followed a 
 string of five wagons, each marked ' Treasure ' in large 
 letters, and drawn by six horses. The first was surmounted 
 by the royal banner of Spain, which had been taken from 
 the fort of Buenos Ayres. The following ones bore small 
 flags with the inscriptions ' Popham ', ' Beresford ', ' Buenos 
 Ayres', and 'Victory'. Behind the convoy came the blue- 
 jackets dragging the three cannons captured in the first fight. 
 
 '"The streets rang with cheers for Beresford, Popham, 
 and the glory of Old England. 
 
A STORY OF BRITISH ENTERPRISE 59 
 
 " ' It would have been foolish,' concluded Mr. Blount, 
 'and not in accordance with the traditions of Bristol ad- 
 venturers, had we neglected to take advantage of such an 
 opportunity as this; so we decided that we would send out 
 the Adventure on her next voyage to the river Plate. This 
 is what I have sent for you, gentlemen, to tell you. Of 
 course," he added, "it is open to you to decline to go, but 
 in that case I do not think we shall have much difficulty in 
 finding another commander and officers. We have thought 
 that it would only be fair that everyone who took part in 
 the expedition should share in its profits, so that on behalf 
 of the firm I can promise you that, should you decide to 
 go, you will probably receive a substantial bonus in addi- 
 tion to your wages.' 
 
 "Captain Sommers and I without hesitation expressed 
 our willingness to join the expedition. The story we had 
 just heard naturally fired our curiosity and enthusiasm. 
 We immediately entered into discussion of the plans. 
 
 "'Of course you will readily see,' said Mr. Blount, 'that 
 the success of the venture will, to a very great extent, 
 depend upon keeping our design a secret. Should our 
 competitors get wind of it, they might follow suit, and 
 overload the market out there; so, gentlemen, you must 
 be very discreet. We propose to load the ship with goods 
 such as we think will find a ready sale in the Spanish 
 colonies, under your superintendence, Mr. Carter, as you 
 will have to represent us in disposing of them. Captain 
 Sommers, you will ship your crew for an indefinite period 
 and voyage, and arrange so that the Adventure, to avoid 
 suspicion, sails with the regular West Indian fleet.' 
 
 "So now you know, Herrick," concluded Mr. Carter, 
 " where the ship is bound for, and I hope we shall all have 
 good luck." 
 
 The exciting story he had just heard, and thoughts of 
 
60 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the sudden change in his prospects, kept Stephen awake 
 for many hours that night. 
 
 CHAPTER IX 
 
 "IRISH HOT AND SCOTCH COLD" 
 
 NEXT morning, when Stephen came on deck, he found 
 that the ship was sailing along in sight of land, 
 which Mr. Carter informed him, after their mutual salu- 
 tations, was the south coast of Ireland. 
 
 The weather was bright, the sky almost cloudless, and 
 a steady favouring breeze was blowing. It was a glorious 
 sight. The sea was now of a greenish-blue colour, necked 
 with white foam on the crest of the waves. Around them 
 were the companion ships, each showing a spread of white 
 canvas. The land was so near that the houses, and even 
 the roads and hedgerows dividing the fields, could be dis- 
 cerned. Its general colour was a bright-green, interspersed 
 with patches of a darker hue, almost black, where a bog 
 or patch of trees occurred, and it looked like some vast 
 moving panorama, as the ship sailed on, new aspects con- 
 stantly presenting themselves. 
 
 Stephen was suddenly awakened from his entrancement 
 by the recollection of the Scotch sailor who had spoken 
 to him of his father. The desire to hear more from him 
 immediately drove away all other thoughts. But where 
 was the man to be found 1 
 
 "Oh! that will be Sandy Fulton, no doubt; one of our 
 A.B.'s," said Mr. Carter, when Stephen had explained to 
 him his quest. " You will find him for'ard." 
 
 Stephen at once made his way to the fore-part of the 
 
"IRISH HOT AND SCOTCH COLD" 61 
 
 ship, where he was so fortunate as to find the man he was 
 in search of, smoking his pipe in company of the Irishman, 
 who had also been of the party on the previous night, 
 underneath the break of the forecastle. 
 
 So transformed was Stephen in his new attire that at 
 first the men did not recognize him. 
 
 " Ou aye, laddie," said the Scotchman, when he gathered 
 who was addressing him. "Beg your pardon, sir," as he 
 noticed Stephen's uniform. "I mind fine your speaking 
 to me about Roger Herrick, but really I canna tell you 
 much aboot him. He was mate o' the Flying Fish, as I 
 said, when I was apprentice, and as fine a sailor-man as 
 ever walked a deck — liked by everybody. But he left 
 us sune after I joined that vessel. I heard that he had 
 gone as chief mate on board a big ship, the Bristol Clipper, 
 bound for the East Indies, an' that's aboot a' I can say." 
 
 This was a disappointment to Stephen, but he continued 
 to ply Sandy with questions, which the Scotchman answered 
 as best he could. 
 
 "Isn't it a darlin' counthry?" suddenly exclaimed the 
 Irishman, looking at the land. " What would I not give 
 to be ashore there amongst the praties? Och, me own 
 Green Isle!" 
 
 "It's a wonner tae me," retorted Sandy, "that ye ever 
 left it, if ye're sae fond o' ye're hame as a' that. Whatever 
 made ye tak' tae the sea, Mick V 
 
 " It was all along o' Father Clancy and Biddy Malone's 
 pig," said Mick. 
 
 "Let's hear the story," said Sandy, whilst Stephen stood 
 as an amused listener. "Tell us a' aboot it, man." 
 
 "Well, it was like this. I was but a bit of a gossoon 
 in the village of Ballymashanty, County Wexford, helping 
 me mother to look after her pratie-patch ; and a hard time 
 we had of it, for me father — rest his sowl! — had been 
 
62 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 killed in the rebellion of '98, when he joined the boys in 
 fighting the Sassenachs. Biddy Malone — may the curse 
 o' Crumwell be upon her! — was an ould crone, whose cabin 
 stood nigh the far end o' the village. Och, she was a bad 
 'un, with a tongue that would shame a Dublin fishwife, 
 and niver the good word for mortal sowl. The folks round- 
 about were all sartin she was a witch, and could cast the 
 evil eye on their bastes if they offended her, and for that 
 reason it's mighty civil they were to her face. They gave 
 her all she liked to ask, and, troth, she wasn't bashful a bit 
 in her demands. But, as you can aisily belave, it's a terrible 
 hatred they had for her on the quiet, and they would soon 
 have driven her from the place if they hadn't feared her 
 so much. Against the children in particular did she show 
 her spite. It was 'Off wid ye, ye spalpeen!' whenever a 
 boy came near her, as she shook her stick at him. 
 
 " Well, the long and the short of it was that some of us 
 gossoons made up our minds to sarve her out when we got 
 the chance, and we often thought of what game we could try. 
 
 "Biddy had that year a splendid lump of a pig, just 
 rolling in fat; small's the wonder, for she'd always got 
 plenty to give him, and proud indade she was of him. 
 
 "'Be jabbers,' thought I as I was passing her house wan 
 af thernoon, ' what a lark it would be if somewan was to be 
 afther staling that hog!' It happened that night that I 
 had met with some of my chums for a quiet game of pitch- 
 and-toss at the back of Rory O'Connor's smiddy, and I then 
 and there proposed a plan to get aven with ould Biddy. 
 The boys were uproarious in their approval, and all wanted 
 to take part in it, but I chose only four to help— Dennis 
 M'Manus, Pat O'Shaughnessy, Phil Conlan, and Andy 
 Murphy. 
 
 " The plan was to take Biddy's pig away from the stye 
 somehow, so as to give her a big fright, as she would 
 
"IRISH HOT AND SCOTCH COLD" 63 
 
 belave that it was stolen. Now, a pig's a baste that you 
 can't drive, at laste not aisily, so we concluded that we 
 would have to carry it. So the next day we went into 
 the woods and cut a long pole, and got together some bits 
 o' rope, and after it was dark that night we crept up behind 
 Biddy Malone's cabin, and, jumping into the stye, laid hold 
 of 'grumpy'. 
 
 "Of coors the cratur squealed like mad as soon as we 
 began to handle him, and roused up ould Biddy, who tried 
 to get at us; but, as I should have said before, we had 
 taken care to fasten the cabin-door first of all. She began 
 to make a hullaballoo, but it wasn't no use, for she might 
 have screamed 'Blue Murther!' before any wan would come 
 nigh the ould witch's cabin afther dark. So, in spite of his 
 squeals, we soon had Master Pig's feet tied together, and 
 him slung from the pole, back downward, and off we set. 
 
 " 'What will we do wid him now?' said Dennis. 
 
 " I had never given a thought to that. 
 
 " ' Sure,' said Andy, ' we had better give the cratur a 
 bath; ould Biddy's stye is none o' the clanest.' 
 
 " ' Hurroo !' cried we all; ' let's to the horse-pond wid him.' 
 
 "So off we went, and, untying his feet, threw him in 
 wid a splash, 'shooing' him to make him swim to the 
 other side. Then we slunk quietly home, expecting that 
 he would be found on the common or some of the fields 
 all right next morning. 
 
 " You may guess that I felt rather queer when, the fore- 
 noon after, Father Clancy stopped me and said: 'What's 
 this I hear, Mick Scanlon, that you and some other oma- 
 douhns have been afther killing Biddy Malone's pig 1 ?' 
 
 " 'Me, your riverince, sure an' I know nothing about it!' 
 
 " 'It's no use, Mick,' said he, 'trying on that game wid 
 me, for I know more than ye think." An' he looked at me 
 wid his sharp eyes, which seemed to see through me. 
 
64 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 " ' Well, your riverince, since you know so much, I may 
 as well own up that me and some of the boys had a bit of 
 a lark last night, to try to get aven wid the ould crone. 
 You know yourself what a plague she is.' 
 
 "Father Clancy seemed like to laugh, but then he 
 suddenly looked solemn and said : 
 
 " ' That was all very well, but what need was there to 
 kill the poor baste 1 That was going a bit too far.' 
 
 " 'What do ye mane, your riverince V 
 
 " And then it came out that the pig had been found on 
 the edge of the pond that morning, wid its throat cut. 
 
 " Well, now, it puzzled me sore as to how that could have 
 happened, for I knew that all the boys had gone home 
 straight to bed when I did. But suddently I rimimbered 
 what a drover had once tould me, that a pig cuts his own 
 throat when it tries to swim. He was in the pig trade 
 from Cork to England and ought to know. You see, that 
 when the crater gets into the wather, it naturally strikes 
 out wid its fore-feet, but, owing to the construction of the 
 animal, its sharp hoofs come agin its neck, and tears it to 
 bits. But I rather feared that the eddication of the people 
 of Ballymashanty wasn't enough to learn them this fact in 
 nat'ral history, and that I would get the blame of killing 
 the pig; an' to hurt a pig is a mighty serious crime in our 
 parts. I tried to explain the matther to Father Clancy, but 
 his riverince looked black as thunder, thin he said : 
 
 " 'What you say is all stuff and nonsense, and only 
 proves your guilt. Come round to my house this afternoon, 
 an' I'll put the proper penance upon you, an' think yourself 
 mighty lucky if there isn't a constable there waiting for 
 you.' 
 
 "You may guess I felt scared out of my wits, and I 
 begun to think also that ould Biddy must really be some- 
 thing of a witch. How else could they have known that I 
 
"IRISH HOT AND SCOTCH COLD 65 
 
 had been there 1 ? So I run home to my mother at once, 
 an' tould her all about it. She had a fright as well, an' 
 said I had better go into hidings for a while. That was 
 just my idea. So I started off that very day, instid of 
 going down to see his riverince. Mother gave me some 
 bread, and I was in such a hurry to get away that I run 
 along the road and tramped on till I got to Cork. There I 
 managed to stow myself away on one of the colliers that 
 run to Scotland. They found me out pretty soon, and made 
 me work hard for my passage, so hard that I left the boat 
 as soon as it got over to the Clyde. ' The best thing I can 
 do,' thought I to myself, ' will be to ship in a big ship to 
 Ameriky, and there maybe I'll make a fortune, and be able 
 to come back, and help me poor ould mother.' I was lucky 
 enough to get a berth, and it happens that I've stuck to 
 the sea iver since. I hav'n't made my fortune yit, but 
 afther all I can't say but that I like the life.'" 
 
 " I thocht," said Sandy, after the story was finished, "that 
 it mun ha' been something extraordinar' tae mak' an Irish 
 man gang tae sea. Your countrymen, Mick, dinna seem to 
 be cut oot for sailors. Mony's the lauch I hae had owre 
 stories o' Irishmen who hae tried to be sailors. I've min' 
 o' yin, for example, whom the captain o' a vessel I was in 
 shipped at Cork, being at the time very short-handed and 
 gled to get onybody. But this fellow said he kent a' aboot 
 the sea, so he was taken on. He was up on the forecastle 
 just as we were getting doon the Cove, when the skipper 
 cries till him, ' Let go that jib ! ' but deil a movement did 
 he mak'. Again the captain shouted, 'Let go that jib, I 
 tell ye!' when Pat turned round coolly, and yelled back, 
 'Be jabbers, I ain't a touchin' ye're jib!'" 
 
 " Troth," replied Mick, " I've seen some Scotchmen who 
 were not any better fitted for sailors. I remimber once, in 
 a ship I sailed in from Greenock, that the mate took on 
 
 ( M 806 ) E 
 
66 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 a man, who we found out afterwards had been a Paisley- 
 weaver, and was driven by hard times to take any job he 
 could get, to keep him from starvation. We were just 
 getting down the Firth on a dirty night, when Tammas 
 came up to see if he was wanted, and by this and by that, 
 I'm a liar if he didn't actually put up an umbrella ! Och, 
 ye should have seen how we laughed when the mate caught 
 hold of it and chucked it overboard, and tould him to lay 
 aloft smartly! 'What d'ye mean 1 ?' said Tammas. 'Go 
 aloft at once!' roared the mate. 'What?' cried the as- 
 tonished Scotchman. 'Gang up they ladders'? Man, it 
 would be a tempting o' Providence tae dae that, an' besides, 
 dae ye no see it's raining.' 
 
 The laugh was against the Scotchman this time. So the 
 chaff went on, each pitting story against story, of which 
 both appeared to have an inexhaustible fund, telling 
 against the other's country, mingled with original observa- 
 tions characteristic of the humour of both nations. Some- 
 times the Irishman would get warm, when the hit was too 
 palpable, but nothing appeared to ruffle the coolness of the 
 Scot, who had a dry caustic wit. 
 
 In spite of their constant disputations, Stephen soon saw 
 that they were the best of friends, and that the whole crew 
 looked to them for amusement. 
 
 CHAPTER X 
 
 A "brush" and a "shave" 
 
 THE fair wind with which the fleet had started continued 
 steadily for about a week in more or less favourable 
 directions, the ships keeping fairly well together, some of 
 
A "brush" and a "shave" 67 
 
 them having occasionally to shorten sail, in accordance with 
 signals from the convoying frigates, which kept moving 
 round them like sheep-dogs driving a flock, so as to allow 
 the slower sailers to catch up. 
 
 On board the Adventure everything had fallen into a 
 regular routine. Stephen worked for a number of hours 
 each day in the purser's office, performing his duties with 
 a more intelligent interest now that he had become ac- 
 quainted with the object of the voyage. 
 
 The fleet had been about ten days at sea, when one day 
 at eight bells (noon), Captain Sommers gave orders for the 
 course to be changed to a more southerly direction than 
 that in which the other ships were steering. This gradually 
 brought the Adventure away from the main body of the 
 convoy, and it was soon observable that she was about to 
 part company with them altogether. 
 
 Upon seeing this, signals ordering the ship to resume her 
 course were at once made from the guardian frigate, and aa 
 these were disregarded by Captain Sommers, a shot was 
 fired by H.M.S. Hero, which brought up the rear. The 
 Adventure, however, kept upon its southern course, and 
 soon only the sails of the remainder of the fleet were visible 
 on the horizon. 
 
 In the afternoon Captain Sommers gave orders for the 
 whole of the crew to be summoned to the main deck. 
 When they had assembled, he addressed them from the 
 poop, explaining to them fully the object of the voyage, 
 and the chances they all had of making money if it suc- 
 ceeded. He concluded by pointing out that they would 
 now have to look to themselves for defence, if attacked by 
 a privateer or warship of the enemy. 
 
 To this the men responded by giving three cheers, and 
 declaring that they would do their duty. 
 
 The crew was from this time organized upon the system 
 
68 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 then in vogue in the navy. Each man had his station and 
 knew the duties required of him. They were regularly 
 drilled at the cannons, and at small-arm and cutlass practice. 
 
 As Stephen had volunteered as a combatant, though from 
 his position on board he was exempt from such service, he 
 was assigned a position in one of the main-deck gun-crews. 
 
 About a fortnight passed without special incidents. The 
 wind continued favourable, and the weather gradually be- 
 came warmer. 
 
 One morning a cry came from the look-out man in the 
 foretop: "Sail on the port bow!" 
 
 Immediately all was excitement on board the Adventure. 
 But few ships traversed these seas in those days, only 
 occasionally some of the East India Company's fleet on 
 their way to India round the Cape of Good Hope, a British 
 man-of-war on a cruise, or the Spanish galleons on their 
 way to or from the Spanish colonies in South America. 
 The sight of a sail was therefore always an exciting in- 
 cident. At that time it was specially so, as it was known 
 that many private owners in France and Spain had obtained 
 letters of marque, authorizing them to prey upon English 
 commerce, and had sent out their ships, heavily armed, 
 with that object. Rumour said that such vessels were not 
 very particular as to their practices, but were indeed little 
 better than pirates. To meet a British warship, in the cir- 
 cumstances in which the Adventure was then, might also 
 lead to unpleasant consequences; for not only were the 
 ship's papers made out for a voyage to the West Indies, 
 and the captain would have to account for being so far out 
 of his course; but the press laws allowed commanders of 
 warships, if they happened to be short-handed, to take as 
 many men as they thought fit, consistent with the safety of 
 the vessel, from any merchantman they might meet, and 
 press them into the service of the navy. 
 
HAVE " 69 
 
 Captain Sommers had therefore every reason to avoid 
 meeting another ship. 
 
 "What do you make of her, Mr. Roberts?" cried the 
 captain to the chief officer, who had gone up to the foretop 
 with a telescope. 
 
 11 She is still hull down, sir," cried the mate, " but I make 
 her out to be a full-rigged ship, about as large as we maybe, 
 or larger, steering about nor '-nor '-west. I would think her 
 likely to be a Spaniard or Frenchman homeward bound 
 from the Canaries." 
 
 The snow-clad summit of the peak of Teneriffe was just 
 visible over the distant horizon. 
 
 " Keep her away two points to the westward," said 
 Captain Sommers to the man at the wheel. 
 
 The effect of this alteration of the course would be that 
 the two ships, instead of approaching each other as they 
 would have done had they kept to the directions they had 
 previously been heading, would now gradually diverge. 
 
 It was soon observable, however, that the stranger had 
 noticed the change in the course of the Adventure, and had 
 altered her own so as to steer directly for her. 
 
 "That looks bad," said Captain Sommers. "We had 
 better be prepared for anything that may happen." 
 
 The men were accordingly beat to quarters, the gun 
 lashings cast off, tackles fitted, blocks oiled, the magazines 
 opened, ammunition brought up, and the decks cleared for 
 action. 
 
 Whilst these preparations were going on, the ships were 
 gradually getting nearer, and though Captain Sommers had 
 been quietly manoeuvring to avoid a meeting, by keeping 
 still farther to the westward, he saw that keen eyes on 
 board the stranger had quickly discerned his plan, and as 
 rapidly measures had been taken to counteract it. 
 
 Captain Sommers could now see that the other was a 
 
70 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 much larger and swifter ship than his own, and, as the 
 wind was from the eastward, she had the weather -gauge 
 of him, so that, to avoid a meeting, if the stranger wished 
 it, was impracticable. 
 
 Several hours had passed since they had first caught sight 
 of each other, as the wind was but light, and now sunset 
 was close at hand. 
 
 "If we can only keep her off till after dark," said Captain 
 Sommers to his chief officer, as they stood on the poop 
 watching the stranger, "we might dodge behind Cape 
 Flyaway yonder and get out of her sight." 
 
 So saying, he pointed to a large bank of cloud lying on 
 the western horizon, which, to a landsman's eyes, looked 
 distinctly like a projecting cape of land. 
 
 At length, when the ships were within half a mile of 
 each other, Captain Sommers gave orders to hoist three 
 flags on the mizzen. This was the private signal, under- 
 stood by all ships of British nationality. 
 
 In reply, a gun was fired from the bow of the stranger, 
 evidently blank cartridge, as a signal to stop, and the 
 Spanish ensign was seen at the same time to flutter slowly 
 up to the spanker gaff. 
 
 There was now no further uncertainty, so Captain Som- 
 mers at once gave orders to hoist the British flag at the 
 peak, whilst the men at once broke out into three cheers 
 of defiance. Quickly the Spaniard drew near, at the same 
 time opening her ports and running out her guns, and it 
 was seen that she was heavily armed, having six heavy 
 cannon on each side, as well as her bow and stern chasers; 
 more than double the armament of the Adventure. 
 
 "A tough customer we have met," cried the captain; 
 "but never mind, Englishmen don't give in so readily, 
 as we'll teach Master Spaniard before we have done with 
 him." 
 
A "brush" and a "shave" 71 
 
 Again a defiant cheer rose from the crew of the Ad- 
 venture. 
 
 Just then the Spaniard let fly a whole broadside, but 
 quickly seeing his intention, Captain Sommers had ordered 
 the helm to be put up, and the Adventure swung round end- 
 on to her adversary, so that the shots mostly flew by the 
 stern. 
 
 "What on earth are ye daeing?" said Sandy Fulton to 
 his Irish comrade, as the latter involuntarily ducked his 
 head when one of the Spaniard's balls rushed hurtling be- 
 tween the main and mizzen masts, "Dae ye no see, Mick, 
 that if ye were in ony danger, ye're head wud be aff before- 
 ye had time tae nod it?" 
 
 A roar of laughter at the discomfited Irishman broke- 
 out. 
 
 "Sure," said Mick, "how was I to know*? I never had 
 no acquaintance with them sort of things afore, but it's a 
 veteran I'll soon be in less than an hour, even if I'm kilt." 
 
 The Adventure now began to reply, but it was little she 
 could hope to do with her pop-guns of carronades against 
 the strongly-built hull of her enemy; her only hope was 
 to bring down some of the top-hamper, and so retard her 
 sailing powers. So the orders given were to fire high. 
 
 The third shot cut the mizzen peak halliards of the 
 Spaniard, and down fluttered the ensign. 
 
 " Hurrah!" cried the captain, "a guinea to the man who 
 laid that shot ! Where is he ?" 
 
 Stephen stood out from his position and held up his 
 hand. Truth to tell, his aim had been more a matter of 
 luck than of skill. 
 
 "Pass it along, men, pass it to Herrick!" shouted Captain 
 Sommers, taking the coin from his pocket, and it was duly 
 brought to the lucky gunner. 
 
 A flush of joy went through Stephen. It was the first 
 
72 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 money he had earned in his new career, and the circum- 
 stances in which he had won it made it all the more 
 gratifying. 
 
 But there was not much time for such by-play. The 
 Spaniard had now got the range, and her fire was producing 
 terrible effect. 
 
 The Adventure was hulled several times, and about half 
 a dozen men had been knocked over on the main deck. 
 Stephen had almost been knocked insensible by the wind of 
 a shot which passed close to his head, but soon recovered 
 and got back to his post. 
 
 The Spanish soldiers, who were now seen to be clustering 
 in her tops, also began to pepper the Adventure with their 
 muskets. Suddenly a man dropped from the foretop on 
 to the deck with an astounding crash, almost on top of 
 Stephen's gun-crew as they were loading. 
 
 Just at that moment a lucky shot from the Adventure 
 brought down the foretop-gallant mast of the Spaniard, 
 and with it, of course, the foretop-gallant sails, royals, and 
 all the jibs and forestay sails, completely smothering the 
 forecastle in wreckage. 
 
 A triumphant cheer rose from the English. 
 
 "Now's our chance!" cried Captain Sommers, "give her 
 a farewell broadside;" and he steered so that the Adventure's 
 fire raked the Spaniard from stem to stern, playing great 
 havoc with the sails and rigging. 
 
 The sun had, at this very moment, sunk below the 
 horizon, and the cloud-banks, which had made " Cape Fly- 
 away", had gathered up, so that it was impossible to see 
 any great distance. 
 
 " She's crippled for an hour or two," cried Captain Som- 
 mers. "Let's show her a clean pair of heels!" 
 
 Orders were given to set full sail, and the Adventure 
 steered off to the west. As soon as it was dark, however, 
 
A WRECK AND A RESCUE 73 
 
 instructions were issued to put out all lights, and to change 
 the course to the south-east. 
 
 "She won't think of looking for us in that direction," 
 said Captain Sommers. 
 
 A thick heat-fog had now risen, cutting off all view of 
 objects two-ships' length away. Nevertheless a soft breeze 
 continued to keep the ship forging ahead. Strict orders 
 were given to preserve the utmost silence, and any instruc- 
 tions to the men forward were passed in a whisper by means 
 of a line of men posted along the deck. 
 
 Just as Captain Sommers had come to the conclusion 
 that they had got clear away, he was startled by hearing 
 the sharp barking of a dog, followed by hoarse commands in 
 a foreign language to it to keep quiet. 
 
 The anxiety of all on board the Adventure may be 
 imagined when they discerned, through the gloom, the dim 
 outline of their adversary, which almost immediately dis- 
 appeared. 
 
 " Sharp man the captain must be," whispered Captain 
 Sommers to Mr. Roberts, "to think of our trick of steer- 
 ing, and a lucky thing for us that his men did not keep 
 a better look-out. I suppose the grog they serve out so 
 liberally to those "Diegos" to keep up their courage in a 
 fight had something to do with it. By Jove! that was 
 a narrow escape." 
 
 CHAPTER XI 
 
 A WRECK AND A RESCUE 
 
 NEXT morning, though the air was clear and the sky 
 cloudless, not a sign of their enemy of the previous 
 night was to be seen. 
 
74 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 The dead were committed to the sea, with a brief cere- 
 mony, and as the wounded were reported to be doing well, 
 the spirits of all soon rose, elated by their escape and by 
 contentment with the way in which each had borne himself 
 in the fight. 
 
 And now began a period in the voyage in which Stephen 
 at last realized his ideal of a life at sea. 
 
 The ship had caught the north-east trade-wind, and went 
 steadily on her course for days, scarcely requiring the 
 pulling of a rope. 
 
 The sea had become in hue a brilliant deep ultramarine, 
 but yet was so clear that the eye seemed to penetrate 
 far into its depths, where jellyfish of various brilliant col- 
 ours and of strange form could be seen suspended. The 
 nautilus, or " Portuguese man-o'-war ", as the sailors call it, 
 floated round the ship in large numbers, their pretty white 
 shells, with the tentacles put forth as sails or oars, forming 
 a beautiful sight. 
 
 Shoals of flying-fish darted away on either side, scared as 
 the ship advanced, or it may be by the multi-coloured 
 bonito, a fish like a large salmon, which leapt out of the 
 water in pursuit. For distances of nearly a hundred yards 
 at a stretch these wonderful creatures skimmed over tho 
 water, diving at last into the crest of a wave. 
 
 At times the parrot-hued Coryphene or " dolphin " of 
 sailors, could be seen lazily circulating round the ship, or 
 the black fin of a shark, with its pilot fish, lurking under 
 the stern. And constantly in the wake flew a crowd of 
 snow-white birds, poising and circling, diving or ascending, 
 apparently without moving a pinion. 
 
 And then the nights — what pen can describe the beauty 
 of a night at sea in the tropics! The sky of a sombre 
 indigo, whilst the stars shine out with a brightness unknown 
 in temperate latitudes : the track of the ship like a milky 
 
A WRECK AND A RESCUE 75 
 
 way into the depths, whilst the crest of every wave sparkles 
 with magic brilliancy. 
 
 " And now a radiance on the eastern sky- 
 Betokens that the moon is drawing nigh, 
 Soon from the sombre depths does she emerge, 
 A coppery disk on the horizon's verge, 
 Then rising, clearing to effulgence bright, 
 Casts o'er the sea a flood of silvery light, 
 A floating bridge, along whose tremulous ray 
 Our fancies fly to scenes now far away." 
 
 One might verily imagine one's self in a "Fairyland of 
 Fancy " when lying in the roomy foretop of a ship in these 
 latitudes. The mind is lulled by the gentle swing of the 
 mast, the air, balmy and clear, allows the vision to pene- 
 trate to the extreme extent of the immense blue plain 
 below, where the azure of the sky and sea blend one into 
 the other, giving a sense of insignificance to one's existence 
 which is enhanced when, looking downwards, even the 
 deck of the ship, so extensive when below, appears to be 
 shrunk into but a little speck on the waste of waters. 
 
 At last, however, this pleasant time came to an end. 
 The wind grew fainter and fainter every day, finally dying 
 away altogether, and it was plainly seen by experienced 
 seafarers that the ship had come into that region, the 
 terror of sailors, known as the "doldrums" or "horse 
 latitudes ". 
 
 Now came an anxious time for the officers, and a laborious 
 one for the crew. Advantage had to be taken of every 
 little puff of wind, every cat's-paw or zephyr, as it circled 
 irregularly over the sea, sometimes, as could be seen by the 
 darkening ripples, just missing the ship by a few yards. 
 The heat was oppressive, and the air heavy with moisture. 
 Frequent thunderstorms would burst round and on the 
 ship, when the panting sailors, worn out by constant trim- 
 ming of the sails, would improvise a bath by stopping up 
 
76 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the scuppers, and refresh themselves by rolling in the pond 
 which the tropical downpour soon produced on deck. 
 
 By such intermittent impulses the ship was at last carried 
 over the line, when the usual ceremonious visit of Neptune 
 and his attendants took place, and those of the crew who 
 had not previously crossed were duly shaved, amongst 
 them Mick Scanlon, who spluttered as he crawled from the 
 shaving-tub, "Oh, musha, but I'm kilt entirely!" 
 
 But these regions are also the haunt of terrific storms, 
 tornadoes in their full development, and in one of them 
 the Adventure was caught. It was an appalling experience. 
 Never could Stephen have imagined the elements to pos- 
 sess such fearful power. The waves, churned into a mass 
 of foam, rushed together from all directions, the wind 
 shrieked through the rigging above like the cries of a 
 thousand demons let loose; masts bent like fishing-rods, 
 sails were blown from the bolt-ropes in shreds, and carried 
 away like a puff of smoke, and volumes of water dashed 
 solidly on deck, seemingly determined to overwhelm and 
 engulf the vessel. 
 
 On the morning after that terrible night the wind had 
 moderated somewhat, but the sea still ran mountains high; 
 the Adventure was floundering along with nothing but the 
 foretopmast stay-sail set, when the man at the look-out in 
 the fore-chains (too many seas were still coming on board 
 for anyone to venture on the forecastle) sang out, "Ship 
 on the larboard bow!" adding soon after, "appears to be in 
 distress, sir." 
 
 Steadying himself against the mizzen backstay, Captain 
 Sommers tried to examine her through the telescope, no 
 easy task in such a sea, and amidst the rain and spindrift 
 which lashed against his face. 
 
 " I should say that she is rather in distress, Mr. Roberts," 
 he soon remarked. "All her masts are gone, and she is 
 
A WRECK AND A RESCUE 77 
 
 so low in the water that she looks likely to founder any 
 minute. " 
 
 He handed the glass to the chief mate, who in turn 
 looked at the wreck, for it was little more, carefully. 
 Suddenly he exclaimed excitedly: "There are people on 
 board — they are signalling us ! " 
 
 The news quickly spread through the Adventure, and 
 caused much excitement. Sailors will never refuse to 
 help their fellows in distress, if it be humanly possible. 
 But the sea was too high for the captain to take the respon- 
 sibility of ordering out a boat. The men, were, however, 
 called aft, and asked if any would volunteer to go to the 
 rescue. Nearly all the watch at once proffered their aid. 
 The captain selected six sailors, amongst whom were Sandy 
 Fulton and Mick Scanlon; Mr. Hargreaves, the second officer, 
 offered to take command, though it was his watch below. 
 Stephen too was eager to go, but the captain told him to 
 lend a hand by bringing up some brandy and other refresh- 
 ment for the shipwrecked people and for the rescue party, 
 as they would need it. 
 
 A boat amidships was unlashed, and the davits swung 
 out. The men took their places, each with a life-belt round 
 him, and other life-belts and some long coils of rope were 
 thrown in beside them. The order was then given to slack 
 away the falls. 
 
 At the last moment Stephen managed to scramble into 
 the boat. The captain called to him to come back, but it 
 was too late. 
 
 The launching of the boat was a most difficult and ter- 
 ribly dangerous operation. At one moment, as the ship 
 rolled away, the boat would be high in the air, and only 
 kept from dashing to pieces against the side of the ship by 
 the almost superhuman efforts of the men with the oars 
 pushing her off. Next moment it would be floating higher 
 
78 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 than the ship's deck At one such time, when the falls 
 were slack, the men at each end managed to unhook the 
 tackles simultaneously and cast off. That danger was 
 overcome, but another, quite as great apparently, quickly 
 followed, namely the breaking of the sea over the bow. 
 Stephen was then found to be extremely useful, and it was 
 seen to be very lucky that he had come, for, being free from 
 the necessity of pulling, he could keep on baling, and so 
 prevent the boat from filling and swamping. The wreck, 
 being on the lee of the Adventure, was soon reached, but 
 then another set of difficulties arose. It would liave been 
 madness to attempt to board her, for it would only have 
 resulted in the boat's being staved in. 
 
 By a great effort and much skilful management the boat 
 was brought for a moment close under the lee of the wreck, 
 and a line was thrown on board. The people on deck, 
 however, apparently did not understand what they ought 
 to do, so the boat was driven off, trailing the line loosely 
 behind her. 
 
 Again the attempt was made. This time one of the men 
 on the wreck seemed to understand the movement, for he 
 tried to lay hold of the line, but failed. 
 
 Once more the heroic rescuers returned to the trial, 
 though by now they were nearly worn out by their labour, 
 and they had the satisfaction of seeing the line caught by 
 the man and made fast to the windlass-head. 
 
 Now their situation was much more secure. They had 
 merely to pull in the line till they brought the boat within 
 a few yards of the wreck, under her lee, where they were 
 somewhat sheltered from wind and sea. From this position 
 they could throw a life-buoy attached to a light line on 
 board; the danger was that it might be carried out of reach 
 by the swish of the waves. 
 
 It could now be seen that only three people were on 
 
A WRECK AND A RESCUE 79 
 
 the wreck. One, a young man, he who had seized the 
 line, was clinging to a rope fixed to the foremast, another 
 man, gray-bearded, was lashed to the windlass-head on the 
 weather side, and under the shelter of a piece of the weather 
 bulwarks still standing was a young girl lashed to a belay- 
 ing-pin. 
 
 At last the life-buoy, after several castings, was seized by 
 the younger man, who climbed up the deck with great 
 efforts, the wreck being almost on her beam-ends, and fixed 
 it over the waist of the girl. He gave a signal, and as the 
 sea rose the men at once hauled in the rope, and soon had 
 the satisfaction of pulling the girl, more dead than alive, 
 into the boat. Again was the buoy cast, and this time 
 the young man put it over his own waist, and was pulled 
 into the boat. There remained only the old man. The 
 buoy was again cast, but the unfortunate man seemed to be 
 too much dazed from cold and exposure to make any effort 
 to help himself. He simply waved his hand, apparently 
 signifying a resigned farewell. 
 
 The girl shrieked and made the most heartrending appeals 
 to the men in the boat. She spoke in a foreign tongue, but 
 it was easy to see her meaning. She was imploring them 
 to help the old man, probably her father. 
 
 " We'll try once more," said Mr. Hargreaves, " the sea is 
 going down somewhat, and perhaps we can manage it." 
 
 Just as the boat came as near as possible to the ship, 
 Stephen, who had thrown off his jacket and boots, seized 
 the life-buoy, and, making a wonderful spring, managed 
 fortunately to reach the deck of the sinking ship. Scramb- 
 ling up to the windlass, he drew his knife and quickly cut 
 the ropes lashing the old man to the windlass-head, then 
 forced the life-belt over him. Finally, he took the old man, 
 who now appeared to be in a faint, in his arms, and, clasping 
 him round the waist, let himself slide down the sloping 
 
80 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 fleck into the water, signalling to his comrades in the boat 
 to haul in. They were fortunate in getting on board, for 
 scarcely had they been dragged in when Mr. Hargreaves 
 called out, "The ship's going down! cut the line, and pull 
 for your lives!" 
 
 Just as he uttered these words, the wreck gave a lurch 
 and disappeared under the foaming waters. But for the 
 immediate action of the sailors in carrying out the officer's 
 orders, the boat would have been sucked down into the 
 vortex caused by the sinking of the ship. 
 
 As the wreck had been to the lee of the Adventure, it was 
 easy for the captain to bring down the ship, and to save the 
 men from the hard labour of pulling back, which they 
 would scarcely have managed against the high wind, after 
 their toilsome efforts of rescue. 
 
 But even when they had approached near enough to 
 secure a line to the ship, it was seen to be a very difficult 
 business to get back on board. The only means was by 
 slinging a "boatswain's chair", that is, a wooden seat in 
 a loop of rope slung from the yard-arm. By this dangerous 
 and difficult means the rescued passengers, and finally the 
 whole of the crew, were slung on board. 
 
 Captain Sommers saw that it was impossible to pick up 
 the boat, and therefore abandoned it. 
 
 The passengers were at once put to bed, and restoratives 
 given them. Stephen gave up his cabin to the young girl, 
 but that night he slept soundly enough on the saloon 
 lockers, too much tired and exhausted even to dream of 
 the exciting events of the day. 
 
STEPHEN REACHED THE DECK OF THB SxNFI> T C SHIP 
 
 Page 79 
 
DON ANTONIO'S STARTLING STORY 81 
 
 CHAPTER XII 
 
 DON ANTONIO'S STARTLING STORY 
 
 THE rescuing boat's-crew were warmly congratulated upon 
 their brave deed next morning by all on board the 
 Adventure. There was much speculation as to who the 
 people saved might be, but not until the afternoon had 
 they sufficiently recovered to give any explanation. Then, 
 in the saloon, the old man, who was now seen to be a 
 gentleman, related his story to the captain and officers. 
 
 Much to their satisfaction, they discovered that he could 
 speak English, with some difficulty it was true, and a dis- 
 tinctly foreign accent, but still intelligibly. 
 
 His name, he informed them, was Antonio Rodriguez; he 
 was a native of La Plata, but a descendant of one of the 
 oldest Spanish families who had emigrated some generations 
 before, and had acquired large estates in La Plata, the Banda 
 Oriental, and Paraguay. He was a widower, and the young 
 girl, Dona Josefina, was his daughter. The other man, 
 whose name was Ignacio Lopez, was a Spaniard who had 
 held some government appointments in Monte Video and 
 Paraguay. The old gentleman and his daughter had only 
 made his acquaintance as a fellow-passenger on the ship 
 which had been wrecked, La Purisima Conception, which had 
 been bound from Buenos Ayres to Cadiz. Don Antonio 
 told them graphically how the crew of the Spanish ship 
 had been frightened almost out of their wits by the violence 
 of the storm, especially when the carpenter had reported 
 that the ship had sprung a serious leak. All discipline had 
 been lost. Some of the crew took to praying to images of 
 the saints they had on board. Others had broken into the 
 liquor-store, and finally, driven almost mad with fear and 
 
 (M806) F 
 
82 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 drink, as the ship sank lower and lower, they had in des- 
 peration taken to the boats, abandoning the passengers to 
 their fate. 
 
 "And now," said the old gentleman in a courtly manner, 
 "I must first of all, in the name of myself and daughter, 
 thank those who so bravely risked their lives in our rescue, 
 and Senor Lopez will doubtless wish to do so also." 
 
 Mr. Hargreaves and Stephen were then duly presented 
 by the captain. 
 
 Don Antonio shook them warmly by the hand, and ex- 
 pressed his thanks graciously. Senor Lopez, who spoke no 
 English, also did so upon the position being explained to 
 him by Don Antonio, and the young lady gracefully bowed 
 her acknowledgments. 
 
 At the request of Don Antonio, the captain summoned 
 aft the sailors who had formed the boat's-crew, and Don 
 Antonio and Senor Lopez shook hands with them as well. 
 Senor Rodriguez begged the captain to explain that he had 
 lost all his effects on the wreck, but that when he got to 
 Buenos Ay res, to which port he now learned the ship was 
 bound, he would take care to reward them liberally. 
 
 Returning to the saloon, Don Antonio continued his 
 story. 
 
 He had, when a young man, travelled in Europe for some 
 years, spending a considerable period in England ; hence his 
 knowledge of the language. 
 
 "Ah, what a grand country!" he exclaimed. "What 
 liberty ! what institutions ! " 
 
 He had always longed to revisit the old world, and he 
 had considered that he was now in a sufficiently prosperous 
 position to do so. He also wished to show to his only 
 daughter the wonders he had so frequently spoken of. 
 
 "Besides," he added, "I could see that very troublous 
 times were coming for my country, and that I should be 
 
DON ANTONIO'S STARTLING STORY 83 
 
 better away for a while, to let things settle down some- 
 what." 
 
 "Ah!" he added finally, "it's a black look-out, especially 
 now that the English have been driven out of Buenos 
 Ayres!" 
 
 "What!" cried everybody; "the English driven out of 
 Buenos Ayres! Is it possible?" 
 
 A bomb-shell falling on board the Adventure would not 
 have caused greater consternation. Each saw that the 
 object of the voyage was frustrated, and that they might 
 say goodbye to their hopes of fortune. 
 
 " Tell us all about it," they cried eagerly. 
 
 "I presume that you have heard — there has been time 
 enough for the news to reach England," said Don Antonio, 
 " how General Beresford captured Buenos Ayres, about the 
 end of last June, with only about sixteen hundred men 
 under his command. Truly a most daring deed." 
 
 "Yes, yes," said the captain impatiently; "we have heard 
 all about that." 
 
 "Many of us," continued Don Antonio, "were rejoiced 
 at their success, believing that they give more freedom to 
 their colonies than the Spaniards. So General Beresford 
 and his officers were received hospitably by some of the 
 best families in Buenos Ayres, and the common people 
 also showed good-will to the soldiers. It looked for a 
 time as though the English were firmly established. But 
 there were others who were not so well pleased, especially 
 the Spanish officials, most of whom had been removed from 
 their positions, and the sympathizers with Spain. Many, 
 too, began to feel ashamed to see a city of nearly 60,000 
 inhabitants yield so tamely to the domination of only about 
 1400 men, for General Beresford had even reduced his 
 small garrison by sending home about 200 marines with the 
 treasure. By the same ship he had sent an urgent message 
 
84 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 for reinforcements, but these did not arrive as the general 
 expected, and he began to wonder if the Government had 
 ignored his request through jealousy, owing to the expedi- 
 tion not having been initiated at head-quarters in London. 
 
 "Be that as it may, things could not be expected to 
 remain as they were, when week after week went past 
 and the Spaniards saw that the English had only about 
 enough men to man the ramparts of the fort, and no 
 further forces apparently were coming. 
 
 " General Beresford is no fool, and he quite realized the 
 weakness of his position. He knew that the Spaniards are 
 a race of arch-conspirators, and though there were no open 
 signs of resistance, he doubtless heard, through his secret 
 agents, that a plot was being hatched to drive him out. 
 In fact, he at last issued a decree ordering all persons to 
 give up their arms under the penalty of death. 
 
 " Hearing that a band of men had assembled, under the 
 leadership of a Seiior Puyrredon, about a league to the 
 north of the town, evidently with the design of organizing a 
 rising, he despatched a regiment to disperse them. Though 
 the English were greatly outnumbered, they quickly drove 
 the conspirators away, and took from them nine cannon, 
 which they brought back as trophies into the town. 
 
 "For some weeks there was a lull, and the English began 
 to think that perhaps there was no great need for alarm. 
 But presently the explosion came, and on the 11th August 
 the news reached General Beresford that an army of about 
 four thousand men was marching to attack him. 
 
 " The leader of this rising was, after all, not a Spaniard, 
 but a Frenchman, one Captain Santiago Liniers, who had 
 been in the Spanish naval service, and was latterly Captain 
 of the port of Ensenada, a harbour near Buenos Ayres. 
 
 "On the morning of the 12th of August the army of 
 Liniers opened fire on the English. General Beresford 
 
DON ANTONIO'S STARTLING STORY 85 
 
 had placed his forces round the plaza, or central square 
 of the town. The troops of the 'patriots', as they had 
 styled themselves, attacked the English on three sides from 
 the streets leading into the plaza, and, being mostly horse- 
 men, were able to ,break the lines at more than one place, 
 in spite of the fierce resistance they encountered. 
 
 " Your countrymen fought like lions," said Don Antonio; 
 " but what could they do, rushed at by cavalry and infantry 
 from several directions at once, while at the same time they 
 were being mowed down by musketry fire from the roofs of 
 the houses around. 
 
 "At last the general gave the signal to retreat to the 
 fort — he would have been well advised if he had taken up 
 his position there at first — and the troops retired in good 
 order, General Beresford being the last man to cross the 
 drawbridge. 
 
 " Encouraged by the success of the ' patriots ' the people 
 in the town now rose, and from the ramparts it could be 
 seen that about ten thousand men were surrounding the 
 fort, all eager to attack it. 
 
 " The English general saw that it was hopeless to resist : 
 he had lost nearly half his men. He therefore ordered a 
 flag of truce to be hoisted. 
 
 "Liniers sent an officer to demand an unconditional 
 surrender, but this was sturdily declined by General 
 Beresford, who said that he would only yield if his men 
 were allowed to march out with the honours of war. 
 
 " Struck with admiration at his bravery, Captain Liniers 
 readily agreed to grant these terms. 
 
 " The English garrison then marched out of the fort with 
 drums beating and banners flying, and piled their arms in 
 front of the cabildo, or town-house, on one side of the 
 plaza. The spectators observed a respectful demeanour;, 
 there were no cheers nor any hostile demonstrations. 
 
86 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 " Captain Liniers stepped up to General Beresford and 
 embraced him, and publicly complimented him upon the 
 gallant defence he had made. 
 
 "Having been granted the honours of war, General 
 Beresford and his men of course expected that they would 
 be allowed to leave the country freely and unmolested. 
 I am sorry to say, however, that the Spanish authorities, 
 who at once came back to office again, declared that Liniers 
 had no power to grant such terms, and at the time we left 
 Buenos Ayres, General Beresford and his officers were kept 
 as prisoners, whilst his soldiers were being sent, in parties, 
 .also as prisoners, to various places inland." 
 
 "And what became of Sir Home Popham's fleet?" 
 anxiously asked Captain Sommers. 
 
 "Well," replied Don Antonio, "they could not well 
 remain at Buenos Ayres after what had happened. So 
 they went down to Monte Video and tried to take that 
 place by assault, but were unsuccessful, so they have gone 
 off to a place named Maldonado, on the Atlantic coast of 
 the Banda Oriental, where we heard they had succeeded in 
 effecting a landing — the place is too isolated for much resis- 
 tance to be made, and according to the latest accounts they 
 were there still, probably waiting for reinforcements, or 
 orders to leave for England." 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 PEPITA 
 
 THE astounding news which they had just heard from 
 Don Antonio threw Captain Sommers and his officers 
 into a state of great alarm and perplexity. It was evident 
 that, if Spanish authority had been re-established at Buenos 
 
PEPITA 87 
 
 Ayres, the very raison d'etre of the expedition had vanished, 
 and if the British fleet had been recalled, as was not im- 
 probable, in view of the attitude taken by the Government, 
 it would be simply going into the lion's mouth for the 
 Adventure to proceed to the River Plate. 
 
 After a long and anxious consultation with his officers, 
 however, Captain Sommers decided to go on. He felt it 
 would be cowardly to abandon any opportunity; but he 
 resolved to approach their destination with the greatest 
 caution, and to put to sea again if he found that there was 
 no chance of carrying out their scheme. 
 
 As the state of affairs became known throughout the 
 ship, a general feeling of anxiety and depression was pro- 
 duced. 
 
 Probably the least affected by that feeling was Stephen, 
 for he had not been led to embark on this expedition by 
 the hopes of making great gain, but merely joined it 
 casually, and from pure love of the sea and of adventure. 
 
 The storm had died away, and nature appeared to have 
 withdrawn all obstacles to their progress. The ship had 
 now caught the south-east trades, and the weather was as 
 lovely as it had been in the northern trade-wind belt. Day 
 after day the ship pursued her way with favouring breezes 
 over a lovely blue sea. 
 
 Stephen had now plenty of leisure on his hands, the 
 papers relating to the cargo having been all completed. 
 He was therefore at liberty to spend much of his time in 
 the company of the passengers. He soon found that Don 
 Antonio was a wonderfully entertaining companion. He 
 was well educated, and had read and travelled much; an 
 acute observer of men and events, his commentaries upon 
 them were always worth listening to, and were expressed 
 in language both interesting and graphic. 
 
 Stephen was naturally curious to learn something of the 
 
88 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 country to which the Adventure was bound. No better in- 
 formant could have been found than Don Antonio. 
 
 He told the lad of the wonderful Kiver Plate, or more 
 properly Eio de la Plata, discovered by the Spanish navi- 
 gator Juan Diaz de Solis in 1515, but first explored by 
 Sebastian Cabot, who, though of Venetian extraction, was 
 a native of Bristol, the very port from which the Adventure 
 hailed. Cabot had given to the new country the name of 
 the "River of Silver", because he found that the Indians 
 on its banks wore massive ornaments of that metal, which 
 he imagined must be plentiful in the district. He explained 
 that, as now defined, the Plate was more like an estuary 
 than a river, being about 150 miles wide at Monte Video, 
 where it might be said to merge into the sea, and about 
 30 miles wide at Buenos Ayres, and that it was estimated 
 that more fresh water poured through it than flows down 
 the whole of the rivers of Europe combined. 
 
 He described how two great rivers, the Parana and the 
 Uruguay, whose united waters formed the River Plate, 
 penetrated the South American Continent for thousands of 
 miles, being navigable by large ships for many hundreds of 
 miles of their course; how another great river, the Para- 
 guay, fell into the Parana some seven hundred miles above 
 Buenos Ayres, coming from the far interior of Brazil, and 
 between those rivers was the country of Paraguay, one of 
 the loveliest and most romantic in the world, a perfect Eden 
 in climate and fertility. 
 
 From Buenos Ayres vast plains extended inland for 
 thousands of miles, seemingly as level as the sea, over 
 which pastured thousands of cattle, but there was room 
 for myriads more when once the aboriginal Indians could 
 be brought under restraint. Fertile rolling prairies lay 
 between the rivers Parana and Uruguay, and continued 
 across into the Banda Oriental, containing numerous cattle 
 
PEPITA 8& 
 
 " estancias ", and in time to come they might be covered 
 with wheat-fields. 
 
 Don Antonio waxed enthusiastic when he spoke of the 
 great future in store for this richly-endowed region. Not 
 only had it all the pastoral and agricultural resources he 
 had already spoken of, but the territory stretched far into 
 the tropics, where every kind of produce requiring a hot 
 climate could be raised, such as sugar, cotton, tobacco, 
 oranges, &c. Then it was bounded on the west by the 
 mighty range of the Andes, within whose recesses mineral 
 treasures of fabulous value were known to exist, and more 
 would doubtless be found. All that was required was an 
 influx of industrious people and good government. "Ah!" 
 said the old gentleman, " what might such a country not 
 become if it were in the hands of your people instead of 
 those of the Spaniards ! that is why I so greatly deplore the 
 expulsion of the English from Buenos Ayres." 
 
 Then he went on to give an account of his own estates, 
 one situated in the Banda Oriental, or province of Uruguay, 
 extending over twelve and a half square leagues, being 
 about five leagues in length and two and a half in breadth. 
 Upon it he had about 8000 head of cattle and 15,000 
 horses, more or less; they never could tell exactly, as they 
 were allowed to run loose, and only roughly counted once 
 a year. The estancias he owned in La Plata and Paraguay 
 were even more extensive, and perhaps had greater pros- 
 pects, though they were of less present value owing to the 
 fact that they were more remote from the sea-board. These 
 estates had been acquired by his ancestors in the early days 
 of the colony, when land could be had almost for nothing. 
 "Even now," said Don Antonio, "so great is the super- 
 abundance of land that estates are bought and sold, not by 
 their area at so much an acre, a square mile, or even a 
 square league, but simply by paying so much a head for 
 
90 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the cattle upon them and for the few fixtures, such perhaps 
 as half a dozen mud huts, fences round corrals, &c. Thus, 
 for example, my Uruguayan estate might be valued at is. 
 each for the head of horned cattle, and Is. each for the 
 horses, while the land would be thrown in gratis to the 
 purchaser." 
 
 On other occasions Don Antonio would relate to Stephen 
 episodes from the early history of the colony. He would 
 tell how Don Pedro de Mendoza, a Spanish officer, had 
 first founded a settlement in ] 535, twenty years after the 
 discovery of the great river, which he named Buenos Ayres, 
 that is, "good airs", on account of the salubrity of the 
 climate and gentleness of the breeze; how the first settlers 
 were driven away by the aboriginal Indians, the Querendis, 
 who killed many of them and burned their houses; and it 
 was not until 1580, or forty-five years later, after several 
 disasters, that Don Juan de Garay succeeded in firmly 
 establishing the settlement. Meantime the Spaniards had 
 established their capital at Asuncion, in Paraguay, some 
 twelve hundred miles up the river, a journey of many 
 weeks, sometimes many months, in those days. 
 
 " Ah ! they were wonderful people, those old Spaniards," 
 exclaimed Don Antonio; "so brave and so resourceful! 
 In spite of their cruelty one cannot help admiring them. 
 Think of them groping their way out to these shores, 7000 
 miles from their country, in caravels little larger than a 
 modern fishing-boat, when navigation was scarcely suffi- 
 ciently understood to be a guide to them. And then 
 winding their way up rivers full of shifting sand-banks, 
 against rapid currents, knowing that hostile savages on 
 either side watched them from behind the bushes, ready to 
 attack them whenever a chance presented itself. 
 
 "And to think," he continued, "that when the Spaniards 
 first landed there was not a horse, cow, or sheep in the 
 
PEPITA 91 
 
 country, and yet, see how they have multiplied! Why, 
 they soon came to be not only the support, but the pro- 
 tection of the early settlers. For you must know that 
 in those old days, when Buenos Ayres was repeatedly 
 attacked by the Indians, and before it had a fort, some 
 genius hit upon the idea of protecting the town by living 
 ramparts, that is, by simply driving in the half-wild cattle 
 till they surrounded the place in a continuous herd. 
 Through such a mob the Indians did not dare to ven- 
 ture, and, as they had no firearms, the protection was 
 quite effective." 
 
 With tales like these, and upon many other subjects, did 
 Don Antonio beguile the time as the ship sailed steadily on 
 before the trade-wind. 
 
 But it must not be inferred that Stephen's attention was 
 wholly taken up in listening to Don Antonio. He was 
 drawn to the passengers' society by another attraction, 
 greater even to a young man than that of the thirst for 
 knowledge. 
 
 Doila Josefina, Don Antonio's charming daughter, was 
 about Stephen's own age, barely sixteen ; but women 
 mature early under these Southern skies, so she looked 
 older, and was already blossoming into beauteous woman- 
 hood. Her hair was black as the raven's wing, her features 
 regular, and her complexion just tinged with a light olive. 
 But the strongest attraction of all was her eyes, dark, 
 liquid, and sympathetic, shielded by long, curled lashes. 
 When she had recovered from the terrible shock of the 
 shipwreck, she displayed a bright and vivacious disposition, 
 and seemed greatly interested in all her surroundings. 
 
 With her Stephen soon became the best of friends, and 
 he longed to be able to converse more freely with her. 
 This was the motive which first led him to beg Don 
 Antonio to teach him Spanish, to which request the old 
 
92 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 gentleman willingly agreed, as he admired the lad's enter- 
 prise, directed, as he thought, by purely business instinct. 
 
 Stephen's progress in acquiring the language w?s very 
 rapid. How could it be otherwise with such an incentive 1 
 More especially was this the case when Doiia Josefina took 
 part in the lessons, and helped him by repeating the names 
 of various objects in Spanish, making use also of the few 
 words in English her father had taught her. It was an 
 amusing and delightful exercise for these two young 
 people to attempt to carry on a conversation in broken 
 phrases from each other's language, supplemented by signs 
 where words failed them, while Don Antonio gravely 
 listened, correcting errors and supplying the expressions. 
 
 At length, one day when their intercourse had made 
 them more intimate, Dona Josefina exclaimed: "I think 
 you might call me Pepita instead of the formal Josefina; 
 it's the name I am always called by my father and my 
 friends, and I am sure Father will not object." 
 
 " Not in the least, hija mia," fondly replied Don Antonio, 
 " and in exchange we will henceforth call our friend here 
 Don Esteban: that's the Spanish for your name, Stephen." 
 
 And so it was arranged, and the cordial relations between 
 Stephen and the passengers who had so unexpectedly come 
 on board grew greater every day. 
 
 "I am going to let you into a little secret," said Don 
 Antonio one morning as they walked the deck together, 
 the young lady not having yet made her appearance. " My 
 daughter and I have a little private code of signals." 
 
 So saying, Don Antonio suddenly called out "Pe-pee-ta!" 
 in a manner closely resembling the hoot or cry of an owl. 
 
 "Si, papa! Aqui estoy!" (here I am) at once responded 
 the voice of Josefina, as she bounded up the companion way. 
 
 "You see," said Don Antonio, laughing, "that's the way 
 to fetch her here quickly." 
 
PEPITA 93 
 
 He then went on to explain how the idea had occurred 
 to him. One night when walking in a plantation near one 
 of his estancia houses, Pepita, then but a little thing, had 
 disappeared for a minute under the shade of the trees, and 
 when he was about to call to her an owl in one of the 
 branches hooted in such a way that the child actually 
 thought it was her father's voice summoning her. It 
 became quite a little game between them after that to 
 imitate the hoot. The sound penetrated to a much greater 
 distance than when uttered in an ordinary tone. And so 
 at last it came to be understood that whenever one of them 
 wished to call the other urgently it was only necessary tO' 
 signal the wish by hooting "Pe-pee-ta!" 
 
 After that they frequently practised this little trick 
 throughout the ship. Stephen, too, became quite an adept 
 in imitating the sound. Did he or Don Antonio observe 
 anything strange or pretty in the sea whilst the young lady 
 was below, which they thought she would like to see, they 
 had only to cry " Pe-pee-ta ! " to bring her at once upon the 
 scene. 
 
 With the other passenger, Senor Lopez, Stephen's in- 
 timacy did not develop as with Senor Eodriguez and hi& 
 daughter. Though correct enough in his conduct, and 
 courteous in a somewhat haughty way, as is characteristic 
 of the proud gentleman of his race, Senor Lopez did not 
 display any geniality or indication of friendliness to any- 
 one on board. He seemed to be of a naturally sullen 
 disposition, and Don Antonio hinted that his temper had 
 not been improved by the fact that he had lost in the 
 shipwreck all the money which he had been amassing 
 for years in order to be able to retire in comfortable 
 circumstances to Spain, and also that he was now being 
 taken back to Buenos Ayres, which he hated, and where 
 perhaps there might be some people whom he would not 
 
94 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 like to meet, however anxious they might be to see him. 
 Don Antonio confided to Stephen that neither he nor 
 Pepita liked the man, and that there had been rather a 
 coolness between them since a day when he (Don Antonio), 
 fancying that he was paying Pepita a little too marked 
 attention, had quietly indicated to him that the accident 
 of being fellow-passengers was not sufficient to obliterate 
 social inequalities. "A fellow like that," indignantly cried 
 Don Antonio, "presuming to address my daughter as a 
 euitor ! " 
 
 Senor Rodriguez further explained that as a Spaniard 
 Senor Lopez would cordially hate the English, and this 
 feeling would probably have been intensified by the recent 
 triumph of General Beresford — an affront to the boasted 
 prowess of Spain. 
 
 These remarks naturally influenced Stephen to regard 
 Senor Lopez with considerably more attention, and to 
 arouse in his mind feelings of dislike and suspicion, where 
 before there had only been indifference. His aversion was 
 intensified by the manner in which that gentleman glared 
 at him from under his bushy black eyebrows at times when 
 he thought he was unobserved. The expression did not 
 improve his appearance, which was of a type not tending 
 to arouse sympathy — dark sallow complexion, small bead- 
 like eyes set closely together, and jet-black beard and 
 moustache, the latter brushed fiercely upwards. It appeared 
 to Stephen that the Spaniard's ill-will to the British gene- 
 rally had more particularly been directed against himself 
 of late, since he had observed his growing favour in the 
 eyes of Dona Josefina, and this he could easily account for 
 after what he had heard. Doubtless the demon passion 
 jealousy was at work. 
 
 " That fellow will probably do us an ill turn if he can," 
 said Stephen to himself. " I must keep an eye upon him." 
 
A CALM AND A STORM 95 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 A CALM AND A STORM. 
 
 THE fair wind which had carried the Adventure so steadily 
 onwards for some weeks now began gradually to die 
 away, until at last the ship lay like a log in a dead calm. 
 The ocean, however, continued to heave in a slow steady 
 swell, which caused the whole of the sails to flap against 
 the mast with a noise like a pistol-shot every time the 
 vessel heeled over, as it fell from crest to trough. The 
 sun blazed down fiercely and almost vertically, causing the 
 pitch to bubble up from the seams of the deck, and the 
 heat was almost overpowering. However delightful a calm 
 may appear in theory to the landsman, whose experience 
 has only been such as that of crossing the English Channel, 
 there is nothing so trying and aggravating to the seafarer. 
 The temper of everyone on board the Adventure had well- 
 nigh gone to pieces after about ten days' experience of this 
 situation. 
 
 The mates, usually good-natured, swore upon the slightest 
 provocation, or with none at all, at the men who had been 
 put to such tiresome tasks as scraping down the masts and 
 yards, tarring the rigging, or even painting the outside of 
 the ship, being slung, for the purpose, over the side on 
 stages or boatswain's chairs. 
 
 But the most notable of all changes was observable in the 
 captain. He had been more or less upset ever since he had 
 heard the description from Don Antonio of the circumstances 
 that had recently occurred at the River Plate, and which 
 appeared more than likely to disappoint his hopes of making 
 a small fortune out of this venture, and he was naturally 
 most impatient to be on the spot, so that he might be able 
 
96 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRlt 
 
 to judge for himself what he had better do. This period 
 of enforced stagnation almost drove nim mad. As all on 
 board were more or less in the same position as regarded 
 their interests, they were ready to make allowances when 
 the captain had at times given way to outbreaks of temper 
 such as would not have been expected from one usually of 
 such civil bearing. But they began to resent it when day 
 after day he kept on "hazing" the crew, giving orders 
 direct, though an officer was present, sometimes in contra- 
 diction to the latter's instructions, and meddling wdth 
 matters in a manner tending to upset all discipline in the 
 ship. The men began to shake their heads, and to fancy 
 that "something was wrong with the Old Man"; but their 
 sympathy quickly veered into irritation when it became 
 evident to everybody that the captain, in his desperation, 
 had taken to drinking. 
 
 At first he carried on the practice in secret, and the truth 
 could only be suspected from the indications given by his 
 flushed face and somewhat stuttering speech; but soon he 
 lost all sense of shame, and brought up a bottle and glass 
 openly on deck, from which he took copious draughts at 
 brief intervals, whilst cursing volubly between -whiles at 
 everybody and everything, and rapidly turning the ship 
 into a floating hell. 
 
 Stephen as yet had formed but little idea of the absolute 
 power of a captain on board his ship, and was therefore 
 somewhat surprised that the officers did not interfere when 
 they saw that the captain was obviously in such a condition 
 as to be incapable of exercising his authority in a sane 
 manner. They ought, he thought, to take such action as 
 would put an end to a state of affairs which was not only 
 becoming intolerable, but might endanger the safety of the 
 ship. 
 
 It happened that one day Mick Scanlon was engaged on 
 
A CALM AND A STORM 97 
 
 some job on the mizzen rigging when the captain suddenly- 
 set upon him without the slightest provocation, calling him 
 all the most opprobious names he could think of, and finally 
 ordering him to go forward, with the parting remark that 
 he was no sailor, but what could be expected from an 
 Irish " bog-trotter ". 
 
 Stung to the quick, Mick flushed as red as fire, but he 
 had sufficient self-control and remembrance of the position 
 to limit himself to the reply : " Shure, Cap'n, I was only 
 afther doing me duty." 
 
 "How dare you speak back to me?" roared the captain 
 like a maniac. "Here, boatswain, trice this man up and 
 give him two dozen ! " 
 
 The boatswain stepped forward at once, ready to carry 
 out the captain's brutal order. From red, Mick suddenly 
 turned to white, and appeared to quiver all over. Catching 
 sight of Stephen, who was standing close by, Mick made a 
 sudden appeal. 
 
 " Och, Mr. Herrick, won't you spake to the captain and 
 save me from this disgrace 1 ? Sure I've done nothing, an' 
 I've never been flogged before. Do spake for me ! " 
 
 Burning with a sense of injustice, Stephen ventured to 
 ask Captain Sommers to let the man off, pointing out that 
 he had really done nothing wrong. 
 
 The result of his interference was that the captain imme- 
 diately turned upon Stephen, hurling at him the most 
 insulting terms, and concluding by asking: 
 
 "Who are you anyhow? A vagabond that I picked up 
 in a smuggler's cave. More than likely some escaped jail- 
 bird, or even a ' cheat-the-gallows ' sheep -stealer. Go to 
 your cabin at once, and stay there till I give you leave to 
 come on deck." 
 
 There was nothing for it but to obey, so Stephen sadly 
 went below, where his repose was disturbed in the next 
 
 ( M 806 ) G 
 
98 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 half-hour by the sound of the switch of the boatswain's cat- 
 o'-nine-tails, and the groans of the unfortunate Irish sailor. 
 Stephen felt deeply affronted, more especially as Don 
 Antonio and Pepita had been present during this scene. 
 
 He was comforted, however, that night by a visit from 
 Don Antonio, who came stealthily to his cabin in order to 
 tell him that he and Pepita did not think any the less of 
 him on account of what had passed, but on the contrary 
 had admired his pluck in interceding with the captain. 
 
 "But to tell the truth," said Don Antonio, "I don't 
 understand the English character. Had it been a Spaniard 
 to whom such words were spoken, it is more than likely 
 that the captain would have had a knife through his heart, 
 let the consequences be as they might." 
 
 Don Antonio continued by remarking that he was rather 
 surprised to think that such a fine young man as Stephen 
 could resign himself to stay on board a ship at the mercy 
 of such a ruffian as the captain, when, if he came on shore 
 in South America, he would find such unbounded scope for 
 his energies that his fortune was secure. 
 
 That night, though he had not yet been given permission 
 to leave his cabin, Stephen crept quietly forward in the 
 middle watch, when he felt sure the captain would be sunk 
 in a drunken sleep, in order to express his sympathy with 
 poor Mick. 
 
 He found the Irishman in a terribly excited state, also 
 suffering acutely, but the shame seemed to have affected him 
 more than anything. He was scarcely able to articulate, so 
 great was his rage and frenzy. His whole soul seemed to be 
 concentrated in the desire to "get aven" with the captain. 
 The men in the forecastle fully sympathized with him, and 
 Stephen saw that it would take little more to drive them 
 into open mutiny. Especially excited was Sandy Fulton, 
 from whose constitutional coolness and native caution a very 
 
A CALM AND A STORM 99 
 
 different result might have been expected. But even in 
 the circumstances his Scotch " canniness " did not altogether 
 forsake him. "I tell you what," he said to Mick, "it's no 
 use trying to get even with a captain; I have been lang 
 enough at sea to learn that. The best thing we can dae is 
 tae leave the ship as sune as ever we can get a chance." 
 
 These words, coming on top of Don Antonio's remarks, 
 led Stephen to form an instant resolve. 
 
 Taking Sandy and Mick apart, he whispered to them that 
 he too had resolved to leave the ship and to try his fortune 
 in South America. "It will be much better," he said, "for 
 us all to go together." 
 
 The men agreed at once; and it was then and there 
 arranged that as soon as the ship got into a port they would 
 all manage to go off somehow or other. 
 
 During the night a breeze sprang up, which gradually 
 gathered in force, so that Stephen could tell from his cabin, 
 by the motion of the ship, that she was making rapid 
 progress. 
 
 Having waited until mid-day to hear from the captain, 
 Stephen at length resolved to go on deck. The captain 
 was standing by the man at the wheel, apparently quite 
 himself again, but though he must have seen Stephen come 
 up, he appeared to take no notice of him. Nor did he 
 again allude to the matter in the days which followed. 
 Stephen sometimes fancied that the captain glanced at him 
 in a somewhat shamefaced manner, but he thought it best 
 not to raise the question, knowing that, however much in 
 the wrong, a captain does not readily apologize to a 
 subaltern. 
 
 Seiior Lopez, Stephen imagined, appeared to look at him 
 in a more malignant manner than ever. He, too, had been 
 present when Stephen had been ordered to his cabin, and 
 had then seemed to gloat triumphantly over the event. 
 
100 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Don Antonio, when Stephen confided to him his intention 
 to leave the ship, warmly applauded the idea. He gave 
 him the address of his town house in Monte Video, and 
 offered a shelter for himself and friends, should it be 
 necessary, at his Uruguayan estancia. 
 
 When Stephen mentioned his suspicions regarding Senor 
 Lopez, he quite agreed that it would be well to keep him 
 under close observation. "I have already told you," said 
 he, "that this man has many reasons to be disappointed 
 and exasperated, and probably he will try to wreak his 
 resentment upon you English, whom he regards as the 
 hereditary enemies of his race. I have noticed, too, that he 
 seems to look upon you with particular dislike, why I am 
 at a loss to know, as you helped to save his life." Stephen 
 imagined that he knew the cause. 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 "INTO THE FULMINANT DEADLY BREACH" 
 
 HAVING once caught a favouring breeze, the Adventure 
 rapidly sailed across the South Atlantic without 
 further remarkable incidents until, about a fortnight later, 
 the captain ascertained by observation that he ought soon 
 to be making the land. 
 
 A bright look-out was accordingly kept, and that afternoon 
 land was spied from the foretop, which the captain soon 
 made out to be Cape Santa Maria, just at the mouth of the 
 River Plate. 
 
 It was the last day of January, 1807, and the passage had 
 occupied about eleven weeks. 
 
 Being now certain of the position of the ship, Captain 
 
"INTO THE FULMINANT DEADLY BREACH" 101 
 
 Sommers began to cautiously creep along the; land. : The 
 situation gave rise to much anxiety, not only on account of 
 the difficult navigation, which was themior^cbji^rcmS' us 
 there were no charts of the Eiver Plate to be obtained by 
 English captains in those days, but also on account of the 
 uncertainty of the state of affairs on shore. 
 
 After a few hours' sailing it was evident from the change 
 in the appearance of the sea, muddy red water floating on 
 the blue waves, that they were approaching the River Plate. 
 
 At this juncture, when the captain was in the greatest 
 perplexity as to the course he should steer, Sefior Lopez 
 came forward and intimated that he wished to make a 
 communication to him. Don Antonio having offered his 
 services as interpreter, Seiior Lopez stated that, as he had 
 been for some years a visiting officer of customs at Monte 
 Video, he was perfectly acquainted with the river, and he 
 would now be glad to act as pilot to take in the ship. 
 
 Much relieved, Captain Sommers at once accepted the 
 proposal. 
 
 Acting under Senor Lopez's directions, fuller sail was 
 now spread, and the vessel was making rapid progress, and 
 rounding a headland, behind which, the volunteer pilot said, 
 was the port of Monte Video, when suddenly the ship was 
 brought up by a shock that nearly shook the masts over- 
 board, and threw her all aback. 
 
 " Heavens and earth," cried the captain, " we're aground!" 
 Such, indeed, was soon seen to be the case; the Adventure 
 had run on to one of the numerous sand-banks which abound 
 in the great estuary. For a time all was consternation. 
 There was good reason for alarm, considering the dangerous 
 position of the vessel and the probably disastrous ending of 
 the voyage. But soon order was restored, the captain gave 
 his orders calmly, and they were carried out with coolness 
 and alacrity. 
 
102 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 • The /carpenter, having sounded the well, gave the 
 cheering report ,that the ship was making no water. 
 Bindings ^WM £>£' once taken on both sides, and it was 
 discovered that the ship was aground only on the port 
 quarter forward. The bottom was found to be of com- 
 paratively soft mud. 
 
 After some hours the chief officer reported that the 
 water appeared from the soundings to be rising. All the 
 boats were then got out, and a strong effort was made to 
 warp the ship off the shoal. To the great delight of every- 
 body, it was at length perceptible that she had moved a 
 little, and a united effort of the boats' crews at last set her 
 free. 
 
 "Confound that fellow for a pilot!" said the captain. 
 " It's my belief that he really intended to cast away the 
 ship." 
 
 This remark confirmed the suspicions of Stephen and 
 Don Antonio, the latter even giving the captain a hint to 
 that effect. 
 
 Captain Sommers therefore decided to resume charge of 
 the ship, and he ordered two of the boats to keep about a 
 hundred yards ahead of her, and take soundings regularly. 
 
 In about two hours more all on board the Adventure were 
 startled by the sudden appearance of a large ship from behind 
 the point, evidently a man-of-war, which, immediately upon 
 catching sight of them, made a signal for them to stop, 
 and steered a course to intercept them. 
 
 What could this mean? Was she friend or foe? This 
 question was quickly answered by the glorious British 
 ensign floating out from her stern. 
 
 The men on the Adventure could not restrain themselves 
 from cheering. 
 
 A signal was soon perceived to be hoisted on the man-of- 
 war requesting the captain of the Adventure to come on 
 
"INTO THE FULMINANT DEADLY BREACH" 103 
 
 board. As the ship already had her boats out, this order 
 was quickly executed, and the Adventure was hove-to in th& 
 meantime. In about an hour Captain Sommers returned. 
 He was in a high state of excitement, and quickly told 
 the news to an eager audience on the poop. It appeared 
 that the British Government had not, after all, been inert, 
 but had despatched reinforcements for General Beresford, 
 consisting of a squadron under Rear-Admiral Sterling, and 
 about five thousand troops, commanded by Sir Samuel 
 Auchmuty. These had, however, arrived too late to en- 
 able the British to retain Buenos Ayres. They had, there- 
 fore, joined the forces of Commodore Popham at Malclonado, 
 and it was soon afterwards decided to make another attack 
 on Monte Video. 
 
 The expedition for that purpose had started on 19th 
 January, and they were actually now, said Captain Sommers, 
 besieging the place, which was offering a much greater 
 resistance than they had anticipated. He had been 
 ordered to proceed to the outer roads of the beleaguered 
 port, and there to place himself under the orders of the 
 British admiral. 
 
 Having received directions as to the course to be steered 
 from the commander of H.M.S. Medusa, the warship he had 
 boarded, Captain Sommers now proceeded with confidence,, 
 and it did not take long for him to bring his ship round 
 the point, when they suddenly came into sight of Monte 
 Video. 
 
 It was an animated scene that met the view of those 
 on board the Adventure. The Bay of Monte Video is almost 
 semicircular. To the right the town stood upon a penin- 
 sula which gradually rises from the sea. The flat-roofed 
 houses stood in terraces one above the other; two lofty 
 towers of a cathedral projected above all. On the left ex- 
 tremity of the bay the land rose in the form of a round 
 
104 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 conical hill to an altitude of about a hundred feet. On 
 this mound was a fort of masonry massively built, over 
 which the Spanish flag still flew. 
 
 Don Antonio explained to Stephen that from this hill 
 the place took its name. When the early explorers first 
 sailed up the Eiver Plate the first land the look-out man 
 descried was this eminence, which, in contrast to the flat 
 adjacent shores, seemed to him a mountain, so he cried, in 
 his Venetian lingo "Monte video!" (I see a mountain). 
 
 But the shipping in the bay attracted more immediate 
 attention than the geographical features of the land. In 
 front were eight large British men-of-war, anchored at a 
 distance of about a mile from the shore — evidently the 
 water was too shallow to allow them to go nearer,— and to 
 the left were anchored a fleet of mercantile craft. Towards 
 the latter Captain Sommers steered his ship, and soon came 
 to anchor amongst them. He then repaired on board the 
 flag-ship to report himself and take instructions from the 
 admiral. Of course no one was allowed to leave the 
 Adventure. 
 
 Captain Sommers was again full of news and excitement 
 when he returned. He had learned that the British troops 
 had been landed on 19th January, or just twelve days 
 before, and had had a good deal of hard fighting with the 
 Spanish garrison. The place was strongly fortified with no 
 fewer than 160 guns in position on the ramparts, which 
 kept up a constant fire upon the British, besides which the 
 garrison had made frequent sorties in force. The result 
 had been very doubtful for a time, but now the British 
 had at last succeeded in completely investing the town, 
 and had been able to repulse every sortie. The admiral 
 had furnished the land forces with some heavy guns with 
 which to make a breach in the wall of the city, and the 
 general had now reported that he had made what he con- 
 
"INTO THE FULMINANT DEADLY BREACH" 105 
 
 sidered to be a practicable breach, and would probably 
 attempt to take the place by storm that night. 
 
 It may easily be conceived what excitement was produced 
 on board the Adventure by this story. 
 
 All eyes were now directed towards the shore, and every 
 telescope was in requisition. 
 
 The bombardment, which had been suspended for a few 
 hours just previous to the arrival of the Adventure, while 
 the English general sent a messenger with a flag of truce 
 to the Spanish commandant summoning him to surrender, 
 now recommenced with redoubled fury, indicating that the 
 proposal had been rejected. The roaring of the cannon was 
 incessant, and the atmosphere soon became a dense mass of 
 smoke, impregnated with the smell of gunpowder. 
 
 The scene was most entrancing. It looked like a 
 panorama with firework accessories. From a spectacular 
 point of view it was splendid, but appalling and horrifying 
 when it was remembered that this was war in earnest, that 
 the issue was still doubtful, and that hundreds of brave men 
 were falling on both sides. 
 
 The position of every cannon on the walls could be clearly 
 distinguished from the flash and smoke of each discharge, 
 and also that of the besieging batteries. The course of 
 the shells through the air could easily be followed by the 
 coil of smoke left by the burning fuse. Soon the place 
 where the breach had been made could be located from the 
 concentration of the fire, and towards this spot all eyes were 
 directed. The effect of each shot was watched, and as piece 
 after piece of the wall tumbled and fell, excited cheers rose 
 from the ships. 
 
 The battle-ships kept on firing with the regularity of 
 machines, demonstrating the perfect training of the crews, 
 but the admiral apparently thought that the effect of this 
 fire was more moral than material, as now and again the 
 
106 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 gun-boats of lighter draft were seen to sail away from the 
 line of war-ships, and, running close under the walls, to 
 pour volley after volley into the town. Sometimes the 
 result would be to bring down the whole parapet and 
 cornice of a house, to the delight of the spectators in the 
 bay. 
 
 Night closed in, but still the firing went on, the flash 
 of the cannon constantly lighting up the gloom, while the 
 course of the hurtling shells could be easily followed. The 
 concussion at last brought down torrents of rain, but in 
 spite of this discomfort few left the deck that night. About 
 four in the morning there was a sudden, awful pause, and 
 a thrill went through men's minds, for they felt that now 
 the storming of the walls was taking place. At the distance 
 at which the ships lay from the shore nothing could be 
 discerned of what was going on, nor for a time was any 
 sound heard, until the sharp rattle of musketry denoted 
 that a severe struggle had begun. 
 
 With the utmost anxiety all waited for the dawn. 
 
 The first rays of sunlight exhibited the British ensign 
 unfurled, and proudly floating over the battlements. A 
 triumphant cheer burst from the whole of the ships, and 
 men went almost frantic with delight. 
 
 The might of England had again triumphed! What 
 great results might follow ! 
 
 Signals were now made to the shipping that they were at 
 liberty to communicate with the shore. Captain Sommers 
 at once ordered his boat to get ready and set out for the 
 landing-place. He was gone for some hours, and when he 
 came back he had a stirring story to tell. 
 
 He had learned from some of the officers who had taken 
 part in the engagement that the storming-party, consisting 
 of six regiments, had mustered behind the batteries, which 
 at a given signal had suddenly ceased firing, just as had 
 
lor 
 
 been observed from the ships. The column then advanced 
 in solemn silence, led by a company of the Grenadiers. 
 
 The " forlorn hope " had been commanded by Lieutenant 
 Everard, who had earnestly solicited this important and 
 dangerous post. 
 
 The distance to be traversed from the British lines to 
 the breach was about sixteen hundred yards. When just 
 about half-way the approach of the troops was discovered 
 by the enemy, and a destructive fire from every available 
 gun and from the musketry of the garrison was opened 
 upon the column. In the darkness and confusion the 
 leaders feared they had lost the right direction, for they 
 were astounded, when they gained the walls, to find no 
 trace of the breach. 
 
 In this terrible situation, uncertain how to act, and 
 exposed to a galling fire without any shelter available, 
 the troops courageously stood their ground for about a* 
 quarter of an hour. 
 
 Just then the first faint glimmer of the dawn appeared, 
 and suddenly Captain Eenny of the 40th shouted loudly, 
 "I've found the breach! Come on, lads!" Waving his- 
 sword he dashed on, followed by a crowd of brave fellows. 
 
 It was then discovered that during the night the enemy 
 had cunningly disguised the breach by throwing across it a 
 curtain of hides, and had barricaded it with piles of tallow 
 in skins, rendering it nearly impracticable. 
 
 Nothing, however, could daunt the courage or stop the 
 impetuosity of our men. Once the officers had shown them 
 the way they came on with a rush, cheering at the top of 
 their voices. 
 
 It is impossible to describe the tremendous struggle 
 which followed. Even those engaged in it retained but 
 a confused recollection of some of the incidents. 
 
 The gallant Captain Eenny fell almost at once. His 
 
108 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 place was instantly taken by Colonel Vassal of the 38th, 
 who was seen to rush right up to the barricade, mount it, 
 and wave his sword, encouraging his men to the onset, and 
 then fall, shot through the heart. Onward and upwards 
 the soldiers charged, only to be met with the deadly fire 
 and the bayonet points of the defenders. 
 
 Some dragged at the bales of tallow and hides, which, as 
 they loosened, rolled down the slope, hurling the soldiers 
 with them. From behind, fresh bales were thrown into 
 the breach, and to effect an entrance seemed hopeless. 
 
 But again and again the attack was gallantly renewed. 
 Column after column dashed to the aid of those who were 
 scaling the breach, and when at last they got over the 
 barricade and cleared it away, they poured into the town. 
 The carnage on both sides was dreadful and uninterrupted. 
 The slopes of the ramparts and the streets were thickly 
 strewn with the killed and wounded. 
 
 At length the Spaniards surrendered, and the bugles 
 sounded "Cease firing!" 
 
 Intoxicated as they were with the rage of battle, and 
 exasperated by the sight of their dead and dying comrades, 
 it was astonishing, so the officers said, to see how quickly 
 order was restored by the power of discipline. For within 
 one hour after the surrender took place the English troops 
 had manned the walls, the prisoners were disarmed and 
 placed under guard, and but for the appearance of the 
 killed and wounded, and of the battered walls, all signs 
 of a struggle had disappeared. At an early hour the 
 shops were open, and the inhabitants of the town, of 
 both sexes, were peaceably walking through the streets 
 in pursuit of their various avocations. 
 
 But many most painful scenes were still to be witnessed 
 as the people came to search for their relatives who had 
 been amongst the defenders. Here a bereaved widow 
 
A PLOT AND AN ESCAPE 109 
 
 might be seen wailing over the body of her husband; 
 there a wretched mother mourned over that of her son. 
 Many priests were giving the last offices to the dying. 
 But such scenes are best left to the imagination. 
 
 It was estimated that this brilliant victory had cost the 
 British about six hundred men in killed and wounded, 
 while the loss of the garrison must have been more than 
 double that number. 
 
 Such is the price of war! 
 
 CHAPTER XVI 
 
 A PLOT AND AN ESCAPE 
 
 NEXT morning Senor Rodriguez and his daughter took 
 their departure for the shore in the captain's boat. 
 Before saying good-bye Don Antonio again told Stephen 
 he would never forget that he owed to him his life, and 
 said that if at any time he should want a friend to assist 
 him, he would be always at his disposal. 
 
 To the surprise of all on board, Senor Lopez announced 
 that he did not intend to go ashore that day. What could 
 be his purpose ? Stephen wondered. There was nothing to 
 detain him on board, and every reason why he should be 
 anxious to get away. 
 
 " I fancy he must be up to some devilment," thought 
 Stephen, and resolved to keep a close watch upon him. 
 This, however, it was not so easy to do, as Mr. Carter soon 
 afterwards called upon Stephen to assist him to get ready 
 the necessary documents for landing cargo. In this occu- 
 pation he was engaged for some hours. However, in the 
 afternoon he caught sight of Lopez leaning over the bul- 
 
110 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 warks at the main chains in close conference with two men 
 of villainous looks in a shore boat, which apparently he 
 had hailed when passing. 
 
 With suspicion strongly aroused, Stephen strolled, appa- 
 rently carelessly, along the deck, with the object, if possible, 
 of discovering what they were talking about. In this he 
 was unsuccessful, as Seilor Lopez, upon perceiving his 
 approach, at once dismissed the boatmen with the remark, 
 which Stephen overheard, and understood from the know- 
 ledge he had now acquired of Spanish, " You quite under- 
 stand what you are to do. It is for to-night ! " 
 
 Just before sundown the captain returned. He had 
 apparently been celebrating the British victory whilst 
 ashore, as he was in a condition such as Stephen had 
 not seen him in since that well-remembered day when he 
 had ordered Mick to be flogged. However, his disposition 
 was not irascible, but jovial, and he seemed to wish to 
 embrace everybody he met, as he staggered below. 
 
 As Mick and Sandy scrambled up the gangway ladder, 
 the latter made a sign to Stephen, and when they came 
 near enough, whispered a hurried request for him to meet 
 them on the forecastle that night. 
 
 Dinner took place at the usual hour, but the captain did 
 not make his appearance; he was asleep in his cabin, the 
 steward said. This news did not astonish anyone who had 
 seen him come on board. Senor Lopez seemed to be in a 
 restless condition. He ate little, and soon left the saloon. 
 
 Stephen now thought he might have an opportunity to 
 meet the two sailors, and learn what they wished to say to 
 him. Previous to going forward he decided to stroll along 
 the poop and see if the coast was clear. It was a still, hot 
 night, and he observed that a thick fog had suddenly risen 
 and enveloped the ship. 
 
 Just at that moment he fancied he heard the sound of 
 
A PLOT AND AN ESCAPE 111 
 
 oars close alongside. Peering over the bulwarks, he believed 
 that he could make out the outline of a boat creeping under 
 the counter, but all was indistinct in the fog. Suddenly his 
 attention was caught by what appeared to be a red spark 
 of fire in the sea, just under the mizzen chains, and he 
 thought he could hear a slight hissing sound. 
 
 In an instant the thought of Seiior Lopez's suspicious 
 actions flashed through his brain, and he concluded that 
 some diabolical plot was about to be carried into effect. 
 
 " I must see what this means," he said to himself. 
 
 He jumped at once into the mizzen rigging, and, seeing 
 that the fiery spot was still below, whilst the hissing noise 
 was now quite distinct, he threw the tail of the main brace 
 overboard and lowered himself over the side in order to 
 gain a clearer view. When he had got down to the water's 
 edge he was able to make out that some object like a small 
 barrel was floating close to the ship's side, and from it had 
 come the red spark which had first of all caught his eye. 
 
 Intensely alarmed, and seeing there was no time to be 
 lost, Stephen lowered himself still further, until he was 
 at length able to touch the keg with his foot and send it 
 spinning away with a vigorous kick. Then he scrambled 
 up the rope to give an alarm. 
 
 Almost before he got to the deck there was a terrific 
 explosion which shook the ship from stem to stern. 
 
 A panic at once broke out, everybody rushing on deck, 
 the companion ways being almost choked by men tumbling 
 over each other in their fright. The captain at once made 
 his appearance, but appeared to be quite dazed, and began 
 swearing incoherently. 
 
 The commanding voice of the chief officer, however, soon 
 restored order. 
 
 Stephen in a few hurried words explained what he had 
 seen and done, and then excitedly cried : 
 
112 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 "This is Lopez's work! Where is he? Seize him, the 
 traitor!" 
 
 Search was immediately made everywhere for the Spaniard, 
 but he was nowhere to be found, and it was therefore con- 
 cluded that he had succeeded in escaping overboard into 
 the boat which laid the mine, as, no doubt, he had previously 
 arranged with his confederates. 
 
 "That man is a devil! an ungrateful hound!" cried Mr. 
 Roberts. "This is how he pays us for saving his life. 
 First he tried to run the ship aground, and now to blow 
 her up." 
 
 Stephen fully agreed with him, and resolved, if ever he 
 should come across the man again that he would give him a 
 wide berth. 
 
 The carpenter reported that the ship was making no 
 water, and an examination of the ship's side showed it had 
 only been dinted by a few splinters. Being thus reassured, 
 the crew soon became calm again, and returned to their 
 posts or went below. 
 
 Stephen now thought that the time had come to meet his 
 two sailor friends. The fog and darkness would enable him 
 to slip forward unperceived. Though it was their watch 
 below, the men were evidently keeping an eager look-out 
 for him, for as soon as he approached the forecastle they 
 came up. They drew him to an obscure part of the deck, 
 where they spoke in whispers, Mick keeping a look-out for 
 possible eavesdroppers. 
 
 "Are ye still in the same mind about leaving the ship?" 
 anxiously enquired Sandy. 
 
 Stephen replied that he was, and he presumed that they 
 Mad not altered their intentions. Upon hearing that that 
 was so, he asked if they had formed any plans for getting 
 away. 
 
 The Scotchman replied that they had not been able to 
 
A PLOT AND AN ESCAPE 113 
 
 see their way until that afternoon, but that something had 
 then happened which had given them an idea. 
 
 "Ye saw what the captain was like when he cam back?" 
 said he. "Well, as he was lolloping about in the stern- 
 sheets o' the boat, he dropped some of his papers, and, 
 gathering them up in a muddling way, he did not notice 
 this, which had slipped under the seat. What a piece of 
 luck it was that I got it!" 
 
 So saying he produced a paper, apparently an official docu- 
 ment. It was too dark to examine it, and too risky to strike 
 a light, but Sandy soon explained that it was the "permit" 
 which the captain had obtained that day from the officer 
 in charge of the landing-place. Without such a document, 
 whilst the city remained in a state of siege no boat would 
 be allowed to land in daylight, whilst after dark only man- 
 of-war boats on guard would be permitted near the mole. 
 
 "Mick and I have been talking the matter over," said 
 Sandy, " and we hae made up our minds to clear out the 
 morn, for likely we'll never again get such a chance. So if 
 ye're comin' ye'll hae to mak' up your mind at yince." 
 
 For a brief spell a storm seemed to work in Stephen's 
 breast. His rancour against the captain had long ago 
 abated and almost died out. To leave the ship was to 
 break away from his friends amongst the officers, who upon 
 the whole had been kind to him. More than that, it was to 
 abandon his career upon the sea, which was so fascinating, 
 and to postpone indefinitely the prospect of returning to 
 his dear mother. It was to cast his lot in a foreign land, 
 amongst a people of different language and temperament, 
 whose ways, even upon Don Antonio's partial showing, 
 were not always the most attractive, and who were apt to 
 regard an Englishman as an enemy. What dangers might 
 he not have to face, what were his chances of success? 
 But suddenly he remembered all that Don Antonio had 
 
 (M806) H 
 
114 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 told him about the country, and above all, the image of 
 Pepita rose before his mental vision. The few hours which 
 had separated him from her had revealed to him that to 
 be with her had now become essential to his happiness. 
 This idea overpowered all other considerations, and led him 
 to decide at once. 
 
 " Men," he said, " I'm with you! I shall be ready to start 
 at the first chance." 
 
 No definite plan could be worked out that night, but 
 they all resolved to keep each other in view as far as 
 possible next day, and to keep a bright look-out for any 
 opportunity which might present itself. 
 
 Next morning rose bright and clear, and it was evident 
 that the day would be excessively hot. About nine o'clock 
 the captain came on deck, looking rather the worse for 
 his yesterday's outing. Having wished all a rough "Good 
 morning!" he announced to Mr. Roberts that he did not 
 intend to go ashore that day. He complained of a head- 
 ache, and of feeling "rather under the weather", and 
 ordered the awning to be put up over the poop, with 
 curtains down on the side of the sun. Then, stretching 
 himself on a long chair, he called to the steward to bring 
 him a "refresher". The effects of this draught helped 
 him to recover something of his ordinary manner. He told 
 the chief officer and supercargo that there was nothing 
 to be done in the way of unloading for a few days, until 
 matters on shore had got into better order. Then he 
 seemed to recollect suddenly that something extraordinary 
 had happened on the previous night, and asked for an 
 explanation. 
 
 The chief officer briefly related the occurrence. 
 
 The captain grew very much excited as he heard the story. 
 "Where is Mr. Herrickf he suddenly exclaimed. 
 
 Stephen came to his side. 
 
A PLOT AND AN ESCAPE 115 
 
 "My lad," said Captain Sommers, "you have acted nobly, 
 and I feel ashamed of myself. I have acted wrongly to 
 you, but will you forgive me and take my hand?" 
 
 As Stephen grasped it he felt a qualm of conscience, 
 knowing the determination he had come to, but again the 
 thought of Pepita overmastered all other emotions. 
 
 Turning to Mr. Roberts the captain said: "We will have 
 to keep a look-out lest these devils try the same trick 
 again, and perhaps with better success. So you had better 
 get out another boat, and keep both patrolling round the 
 ship all night." 
 
 Orders were at once given to get out the long-boat, and 
 a boom to moor her. 
 
 The men had just knocked off work for dinner, and the 
 captain and officers had gone into the saloon to smoke, 
 when Stephen, who happened to be sitting on the poop, 
 suddenly noticed that Sandy and Mick were making signals 
 beckoning him to them. Without a word he slipped off 
 the poop and crept quietly forward. 
 
 "Now's our chance!" whispered Sandy excitedly, and, 
 leading the way to the gangway, he pointed to the captain's 
 gig, which lay below with the oars in it. 
 
 Without another word the men clambered quietly over 
 the bulwarks and down the ladder into the boat. Stephen 
 followed them silently. 
 
 They immediately cast off the painter and noiselessly 
 pushed the boat towards the bows. Then they rapidly 
 muffled the oars and gave way. Stephen went to the 
 tiller. 
 
 They had observed that as the wind was blowing from 
 the land, the Adventure lay bow- on to the shore. They 
 therefore steered to keep the boat right in line with the 
 axis of the ship, as by so doing they would probably get a 
 good way off before being visible to anyone on the poop. 
 
116 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 The view from there was also impeded by the side-curtains 
 of the awning. 
 
 Things turned out just as they had expected, and they 
 had got quite a hundred yards away before their departure 
 was noticed. Then they heard a loud hail from the ship 
 and orders for them to come back at once, to which they 
 of course paid no attention. 
 
 Presently a signal was fired from the Adventure, followed 
 in a few seconds by the hiss and crackle of a couple of 
 rockets, and they could see men running out of the boom 
 to the long-boat. 
 
 "There's nae great fear o' their catchin' us noo!" said 
 Sandy. " I noticed that they hadna' put the oars in the 
 long-boat." 
 
 And so it happened, their start had increased to about 
 live hundred yards before their lumbering pursuer got 
 away. 
 
 But there was no time to be lost. At such a time the 
 men-of-war keep a bright look-out, and a signal-gun leads 
 them to prompt action. At any moment they might be 
 intercepted by a boat from the fleet. 
 
 "Keep cool, Mr. Herrick," said Sandy, who never lost 
 his equanimity. "If they stop us, just say that there's 
 been a bad accident on our ship, and that we are going to 
 the shore for help. As you have got the permit, which I 
 will now hand you, they canna dae ony thing to stop you." 
 
 Sandy's ruse proved effective when, a few minutes later, 
 a man-of-war's boat hailed them. 
 
 Stephen sheered alongside, rapidly displayed his pass to 
 the officer, and was allowed to proceed at once, in view of 
 the alleged urgency of the case. Luckily, as Sandy and 
 Mick had already been twice to the shore with the captain, 
 they knew exactly how to steer for the landing-place. 
 
 At the mole they were challenged by a sentry, and had 
 
A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 117 
 
 to interview the naval officer in charge, but the showing of 
 the permit and the same story got them through as before. 
 The boat was quickly moored, and Stephen, followed by 
 his two men, made at once for the town. 
 
 Through his knowledge of Spanish, Stephen was easily 
 able to find his way to Sefior Rodriguez's house in the 
 Calle Real. 
 
 Don Antonio was amazed to see them, but at the same 
 time expressed his delight and his admiration of their 
 pluck and enterprise in deciding to try their fortune in his 
 country. Dona Josefina also received them graciously, and 
 Stephen fancied that there was a flush of pleasure on her 
 countenance and a soft light in her eyes which betrayed 
 more than ordinary emotion in meeting him. 
 
 Rightly or wrongly as he may have judged her feelings, 
 he certainly knew that a thrill went through his whole 
 frame as he clasped her hand in salutation. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII 
 
 A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 
 
 THE house in which Don Antonio received them was 
 large and handsome, built in quite a different style 
 from those of England, but in that which they soon came 
 to learn was universal in South America. It was but one 
 story in height, with flat roof. Access from the interior to 
 the street was gained by a wide arched passage, sufficiently 
 broad to admit a carriage, which was closed by a massive 
 gate of ornamental iron-work. Each window looking on 
 to the street was also barred by massive iron railings, 
 adorned with scroll-work. The principal apartments were 
 
118 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 built round a square court-yard, styled the patio, Don Antonio 
 told them; the sala, or drawing-room, looking out to the 
 street, whilst the comedor, or dining-room, formed the op- 
 posite or rear end of the quadrangle. The best bedrooms 
 formed the two sides. A veranda, or sloping roof, supported 
 on light pillars, ran round the patio, to afford shelter to the 
 inmates whilst passing from one room to another. The 
 inner apartments had no windows, only glazed doors. The 
 floor of the veranda and the whole of the patio were paved 
 with squares of black and white marble, arranged alter- 
 nately, but with a black band framing the court-yard. In 
 the centre of the patio rose a carved white-marble structure, 
 apparently the mouth of a well, surmounted by an arch of 
 ornamental iron-work, from which hung a pulley and chain. 
 Don Antonio explained that this was not a well, but was 
 really an underground cistern of brick and cement, named 
 the algibe, into which was collected all the rain-water which 
 fell on the roofs. 
 
 Several tubs, painted green, each containing a small 
 orange-tree, now laden with the golden fruit, stood in the 
 patio. Also some flower-stands, on which were pots with 
 beautiful flowers in bloom. Across the patio stout wires 
 were stretched, from which, in the hot weather, a canvas 
 awning could be suspended, thus making the patio a cool 
 retreat, even in the height of summer. 
 
 A spacious archway led to a second quadrangle, round 
 which were other bedrooms. In this patio an enormous 
 grape vine had twined up the pillars of the veranda, and 
 had been trained on to trellises to afford shelter from the 
 sun's rays. Still farther from the street was a third patio, 
 round which were the kitchen and servants' apartments. 
 
 The house was plainly, but handsomely, furnished, the 
 tables, chairs, and sideboards, &c, being of some dark wood, 
 massive, and elaborately carved. In place of carpets, straw 
 
A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 119 
 
 matting covered the floors, being better adapted for hot 
 climates, and in the sala several rugs made from the skins 
 of wild animals were spread. There were no fireplaces in 
 any of the rooms. 
 
 Altogether the dwelling greatly impressed Stephen and 
 the two sailors with an idea of Don Antonio's wealth, 
 Doubtless more experienced eyes would have noted the 
 absence of many comforts common in the homes of gentle- 
 men in a similar social position in Europe, but at that time 
 the intercourse between South America and Europe was so 
 limited that even to the wealthiest many objects were 
 unknown which they would probably have desired had they 
 been aware of their existence. 
 
 The dinner to which Don Antonio, with Stephen and 
 Pepita, presently sat down, the sailors having been accommo- 
 dated in the innermost court, was typical of those generally 
 served in this part of South America. First came the sopa, 
 or broth made from beef, followed by the puchero, or fresh 
 boiled beef served with plenty of vegetables and boiled 
 heads of maize, and finally the asado, or roast beef. Bread 
 was plentifully consumed, but potatoes were apparently un- 
 known. Beef, so Don Antonio said, was the staple food of 
 the country, varied occasionally by a fowl or an armadillo, 
 the latter being a special delicacy. On the table were 
 decanters containing several kinds of Spanish wines. 
 
 The place of tea or coffee, then rarely used in these 
 Spanish colonies, was taken by an infusion of yerba matt, 
 or Paraguayan tea, which is a universal beverage in South 
 America. This is prepared by placing the crushed leaves 
 of the plant into a little hollow black gourd, and then 
 pouring boiling water upon it. It is imbibed through a 
 tin or silver tube, the bombilla, and the gourd with its tube 
 is passed from hand to hand, the same bombilla being used 
 by all, which is at first rather repugnant to fastidious per- 
 
120 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 sons. Usually a little kettle is kept boiling upon a charcoal 
 fire in a brasero, or portable stand, and the hot water is 
 passed by a little black servant, whose business it is to see 
 that the kettle is always full and boiling. 
 
 The restorative qualities of the yerba mate are greatly ex- 
 tolled, and with much reason, throughout South America. 
 
 "Well, Don Esteban," said Don Antonio, when they 
 were smoking their cigarettes after dinner, "I am glad, as I 
 have said, that you have chosen to try your fortune in this 
 country, which offers so many opportunities to an energetic 
 young man, far greater than you would ever have had on 
 board ship; but I cannot conceal from you that you are not 
 yet free from the danger of having your plans frustrated. 
 Monte Video is now under control of the English authori- 
 ties, who have their own ideas of discipline, and if you are 
 discovered here they will doubtless send you and your com- 
 panions back to your ship at once, and place you at the 
 tender mercies of the captain. So I propose to take you 
 out to-morrow to my estancia, \ Las Cruces ', about five 
 leagues out in the 'camp'. Once out of the city, the English 
 will, of course, have no power to interfere with you. 
 
 "There appears to be another danger threatening you," 
 continued Don Antonio. "From what you have told me 
 with regard to Senor Lopez, he seems to have become your 
 vindictive enemy. Should he hear where you are, he may 
 give you trouble, and out in the ' camp ' you will find no 
 police protection, so you will have to rely upon your own 
 resources for defence." 
 
 Stephen said that he had no fears in that direction, more 
 especially as he would have such doughty supporters as the 
 Irish and Scotch sailors. 
 
 " You are quite safe here to-night," went on Don Antonio, 
 "for no boat from the Adventure can land with the news 
 of your flight without the ' permit ', which you were lucky 
 
A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 121 
 
 enough to secure, and to-morrow some formalities will have 
 to be gone through before they can get another, which will 
 take time. I propose to-night to procure for you and your 
 companions native costumes which will serve as disguise, 
 and I shall order some tame horses to be brought to the 
 house early in the morning." 
 
 Great amusement was afforded to Stephen and the two 
 sailors, when they rose before daybreak, by their efforts to 
 dress properly in the native costume, and it was only by 
 the aid of one of the men-servants, himself a wearer, that 
 they were at last successful. The dress consisted of, first, 
 a loose woollen shirt, then wide cotton drawers (cateon- 
 cillas) reaching half-way down the leg, the lower edges 
 being adorned with lace. Over the drawers is worn a 
 woollen shawl, styled the chiripd, one corner of which is 
 brought between the legs and carried up to the waist, the 
 flaps being wound round the loins. The drawers are fixed 
 by a silk girdle, and the chiripd secured by a broad belt of 
 canvas, covered with fancy woollen embroidery and adorned 
 with large silver buttons. In this belt a large sheath-knife 
 is invariably carried. A jacket and sometimes a cotton 
 waistcoat is worn, and over all the poncho, which is a large 
 square of woollen material, usually woven with bright 
 stripes round the borders on a dark ground. In the 
 middle there is a hole through which the head is put, and 
 the poncho hangs round the body, giving a perfect shelter 
 from the rain whilst leaving the arms free. No better 
 garment could be devised for horsemen. A broad-brimmed 
 slouch felt hat and high boots completed the costume, the 
 finishing touch being given by strapping on a pair of heavy 
 spurs, with rowels quite three inches in diameter from point 
 to point. 
 
 The sun had risen in brilliance under a bright blue sky 
 when they set out. Don Antonio cautioned the Englishmen 
 
122 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 to draw down the brims of their hats, so as to hide their 
 features, and to take care not to speak, as their lack of 
 knowledge of Spanish would obviously be out of keeping 
 with their costume. 
 
 As they turned the corner of the first street the party 
 came face to face with Seiior Lopez, who seemed almost 
 as if he had been watching the house. He saluted Don 
 Antonio politely, and keenly scrutinized the others of the 
 party with evident suspicion. However, he made no 
 attempt to delay them. At the city gate Don Antonio 
 showed a pass for himself and servants, which was in order, 
 and they were allowed to leave without opposition. 
 
 Once into the open country, the horses broke into that 
 gentle canter characteristic of South American steeds, which 
 rarely trot. Don Antonio was riding a favourite pacer, that 
 is, an animal which has been trained to move both legs on 
 one side forward at the same time. Such horses are greatly 
 valued in those countries. 
 
 The country was looking lovely, being literally carpeted 
 with grass and wild flowers. No roads were visible, but 
 only tracks leading over the wild, unfenced plains. Stephen 
 observed that the formation of the land was, as Don Antonio 
 had described it to him on board the Adventure, a series of 
 long undulations, succeeding each other almost like ridge 
 and furrow. It resembled the long ocean swell of the calm 
 belts suddenly petrified, only the distance from crest to 
 crest was much greater, and the height much less in pro- 
 portion, for there was no elevation in sight which would be 
 worthy of the name of a hill. 
 
 After a pleasant ride of a little over two hours they 
 arrived at " Las Cruces " estancia house. They could have 
 done the journey in considerably less time had the sea- 
 faring men been more habituated to horseback. As it was, 
 it took Mick and Sandy all their time to keep their seats, 
 
A MONTEVIDEAN MANSION 123 
 
 tame though the horses were. Mick also complained of the 
 difficulty of steering "with the tiller ropes over the bow 
 instead of the stern ". 
 
 The estancia house was a large square edifice of one 
 story, built of sun-dried bricks (adobes) and roofed with 
 thatch, standing on the summit of one of the prairie rolls. 
 Near it were some enclosures made with strong posts for 
 folding the cattle (corrales). A few huts built of posts and 
 wattle and thatch- roofed stood near, which were occupied 
 by the peons on the estate. The inside of the house was 
 as plain as the exterior. It was divided into several rooms 
 by white-washed adobe partitions which did not go up to 
 the roof, the rafters being visible everywhere inside. The 
 floors were covered with flat red tiles, and there were no 
 fireplaces. The furniture consisted of some roughly-made 
 tables, chairs, and stools. Brackets for saddles, and shelves 
 surrounded the walls. The beds were what is styled catres, 
 merely a long camp-stool with pine-wood frame and canvas 
 cover. 
 
 " You will not find much luxury here, my friends," said 
 Don Antonio; " however, you will find by and by that it 
 is rather better than most accommodation to be met with 
 in the camp, and you young men will not, I am sure, mind 
 roughing it for a time." 
 
 Don Antonio then introduced his guests to Don Fran- 
 cisco Munoz, his foreman, or, " mayordomo ", who with 
 his wife looked after the estancia, and explained for their 
 benefit that he was generally known by the familiar ab- 
 breviation of Don Pancho." 
 
 The meal which was now set before them struck Stephen 
 and his companions as singularly plain, though it was not 
 long before they learned that it was the ordinary and 
 almost unvarying fare of the " camp ". It consisted of 
 only a large piece of beef roasted, which was served in 
 
124 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 a capacious earthenware dish placed in the middle of the 
 table. Each man had a plate and knife and fork before 
 him, and each attacked the meat in turn, cutting off as 
 much as he wanted and transferring it to his plate. The 
 only accompaniments of the beef were salt and some hard 
 biscuits; the latter seemed to the sailors to be even coarser 
 and harder than ship-bread. There was not a single vege- 
 table on the table. To Stephen, with his experience of 
 country life in England, this seemed most singular, especially 
 as he judged, from what he had seen of the soil, that it was 
 perfectly adapted for culture. 
 
 Don Antonio, in answer to his enquiries, said that this was 
 certainly the case, and that almost any kind of crop would 
 flourish there; but he explained that the natives would do 
 no sort of work which they could not perform on horseback. 
 Hence there was not even a ditch dug on the estate, and 
 even for the sinking of wells special men had to be sent out 
 from the town. 
 
 Early in the afternoon Don Antonio returned to the city, 
 wishing them every happiness during their sojourn on the 
 estancia, and promising to let them know when the Adven- 
 ture had sailed. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 ON AN URUGUAYAN ESTANCIA. 
 
 FOR over three months Stephen and his two sailor friends 
 spent what appeared to them at first quite an ideal 
 life on the estancia Las Cruces, and though Don Antonio 
 from time to time, on his frequent visits, spoke of the 
 enormous profits which were being made by the sale of 
 the cargo of the Adventure, none of them ever regretted the 
 
ON AN URUGUAYAN ESTANCIA 125 
 
 sacrifice they had made of their right to participate in 
 these gains; nor would they have gone back to the ship 
 had the captain offered to restore them to their positions 
 without punishment, or having to forfeit their bonus. 
 
 The estancia was purely a cattle farm, sheep being at 
 that time almost despised as a source of profit. Such 
 animals of that species as then existed in the colonies pro- 
 duced a dirty slate-coloured fleece, more like coarse hair 
 than wool; they were small "leggy" creatures with four 
 and even six horns, the degenerate descendants of the 
 native Peruvian merinos which had been brought overland 
 centuries before. Consequently there was little work to do 
 except at certain seasons of the year, when branding and 
 parting took place. 
 
 In such a climate as that of Uruguay, cattle and horses 
 can remain and thrive on the plains all the year round 
 without shelter, and what principally occupied the time of 
 the herdsmen was to see that the stock did not stray from 
 the estate, there being no fences to restrain them. 
 
 Stephen and his friends entered heartily into the work 
 of the estancia. Every morning they would be up at day- 
 break, and after a draught of mate, accompanied perhaps 
 by a hard biscuit, they would ride off with Don Pancho or 
 one of his men to inspect the cattle. Half-wild as animals 
 become under such conditions, and dangerous to men on 
 foot, they are always respectful to horsemen. They were 
 all driven in the early hours of each day to a certain spot, 
 called the rodeo, where they were kept for an hour or two, 
 and so well had they acquired this habit, that as soon as 
 any of the herdsmen galloped, shouting, through the plain, 
 the cattle would begin to run from all directions towards 
 the rodeo, where they would remain for some time of their 
 own accord. It was a wonderful sight to see this great 
 mob. There were over eight thousand cattle on the estate, 
 
126 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 but they were divided up into four herds, each with its 
 corresponding rodeo, and the mayordomo with his party 
 would visit them on successive days. 
 
 So soon as the cattle were allowed to separate, it was 
 noticeable that they invariably divided themselves up into 
 family parties led by an old bull. 
 
 The horses, of which there were about fifteen thousand, 
 displayed a similar instinct. They formed themselves into 
 parties, styled by the men, manadas, each of fifty to a 
 hundred animals, under the care of one stallion, who very 
 jealously looked after his mares, and if any of them wan- 
 dered, would at once follow and drive them home. Amus- 
 ing sights were sometimes seen when a stallion would 
 attempt to entice a mare away from another party. The 
 patriarch of the family whose rights were being invaded 
 was at once on the alert for their defence, and then a battle 
 royal between the two stallions would ensue in which hoofs 
 and teeth were freely used. 
 
 The inspection of the herd over, the party would return 
 to the estancia house for breakfast, which consisted of the 
 everlasting roast beef and hard biscuit, with only water to 
 drink, followed by the cup of mate. 
 
 Immediately the meal was over, everyone would go to 
 bed for the siesta, which lasted until the hottest hours of 
 the day were over. The remaining hours, until supper- 
 time just after sunset, were spent as fancy directed, and 
 were often the most tedious part of the day. None of the 
 peons could read or write, and by nature they appeared 
 to be most indolent. They were all, however, inveterate 
 gamblers, though they had nothing of any great value to 
 stake; and games of various kinds filled up their evening 
 hours. 
 
 To Stephen, soon after the first novelty had worn off, 
 this kind of life soon became almost unbearable. The dis- 
 
ON AN URUGUAYAN ESTANCIA 127 
 
 position which had led him to long to go to sea was un- 
 doubtedly, though perhaps unknown to him, based upon 
 a desire for change and excitement amongst constantly 
 varying scenes. To the sailors, who had for years been 
 accustomed to be kept constantly at drudgery under the 
 vigilant eyes of officers (who would have thought it a dis- 
 grace to them to allow a man to be idle for a moment), 
 and who had often to go on short commons, such unre- 
 stricted idleness with plenty to eat seemed by contrast 
 a paradise, and not being men of education, they had no 
 intellectual wants to satisfy. They did not, however, 
 altogether waste their time. By constant practice they soon 
 became expert horsemen. Mick showed a special aptitude 
 for riding, and he even ventured to break in some of the 
 young horses. 
 
 This is done in a rough-and-ready manner in South 
 America. The horse is lassoed by the neck and by the legs, 
 and then thrown down, a saddle is fixed on, and a heavy 
 bit thrust in his mouth, and he is then set free at the 
 moment when the man jumps on his back. He is allowed 
 to career at will over the plain, where he tries every artifice 
 to throw off his rider, until finally, exhausted and defeated, 
 he is ridden back to the corral, and is thenceforth con- 
 sidered tame. Sometimes most exciting scenes are wit- 
 nessed, and the horse gets the better of the man, throwing 
 him with great violence, but it is a work greatly delighted 
 in by the gauchos. 
 
 Stephen also attempted this business with considerable 
 success, but neither he nor Mick could rival the feat some- 
 times performed by Don Pancho to display his horseman- 
 ship. This was to hang by his arms from the top bar con- 
 necting the two gate-posts of the corral, into which a 
 number of untamed horses had been driven. Eound his 
 neck would be hung a bridle with a very heavy bit. Then 
 
128 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the gate would be thrown open and the horses allowed to 
 rush out. As they passed, the mayordomo would drop on 
 the back of one, and then, seizing the bridle, bend over and 
 force the bit into the animal's mouth and the straps over 
 its head. Although he was riding bareback, none of the 
 struggles or artifices of the horse could ever dislodge him 
 from his seat, and he would soon bring back his steed 
 completely under control. 
 
 In the use of the lasso and the bolas the Englishmen 
 soon also became expert, and they rapidly increased their 
 knowledge of the language until even Sandy, who said 
 at first he was too old to learn, could converse with some 
 fluency. 
 
 The life was not all monotony. There was plenty of 
 excitement at the marking-time, when all young calves and 
 foals had to be branded with the mark of the estancia by a 
 red-hot iron. At these times the cattle were taken by lots 
 into the corral, lassoed, and thrown down. Any found with 
 the mark of other estancias were singled out and sent back 
 to their owners. 
 
 Then came the slaughtering-time, when the superfluous 
 animals were killed. There being no market for the flesh, 
 the only valuable parts were the hides and tallow. The 
 fatty parts were cut out and boiled in huge caldrons, the 
 fuel used being the larger bones. The remainder of the 
 carcass was left to the vultures, who swooped down in 
 clouds from all directions as soon as an animal fell. 
 
 Sometimes the men would organize a partridge -hunt, 
 principally with the object of varying their diet, for the 
 partridges were so plentiful and so tame as to offer but 
 little sport. All that had to be done was to circle round 
 them a few times to confuse them, when they could gener- 
 ally be knocked on the head with the riding-whips, or be 
 caught by a loop of horse-hair on the end of a stick. 
 
ON AN URUGUAYAN ESTANCIA 129 
 
 An ostrich-hunt was, however, more exciting, and there 
 were plenty of opportunities for it. Parties of horsemen 
 would ride round and round the flock until they at last got 
 near enough, say within fifty or sixty yards, when the bolus, 
 composed of three stones fixed at the end of thongs about 
 four feet long, would be cast, and the thongs, twining round 
 the legs of the birds, would bring them down at once. 
 
 On Sundays the men from all the estancias round would 
 flock to the pulperia, or combined country store and public- 
 house, a square building of post and wattle with thatched roof, 
 with a counter opening to the exterior at one end. Over 
 this was a veranda for the shelter of the customers, and in 
 front of it a strong pole supported about four feet from the 
 ground. The sports there began by the various riders, as 
 they arrived, trying to push each other's horses along the 
 bar by main force. Then horse-races would be got up. 
 The course never exceeded about two hundred yards in a 
 straight line, the spectators taking their places, mounted, 
 on each side. As such a short distance is no certain test 
 of speed, the whole art of these races consists in one jockey 
 — never more than two horses run— securing some advan- 
 tage over the other at the start. 
 
 All sorts of artifices are adopted to obtain this, but as 
 either rider can object to go on while traversing a certain 
 marked space, some time is spent in getting what is con- 
 sidered a fair start. 
 
 Drinking was generally fast and copious, and many would 
 be left on the field to find their way home next day. 
 
 Stephen and his friends would also seek for change by 
 visiting the owners of neighbouring estancias. Hospitality 
 to all comers was always given, but certain formalities had 
 to be observed. Upon approaching a house, horsemen had 
 to stop at a certain distance away, and give as a hail the 
 words " Ave Maria ! " 
 
 (M806) r 
 
130 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 If the owner were at home he would come to the door 
 and reply, "Sin pecado concebida!" (conceived without 
 sin), and then invite the visitors to dismount. 
 
 The Englishmen soon learned that Don Antonio was 
 right when he said that they would find the accommodation 
 better at Las Cruces than at most other estancias. 
 
 For example, they found old Don Manuel Gonzales, who 
 owned a much greater estate than Don Antonio, in a house 
 built of adobe, thatched, and with only an earthen floor. 
 Not an article of furniture was in the house, but a few 
 horses' skulls used as seats. In the centre of the floor 
 burned an open fire, the fuel being dried cattle-dung, and 
 there was no chimney for the escape of the smoke. The 
 fireplace was formed by a lot of shank-bones stuck into the 
 earth to confine the embers. 
 
 Don Manuel was dressed like an ordinary peon, his boots 
 being made from the skin of the leg of a colt stripped entire 
 and moulded to the foot when warm, and his naked toes 
 showed through them. 
 
 The dinner was now preparing. It consisted of a large 
 piece of beef through which an iron rod (asador) had been 
 run. One end of the rod was stuck into the ground in 
 such a position as to allow the meat to hang over the fire. 
 Occasionally the meat was turned and salt sprinkled over 
 it. When it was done, the spit was pulled to a vertical 
 position. Each, as his turn came, took hold of the beef 
 with the left hand, then laid hold of a morsel with his 
 teeth, and with his knife in his right hand sliced off a por- 
 tion, cutting upwards. 
 
 It requires some dexterity to do this, as a man with a 
 long nose might run the risk of cutting it off! 
 
 The Englishmen fought shy of the native plan, and con- 
 tented themselves with taking their portions in their hands. 
 
 "Why don't you have a try at it gaucho fashion, Mick?" 
 
THE MAKINGS OF A NEW BRITISH COLONY 131 
 
 said Sandy, as he glanced chaffingly at the Irishman's pro- 
 nounced Milesian features. "Your nose could be in no 
 danger." 
 
 " Well, maybe I would not stick in my teeth so deeply as 
 a Scotchman," retorted his comrade. 
 
 As they were riding home that night, an event happened 
 which indicated to Stephen that his enemy had not for- 
 gotten his existence. 
 
 They were careering along towards the estancia house, 
 and were about to pass between two trees planted near the 
 gate, when suddenly Stephen was swept from his horse 
 and thrown heavily. At the same moment a set of bolas 
 whizzed past his head. It happened that Sandy had bor- 
 rowed Don Pancho's gun, and he let fly at the figure of a 
 man on horseback dimly seen through the darkness. There 
 was a sudden yell, and the sound of hoofs rapidly galloping 
 away was heard. 
 
 " This was Lopez's work again," said Stephen, when hs 
 came to himself; "a lucky thing I was not alone! " 
 
 And he resolved never again to go out unarmed. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX 
 
 THE MAKINGS OF A NEW BRITISH COLONY 
 
 A FEW days later, Don Antonio visited the estancia and 
 brought the intelligence that the Adventure had sailed 
 for England. To Stephen this was most welcome news, 
 since all obstacles to his returning to Monte Video were now 
 removed. He was anxious to enjoy the pleasures of civi- 
 lized life, and above all, though he did not venture to say 
 so to Don Antonio, to see Pepita again, 
 
132 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Don Antonio gave him a cordial invitation to his town 
 house, but intimated that the two sailors had better remain, 
 at the estancia until he could find something for them to do. 
 
 " You will find Monte Video greatly changed, Stephen," 
 said he, "it has become quite like an English colony. The 
 Adventure was only the first of a large number of British 
 merchantmen, whose owners had taken up the same idea as 
 hers, and there is now quite an array of English warehouses 
 established in the principal streets of the town. The people 
 of Monte Video have taken very kindly to their invaders, 
 and one constantly meets Englishmen, military and civil, at 
 the tertulias (parties) of the best families. I am sure no one 
 has the slightest desire to drive your people away, as they 
 did in Buenos Ayres. 
 
 " Of course the general has to be on his guard, in view 
 of what happened on the other side of the river, and an 
 incident occurred only this week which proves that vigilance 
 is not unnecessary. It is reported that two spies have 
 been taken up, upon whom papers were found clearly 
 showing that a conspiracy has been hatching amongst some 
 people in Monte Video in combination with the military 
 party in Buenos Ayres. The plan was, it appears, that a 
 large body of troops were to be landed from Buenos Ayres 
 at Colonia, the nearest point on this side, and to march 
 upon the city. They were to be admitted by their con- 
 federates at one or more of the gates. All the best people 
 in Monte Video, however, seemed to be pleased that this 
 discovery was made in time to frustrate the plot. 
 
 " By the way," added Don Antonio, " I happened to meet 
 Senor Lopez the other day, and I was astonished to see 
 that he had his head tied up. He told me that he had met 
 with a singular accident, that a lasso came flying close to 
 his head, when he was out in the "camp", and had nearly 
 torn off one of his ears." 
 
THE MAKINGS OF A NEW BRITISH COLONY 133 
 
 " More likely that it was a shot from Sandy's gun," replied 
 Stephen, and he then related his recent narrow escape. 
 
 " That man will end badly," said Don Antonio. 
 
 Stephen found Monte Video just as Senor Rodriguez had 
 described. Less than four months had wrought a wonder- 
 ful transformation in the city. The streets were now kept 
 clean, and a police force had been organized. Life and 
 property seemed to be as safe as in Europe. 
 
 A splendid trade was being done by all the merchants, 
 and every day new cargoes of goods were arriving from 
 England, but the demand rose in proportion. 
 
 Never had society been so gay. The natives felt as if a 
 load had been taken off their shoulders by the expulsion of 
 the Spaniards. New careers were open to everyone who 
 would work. Social functions took place every evening, at 
 which the Englishmen were welcome guests. Don Antonio, 
 from the esteem in which he was everywhere held, was 
 invited out constantly, and, except when he was entertain- 
 ing at his own house, he and his daughter, accompanied 
 by Stephen, were nightly attendants at some tertulia. 
 Stephen had never been so happy in his life. 
 
 The trial and probable fate of the spies was at this time 
 the absorbing topic of conversation. Great was the excite- 
 ment of Don Antonio and Stephen, though it can scarcely 
 be said they were surprised, when they learned that one of 
 the inculpated was no other than Don Ignacio Lopez, their 
 quondam fellow-passenger. 
 
 At length it was announced that the sentence of the 
 court-martial was that the two accused should be hanged. 
 
 A tremendous anxiety pervaded the whole community 
 upon the morning appointed for the execution. A high 
 gallows had been erected in the Plaza Mayor, the prin- 
 cipal square of the city. All the troops of the garrison 
 were drawn up near the spot, and stood in solemn silence. 
 
134 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 Behind them gathered a vast crowd, amongst whom were 
 many Englishmen. Every window overlooking the square 
 was filled with spectators. 
 
 At length the rumble of muffled drums announced that 
 the mournful procession was approaching. Stephen watched 
 it with a sickening feeling of fascination. First came a 
 strong guard, who were to surround the scaffold. Then a 
 procession of monks loudly chanting the offices for the 
 dead. Next the condemned men, who were blindfolded 
 and manacled, seated upon hurdles drawn by asses. Near 
 each walked a priest, who from time to time presented to 
 their lips a crucifix to be kissed, all the time repeating the 
 prayers ordered by the church for such occasions. Stephen 
 noted that Lopez had his head bound with a bandage below 
 the handkerchief which covered his eyes. He was alto- 
 gether a ghastly-looking object, and the drawn skin of his 
 cheeks showing beneath the bandages had turned almost to 
 a greenish yellow. 
 
 Though a deathly feeling went through his heart, Stephen 
 could not turn away his eyes. 
 
 At length the gallows was reached, the noose was passed 
 over the necks of the trembling culprits, and they were 
 made to mount the fatal ladder, while the priests ejaculated 
 the final words of their prayers. The crowd awaited in 
 breathless expectation for the drop to fall. 
 
 At this exciting moment the officer in command of the 
 guard suddenly cried to the executioners: "Stop, here 
 comes the general!" 
 
 From a distance there could be seen riding up to the spot 
 Sir Samuel Auchmuty surrounded by a brilliant staff. 
 
 What could it mean I Was he coming to gloat over the 
 death of his victims'? 
 
 He halted at the foot of the scaffold. The suspense of 
 the spectators was painful 
 
THE MAKINGS OF A NEW BRITISH COLONY 135 
 
 In a loud voice the general cried: "You are pardoned!" 
 
 He had arranged this dramatic scene to show at once his 
 power and his clemency. 
 
 No words can describe the thrill, the revulsion which 
 passed through the spectators upon hearing this announce- 
 ment. 
 
 As for the spies themselves, they were so bewildered and 
 overpowered by the reaction that they had to be carried 
 awa}?' almost senseless. 
 
 The effect upon the multitude, and even upon the soldiers, 
 was tremendous. In a few minutes there broke out from 
 every direction loud cheers — " Viva le General Ingles, Viva 
 los Ingleses, Viva!" 
 
 From that instant sympathies with the English were 
 intensified in the breast of every native. No plot against 
 them would have had any chance of success. 
 
 A few weeks later great excitement was created at Monte 
 Video by the news, brought by a fast frigate, that a for- 
 midable expedition was on its way to the River Plate with 
 the object of retaking Buenos Ayres and establishing British 
 supremacy in the country. This expedition, it was an- 
 nounced, was under the command of Lieutenant-general 
 Whitelock, and was bringing an additional force of over 
 eight thousand troops, which, after allowing for the neces- 
 sary garrison to be left at Monte Video, would enable the 
 new British commander to land at Buenos Ayres at the 
 head of over ten thousand men. 
 
 So confident was the British Government of success, that 
 they had conferred upon General Whitelock the rank of 
 Governor-general of South America (which, by the way, 
 indicated that they knew little of that continent), with a 
 salary of £12,000 per annum. 
 
 Doubtless the Government had some grounds for this 
 assumption of an easy conquest, in view of the fact that 
 
136 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 General Beresford had previously taken the place with only 
 about sixteen hundred men. 
 
 There was much discontent in Monte Video when the 
 name of the commander-in-chief became known. "Why 
 Whitelock?" asked the officers. "He is utterly unfitted 
 for such a command. We have plenty of better officers. 
 Could they not have sent Sir John Moore or Sir Arthur 
 Wellesley, or several others we could name?" 
 
 " Yes," said a gray -haired captain, " I served with White- 
 lock, then a colonel, on the San Domingo expedition, and 
 well remember that he acted like a poltroon; in fact, his 
 own men were quite ashamed of his manifest cowardice. 
 And to send such a man to supersede our present brave 
 commander, Sir Samuel Auchmuty ! It's disgracef uL " 
 
 "Ah! " retorted a corpulent major, "evidently you don't 
 know all. There are ' wheels within wheels ', as usual, and 
 it is whispered that General Whitelock is a closer relation 
 to persons in high places than is publicly acknowledged. 
 That may account for a good deal." 
 
 In due course the expedition arrived. The general 
 came on H.M.S. Thisbe, which was accompanied by a large 
 number of transports bringing the troops. Next day he 
 landed with great ceremony, followed by a gorgeous escort 
 of aides-de-camp, adjutants, commissaries, and other officers. 
 He had also a large retinue of personal servants. 
 
 He immediately took up his quarters in one of the best 
 houses in the city, where he opened a court and held levees 
 in almost regal style. Accustomed as they were even to 
 the arrogance of Spanish officials, the inhabitants of Monte 
 Video were quite taken aback by the high and mighty airs 
 of the new English commander. "So different," said they, 
 " from the brave and simple Sir Samuel ! " 
 
 Nearly a month passed after the arrival of the expedition 
 before a move was made to carry out its object, the time 
 
THE MAKINGS OF A NEW BRITISH COLONY 137 
 
 being occupied with levees and receptions, parades and 
 reviews of the troops. The people of Buenos Ayres were 
 thus given ample warning and opportunity to prepare for 
 the intended attack. 
 
 At length it was publicly announced that a start would 
 be made on the 25th June, no care being taken to keep 
 even that important fact a secret from the enemy. 
 
 "I have been talking confidentially to-day," said Don 
 Antonio, " with one of the divisional generals, and he was 
 lamenting the neglect of the commander to make arrange- 
 ments to have some capable scouts. 'Not that that will 
 be an easy thing to manage,' said he, 'because we could 
 scarcely entrust such important work to natives, who 
 might easily lead us into a trap.' A sudden idea occurred 
 to me. Why could not you, Stephen, and your two sailor 
 friends, volunteer for such work? You can all ride well now, 
 and might at a short distance be easily taken for natives, so 
 that you would be able to get into the enemy's lines and 
 obtain information of the highest value to the English army." 
 
 Stephen gladly jumped at the idea, and assured Don 
 Antonio that he believed that his friends would willingly 
 accept the proposal. A messenger was at once despatched 
 to Las Cruces to summon Sandy and Mick, and Don 
 Antonio went to arrange for an interview for next 
 morning. 
 
 " You quite understand the risks of the service you are 
 about to undertake," said the general to Stephen and his 
 friends next morning, "that, by the usages of war, scouts 
 not in uniform have no quarter given them if captured." 
 
 Stephen and the sailors said they were quite ready to take 
 that risk for the sake of the English cause. 
 
 " On the other hand," said the general, " services of this 
 nature are always handsomely rewarded; so, if we succeed, 
 you may count upon getting well paid" 
 
138 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 The bargain was concluded, and they were given instruc- 
 tions when to get ready, and told upon which ship to 
 embark with their horses, with which Don Antonio 
 generously undertook to provide them. 
 
 "Ah!" said Don Antonio to Stephen as they came away, 
 " I am afraid that the English are making a mistake. It 
 would have been much wiser for them to have contented 
 themselves with consolidating their power here in the 
 Banda Oriental before attempting to conquer the other side. 
 General Liniers, who is in command in Buenos Ayres, is not 
 the man to allow himself to be beaten without resistance, 
 and they will have a harder task than they expect. On the 
 other hand, they are now in peaceful possession of Uruguay, 
 a country larger than England, and the people are their 
 friends. Why should they not be content with this for the 
 present?" 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 INCOMPETENCE AND ARROGANCE 
 
 IT was on the 25th of June, 1807, that the British 
 expedition under command of General Whitelock 
 proudly sailed from Monte Video for the conquest of 
 Buenos Ayres amidst the cheers of the garrison and the 
 English residents on shore. Grandly the great men-of-war 
 spread their lofty sails as they moved out, followed by a 
 long line of transports. The bands played merrily on each 
 ship, and all were confident of an easy victory. 
 
 It was midwinter in these latitudes, and soon a cold 
 pelting rain drove all who were not on duty to seek shelter 
 below. Stephen and his friends, who had donned the 
 native costume, were on one of the cavalry transports. 
 
INCOMPETENCE AND ARROGANCE 139 
 
 It should have been easy to reach the anchorage in front 
 of Buenos Ayres and effect a landing close to the city by 
 the next day. Great surprise, therefore, was expressed on 
 board when the ships were kept beating about, and after 
 having actually come within sight of the place, were steered 
 southwards, so that the point selected for the landing was 
 even farther away from the town than the spot where 
 General Beresford had descended haphazard almost exactly 
 a year before. 
 
 What could the commander be thinking of ! wondered the 
 officers. The people of Buenos Ayres had no forces which 
 could withstand a direct attack. Why not have landed as 
 near as possible? For some mysterious reason the orders 
 were given to land near the port of Ensenada, at a distance of 
 thirty-six miles southwards of Buenos Ayres. The shores 
 were low and swampy, and the ships could not, on account of 
 the shallowness of the water, approach within a long distance 
 from the land. The naval officers were reported to have 
 pointed out to General Whitelock that owing to this circum- 
 stance the ships would be unable to co-operate with the army 
 in the attack, but the imperious commander-in-chief had 
 told them to mind their own business. 
 
 It was a tedious and laborious work, that of landing an 
 army of over eight thousand men, with all its horses, cannon, 
 and stores, and it was not rendered less easy by the circum- 
 stance that the rain poured down pitilessly all the while. 
 Stephen and his friends were amongst the first on shore, 
 and they were ordered to go ahead to reconnoitre the route. 
 
 To their profound astonishment they found the land 
 to be nothing but a vast swamp for miles, into which 
 their horses sank at times almost up to the saddle-girths. 
 No worse place could have been selected for landing an 
 army. Who could have recommended it? Eight and 
 left they deviated, seeking a way out to firmer grouncL, 
 
140 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 but, finding none, they had to come back and report the 
 facts to their general. 
 
 "Well, there is no help for it now," said that officer; 
 " the army is landed and must find its way out. I have no 
 doubt we shall manage it somehow, as Britishers have the 
 knack of doing, and always have done, even under worse 
 circumstances." 
 
 And through it they did get, but at what a price of 
 hardship and suffering! It took them no less than three 
 days to cover a distance of about eighteen miles of con- 
 tinuous swamp. Across this had to be dragged some fifty 
 pieces of cannon, and all the multifarious stores required 
 for an army on the march. The toil was enormous and 
 discouraging, especially as the commissariat broke down 
 utterly, and for many hours, even entire days, the men 
 were left without food or refreshment of any kind. For 
 stretches of miles at a time the troops had to wade through 
 water sometimes up to their waists. To get the cannon 
 through was an almost impossible task, killing both to 
 horses and men. At least three or four guns sank out of 
 sight altogether and were lost. All the time the rain con- 
 tinued to fall. It was bitterly cold. At night there was 
 no shelter. The men had to rest as best they could in 
 their wet clothes. It was a marvel that any of them 
 lived through it. But the conduct of the officers was 
 admirable. With a self-abnegation beyond all praise they 
 cheered and aided their men, displaying a courage and 
 endurance far beyond that required to lead even the 
 deadliest charge. 
 
 At length, after two days' farther march, all the troops 
 were drawn up upon solid ground at a spot where even the 
 veriest tyro could see they might have easily landed direct 
 from the ships. 
 
 They were now within four miles of Buenos Ayres, 
 
INCOMPETENCE AND ARROGANCE 141 
 
 which was clearly visible, and had not as yet encountered 
 the slightest resistance, at which they marvelled greatly, 
 for it would have been easy to slaughter them wholesale as 
 they were floundering through the marsh. 
 
 Once more were Stephen and his comrade scouts called 
 upon to do active duty in reconnoitring. Cautiously they 
 advanced, but for a mile or two the country appeared to be 
 quite deserted. Only an occasional hut was seen, but the 
 inhabitants had fled. At length they came within sight 
 of the little river, the Kiachuelo, about three miles from 
 the southern boundary of the city, the same spot at which 
 General Beresford had met the Spaniards the year before. 
 They saw what appeared to be a formidable force of Spanish 
 troops drawn up on the opposite bank. 
 
 This being reported to the general, the British troops 
 were at once formed into order of attack. As soon as they 
 came within view of the rivulet a regular panic appeared to 
 spread through the ranks of the Spanish defenders. They 
 broke up into a mob and fled helter-skelter towards the 
 town. 
 
 Trusting to their disguise and to the confusion, Stephen's 
 party at once plunged into the river, quickly crossed, and 
 followed in the wake of the fugitives. They discovered, to 
 their intense surprise, that the demoralized troops did not 
 rally even when they had reached the town, but rushed on 
 through it, leaving the city entirely defenceless. 
 
 Seeing this, Stephen at once gave orders to draw bridle 
 and return to report to the general. The officer imme- 
 diately communicated the intelligence to the commander- 
 in-chief, and urged a general advance. 
 
 Had that advice been followed it is probable that the 
 English would have taken Buenos Ayres that night without 
 firing a shot or losing a man. 
 
 But no; General Whitelock issued a peremptory order 
 
142 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 that the troops were to halt upon the position they had 
 taken up until the following day. 
 
 During the night Stephen stole alone into the city. His 
 venturous mission was rendered less hazardous by the all- 
 pervading excitement, and by the fact that from his appear- 
 ance and naturally dark complexion he might readily have 
 been taken for a Spaniard. 
 
 Having forded the river, he left his horse in one of the 
 numerous hide-packing yards (barracas), from which the 
 caretakers had fled through fear of the invaders, tying him 
 up under a shed where he could readily find him again. 
 
 Stephen found the outer streets almost deserted, but as 
 he got farther into the town he observed many people 
 hurrying in one direction, talking excitedly. He mingled 
 with the crowd, unobserved in the darkness and tumult, 
 and he soon gathered they were making their way to the 
 plaza, in which was the cabildo, or town-house, where the 
 council was then in session debating the course they should 
 take in the present critical circumstances. 
 
 The plaza was packed with an excited throng, all eager 
 to learn as soon as possible the decision the authorities 
 would come to. Slouching his hat over his face, and taking 
 care not to attract attention, Stephen gradually worked his 
 way round to the cabildo. The session-hall was on the 
 ground floor, and was brilliantly lit up; the windows were 
 open, so that it was easy to see what was going on inside, 
 and those nearest could even hear the discussion. 
 
 The president, who sat at the head of the table, was 
 a fine-looking old man, dressed in the fashion of the pre- 
 vious generation, tie-wig, ruffles, &c. His name, Stephen 
 gathered from remarks in the crowd, was Martin Alzaga. 
 At the moment when Stephen came within earshot he was 
 evidently replying to some remarks which had just been 
 made by an officer in full uniform who sat by his side, and 
 
INCOMPETENCE AND ARROGANCE 143 
 
 whom Stephen had no difficulty in discovering to be General 
 Liniers, the commander of the Spanish garrison. 
 
 From the tone of Senor Alzaga's speech it was evident 
 that the general had been urging the municipality to sur- 
 render and make the best terms possible, since it appeared 
 that the troops had twice broken and fled precipitately that 
 day at the mere sight of the enemy. 
 
 " I tell you no ! " said the president. " Hope is not lost 
 yet! "Why have the English halted outside, unless it is 
 because they are afraid 1 No! we shall not surrender so 
 tamely, but let every man who can handle a pick-axe or 
 spade be set to work to-night to dig trenches and make 
 barricades across the streets, and let everyone who can fire 
 a gun take his place on the flat roofs of the houses to- 
 morrow morning and prepare to give a warm welcome to 
 these heretical invaders!" 
 
 Loud cheers greeted these words in the council chambers, 
 and they were frantically received in the plaza, as the 
 import of the resolution became known. 
 
 In his eagerness to hear every word spoken within, 
 Stephen had come within the zone of the light from the 
 windows, and his hat had been pushed back from his face. 
 Suddenly he felt himself touched by the collar, and the 
 terrible words rang out: "Ha, a spy! An Englishman! 
 Death to him!" 
 
 Quickly glancing up, Stephen recognized his assailant to 
 be Senor Lopez, whose face was contorted with rage. 
 
 Shaking himself loose from his grasp, Stephen struck out 
 from the shoulder with such force as to throw Lopez to the 
 ground. In an instant the Spaniard had drawn a pistol 
 and fired it at Stephen, fortunately, however, missing his 
 aim. Almost as quickly Stephen had drawn his double- 
 barrelled pistol, which he now always carried, and returned 
 the fire. 
 
144 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 The report of the shots and the cry of "Un Ingles !* 
 produced a sudden panic among the crowd, which, but a 
 moment before, had been applauding the bold proposals 
 for defence. Some seemed to imagine that the English had 
 actually forced their way into the city in the darkness, and 
 were about to massacre them, and rushed off in great ex- 
 citement. In the confusion which ensued it was an easy 
 matter for Stephen to get away, and he did not cease 
 running until he came to the place where he had left his 
 horse. 
 
 It was but the work of a minute to mount and gallop 
 towards the rivulet, which he forded rapidly, and within 
 half an hour he was at his general's tent. There he rapidly 
 related what he had learned of the state of the town and 
 the proposals of the president of the cabildo. 
 
 "There is not a moment to be lost!" exclaimed the 
 general. "We should march in at once and take pos- 
 session. I must see General Whitelock immediately ! " 
 
 So saying, he mounted his horse, which stood ready 
 saddled, and rode off to the quarters of the commander- 
 in-chief. 
 
 In about an hour he returned, evidently in a state of 
 great irritation. 
 
 "Well, sir, what news?" asked an aide-de-camp. 
 
 The general seemed as if he were about to explode. 
 
 " Well, of all the — but the matter is too serious to talk 
 lightly about. What do you think? I was told by the 
 commander's orderly that " General Whitelock had gone to 
 bed, and had given strict orders that he was not to be dis- 
 turbed on any account, as he was not feeling very well!" 
 
MARCHED TO DESTRUCTION 145 
 
 CHAPTER XXI 
 
 MARCHED TO DESTRUCTION 
 
 NEXT morning the English troops were in momentary 
 expectation of receiving the order to advance. The 
 precious opportunity of making a night attack, which 
 would certainly have been successful, had been lost, but as 
 the defenders appeared as yet to have taken no action, 
 there seemed nothing to prevent the invaders from march- 
 ing in without meeting with serious resistance. 
 
 As hour after hour went past without any orders being 
 issued, the agitation became great in the camp. Men 
 asked each other what could be the meaning of this 
 senseless, inexplicable delay. Presently a rumour spread 
 through the troops to the effect that General Whitelock 
 had not yet risen. He was, it was said, suffering from the 
 effects of a chill caught in the march through the marshes, 
 which had given him a headache, and rendered him unfit 
 to attend to business. It required all the force of military 
 discipline to restrain the men in their stations, and prevent 
 them from rushing forward without orders. 
 
 If the commander-in-chief was incapable of attending to 
 his duties, his divisional generals were not idle. From 
 daybreak they had been in the saddle, surveying the 
 topography of the place to be attacked. They saw at once 
 that there were two elevated spots (now known as the Alto 
 and the Retiro) from which artillery could command the 
 city, and, in fact, have it at their mercy. They observed, 
 also, that it would be no difficult matter to completely 
 invest the town should it be thought necessary to take it 
 by siege, and they knew that they had amply sufficient 
 tioops for the purpose. 
 
 ( M 806 ) K 
 
146 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 It was reported that the generals had gone in a body to 
 the commander-in-chief, and proposed to him that he should 
 at least send artillery to take possession of the heights, 
 and move some battalions round to the north so as to be 
 able to conduct an attack from two directions at least, if he 
 decided to take the place by storm. 
 
 But General Whitelock had, it was said, replied that he 
 had his plan, which would be made known to them in due 
 course, and he did not require their advice. 
 
 So all that day the troops stood in enforced inaction. 
 The position was most trying, especially as through the 
 telescope the inhabitants could be seen everywhere, like an 
 army of ants, busy erecting barricades across the streets, 
 and placing sand-bags for shelters on the house-tops. 
 
 In the afternoon General Whitelock, who had apparently 
 got somewhat better from his indisposition, sent in an 
 officer with a flag of truce to demand the surrender of the 
 city and the disarming of the inhabitants. The answer 
 sent by the heroic Martin Alzaga was a decided refusal, 
 with the further message to the English general: "If you 
 want our arms, you must come and take them ". 
 
 Next morning (July 5th) General Whitelock issued a 
 general order to the army, announcing his determination 
 to take the city by storm, and setting forth his plan of 
 attack. This was, that about one-half of the forces were to 
 march to the centre through four separate parallel streets, 
 while the remainder were to remain as reserve, under the 
 immediate command of the general commander-in-chief, and 
 of these latter 2000 were to march back to take up a 
 position about six miles away, near the village of Quillmes. 
 The order, which was couched in the magniloquent language 
 for which General Whitelock was notorious, concluded with 
 the following remarkable sentence : " As the plaza was the 
 scene of the British capitulation under General Beresford, 
 
MARCHED TO DESTRUCTION 147 
 
 so will the plaza be the scene of British retributive ven- 
 geance and victory ! No shot shall be fired until that spot 
 is reached!" 
 
 In order to make the last point of this order effective, 
 instructions were given to the divisional commanders to see 
 that the troops under their command marched in with their 
 arms unloaded. As if afraid that even this precaution 
 might not be sufficient to restrain the ardour of some of 
 the regiments, whose fighting instincts might overcome 
 their discipline, the general ordered that those more 
 spirited, and the Connaught Eangers in particular, should 
 unscrew and remove their gun flints. 
 
 No words could describe the general consternation which 
 spread through all ranks of the army upon their learning 
 of the insensate plan, and, realizing the astounding in- 
 capacity of a commander who could dictate such an order, 
 men felt as if a sentence of death had been pronounced 
 upon them; for what but certain destruction could result 
 from a march in a defenceless condition through more than 
 three miles of narrow streets, the flat roofs of which would 
 be swarming with marksmen firing through loopholes be- 
 hind the safe protection of sand-bags and parapets. 
 
 Such, however, is the power of discipline in the British 
 army that the troops were at once drawn up in accordance 
 with the order. The divisional commanders were as white 
 as death, as they reluctantly gave their orders, but they 
 felt that with such a man as Whitelock remonstrance 
 would be useless. 
 
 It was broad daylight when the columns started, and 
 their approach could be seen by the defenders from afar. 
 As if to give the enemy ample notice of their approach, 
 and to prepare for them, General Whitelock gave orders for 
 a salute of twenty-one guns to be fired in honour of the 
 victory about to be won. 
 
148 
 
 The streets of Buenos Ayres cross each other at right 
 angles, at regular distances of 150 yards apart, and are 
 about 18 yards wide. The houses were then all one- 
 storied, with flat roofs, protected by parapets about three 
 feet in height. Across each street barricades had been 
 made, consisting of deep trenches, the earth from which 
 had been thrown up to form a bank on the side towards 
 the town. These were revetted with planks or sand-bags, 
 so as to present an almost perpendicular face to the 
 assailants. 
 
 To attempt an attack under such conditions, and in the 
 method adopted by Whitelock, was simply to send men 
 into the lion's mouth. 
 
 The British troops were mowed down by hundreds before 
 they even got beyond the outskirts of the city. It was not 
 a battle, but simply a massacre. 
 
 Nevertheless, the English pressed on undauntedly, though 
 their comrades were falling round them in heaps. The 
 different columns soon lost sight of each other, and could 
 render no mutual support. 
 
 The division which Stephen accompanied soon carried a 
 barricade at the point of the bayonet, and, at last disregard- 
 ing the order of the commander-in-chief, they loaded their 
 muskets to retaliate on the enemy. After a headlong rush 
 past several blocks of buildings they came upon a church. 
 With the butts of their muskets the soldiers in a few 
 minutes crashed in the portal of the great door, but not 
 before the street in front was strewn with fallen men. 
 Once in the church, they had a breathing-space. The 
 colonel at once placed men at the windows, on the roof, 
 and up in the tower, from the balconies of which they 
 could dominate the neighbouring houses. 
 
 It was now most important to acquaint the commander- 
 in-chief with the position. The colonel turned to Stephen, 
 who hitherto had escaped unhurt, though his horse had 
 been shot down almost at the outset. 
 
MARCHED TO DESTRUCTION 149 
 
 "You will be the best messenger," he said; "a man in 
 uniform would have no chance. There is no time to be 
 lost. Rush oft* at once, and report to General Whitelock 
 how we stand. May God preserve you, and get you 
 through! All our lives depend upon your safe arrival. 
 Lose not an instant ! " 
 
 It was a perilous errand, but Stephen did not flinch. 
 What was his life compared to the safety of the whole regi- 
 ment, and the success of the expedition? 
 
 He went through the sacristy, and out by the private 
 door used by the priests. As he had anticipated, he found 
 no difficulty in getting away. The defenders of the city 
 were an undisciplined mob, and acting under no general 
 plan, so their curiosity and attention were altogether 
 centred upon the streets through which the English soldiers 
 were passing. 
 
 Making a detour through back streets, Stephen had 
 nearly reached the outskirts, when suddenly he saw three 
 men on horseback riding towards him. In an instant he 
 saw it was General Liniers, followed by two aides, who 
 were going from one part of the defence to another to see 
 the progress of events. As soon as they spied him they 
 shouted to him to halt, probably believing him to be either 
 a messenger or a deserter. 
 
 Stephen knew that they would not for a moment be 
 deceived if he parleyed with them. Nevertheless, he 
 slowed down his pace as if he intended to speak with 
 them. But so soon as they were within a few feet, he 
 made a sudden rush between two of them and bolted off at 
 the top of his speed. 
 
 With a cry of surprise and an oath, as his horse, startled, 
 nearly threw him off, one of the officers turned, and seeing 
 that the fugitive paid no attention to his orders to stop, at 
 once drew a pistol and fired. 
 
 Stephen felt as if a whip had struck him, and instantly 
 his right arm fell helpless at his side. 
 
150 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Presently he came to a side street, and just round the 
 corner, out of sight, a wide gate stood open before him. 
 Through it he dashed. He found himself in one of the 
 yards for packing hides. He rushed into a shed and 
 behind a pile of skins, where he lay panting. 
 
 In a few moments he heard the sound of a horseman 
 riding up to the gate, and the cry : " Where can the rascal 
 have got to?" followed by the words, evidently from the 
 general, "Come along, captain! We have no time to waste 
 in hunting for him. He may be only a simple peon, 
 frightened at soldiers!" Then the sound of the hoofs inti- 
 mated that the general's party had ridden off. 
 
 Relieved at his escape from present danger, Stephen at 
 once decided to go on, remembering the urgent necessity for 
 haste. But his wound was now become exceeding painful, 
 and he felt sick and faint. He had been shot just above 
 the elbow, and blood was flowing freely. He bandaged his 
 arm as tightly as he could, with a strip ripped from the 
 edge of his poncho; then, with his knife in his left hand, he 
 cut a narrow slip of hide, which he fashioned into a rough 
 sling to support it. 
 
 He slipped out of the gate, but met with no one, so that 
 he was able to resume his journey unopposed; but now he 
 felt so ill and giddy that his progress was much slower, and 
 he had to stop from time to time to rest. 
 
 At length, after what appeared to him to be a period of 
 hours, he reached the banks of the Riachuelo. How to 
 cross it was a problem. Fortunately no one was in sight 
 to stop him. He suddenly saw a short plank, such as was 
 used to put under a barrow wheel to keep it from sinking 
 into the mud. With great exertions, impelled by the 
 energy of despair and the thoughts of the comrades who 
 were depending upon him, he at length managed to push 
 it into the water. Then, plunging in, he lay on his back in 
 the stream, put his left arm over the plank, and struck out 
 with his legs. In a short time he managed to come within 
 
MARCHED TO DESTRUCTION 151 
 
 soundings on the opposite bank of the narrow river, and 
 struggling to his feet with great efforts, he was able to work 
 through the mud and on to the firm land, where he had to 
 lie down for a while in utter exhaustion. Again he rose to 
 his feet and staggered on. He was nearly in a fainting 
 condition when he at last reached the British outposts. In 
 a few words he explained his errand to a sentry. The 
 officer of the guard was at once informed. He made two 
 soldiers lift Stephen up and place him on his horse, and, 
 leaping up behind him, rode towards the tent of the com- 
 mander-in-chief. 
 
 General Whitelock was seated at a table with a map of the 
 city before him. He was, as usual, surrounded by a numer- 
 ous staff of aides-de-camp. Stephen's conductor explained 
 how he had found him, and his story that he was the bearer 
 of an important message from Colonel Duff. 
 
 General Whitelock looked at the young man for a few 
 seconds superciliously. Covered with mud, blood-stained, 
 and his clothes dripping wet, Stephen was conscious that 
 he was not a pleasing object for so fine a gentleman to con- 
 template. 
 
 "Where are your despatches?" demanded the general 
 haughtily. 
 
 Stephen explained in stammering words that he had none. 
 He explained that the colonel had been too busy and too 
 desperately occupied to write, whilst the carrying of a 
 written despatch would have greatly added to the danger 
 of his mission. 
 
 To his horror the general abruptly replied : " I can pay 
 no attention to messengers not properly accredited." Then 
 turning to his staff, he said, " Take him away. How can I 
 tell, dressed as he is, that he is not a spy." 
 
 "Great God!" cried Stephen, as he sank fainting down. 
 "Are these poor fellows, then, to be left to their fate?" 
 
152 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 CHAPTER XXII 
 
 IGNOMINIOUS SURRENDER 
 
 AS the day wore on, and messenger after messenger 
 brought evil tidings, the general could no longer con- 
 ceal from himself the utter failure of his plans. He heard 
 how regiment after regiment had capitulated after being 
 nearly cut to pieces, whilst the few who still held out were 
 being closely besieged in the churches or other public build- 
 ings, and were sorely beset. 
 
 Instead of rising to the occasion, however, he seemed to 
 entirely lose his head, and to sink into a lethargy of abject 
 fear and cowardly collapse. He neither despatched orders 
 to those in front to retire, nor ordered up the reserve, 
 though he had more than five thousand men who had not 
 yet taken part in the fight, and who were burning to go to 
 their comrades' aid. 
 
 Gradually the sound of the firing spattered out, and night 
 closed in silence and gloom over the British camp. 
 
 At daybreak next morning, a party, headed by an orderly 
 bearing a flag of truce, was observed to be coming from 
 the town to the English head-quarters. When it arrived, 
 the messenger was found to be an English officer bearing a 
 despatch from General Liniers to General Whitelock. In 
 this the Spanish commander reported that he had taken 
 prisoner eighty officers and upwards of a thousand men, 
 and that more than double that number had been killed 
 and wounded, whilst the few that still held out were com- 
 pletely in his power; he therefore suggested, in the name 
 of humanity and to avoid further effusion of blood, that 
 the English should surrender. "As a proof of Spanish 
 generosity," wrote General Liniers, "I offer to your ex- 
 cellency that, if you choose to re-embark with the re- 
 mainder of your army, to evacuate Monte Video and the 
 
IGNOMINIOUS SURRENDER 153 
 
 whole of the River Plate, leaving me hostages for the 
 execution of the treaty, I will not only return all the 
 prisoners which I have now made, but also those which 
 were taken from General Beresford. At the same time 
 I think it necessary to state, that if your excellency does 
 not accept this offer, I cannot answer for the safety of 
 the prisoners, as my troops are infinitely exasperated 
 against them, and the more so as three of my aides-de- 
 camp have been wounded while bearing flags of truce; 
 and for this reason I send your excellency this letter by 
 an English officer, and shall wait your answer for one 
 hour." 
 
 The indignation which burned in the minds of the officers 
 of the staff when they heard these words may be imagined. 
 
 But General Whitelock, who still seemed to be quite 
 dazed, dismissed the messenger with an evasive reply, 
 without indicating his intentions. The time stipulated in 
 the despatch having elapsed, the party returned to the 
 town without a reply. 
 
 Within a short time thereafter the sound of firing an- 
 nounced that the combat had been renewed. A little later 
 a messenger arrived with a despatch from Sir Samuel 
 Auchmuty, stating that he was holding the Retiro, and had 
 just driven back the Spaniards with great slaughter and 
 captured two guns. He urgently asked for reinforcements, 
 which, if sent at once, might, he said, still save the situation. 
 
 Still General Whitelock gave no answer, nor did he order 
 up the reserve. 
 
 In the afternoon he sent a general officer to Liniers with 
 an intimation that he surrendered upon the terms proposed. 
 
 That very evening news was brought of the arrival of 
 another British fleet at Monte Video, with reinforcements of 
 2000 men. 
 
 But it was too late ! 
 
 So concluded the most ignominious surrender of modern 
 days. A dishonour to British arms it was, but the character 
 
154 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 of British soldiers for valour was not stained. The sole 
 responsibility will ever remain upon the shoulders of White- 
 lock, the most incompetent and cowardly commander who 
 ever disgraced the British uniform, and of the government 
 who appointed him. 1 
 
 After twelve days occupied in shipping the war material, 
 stores, horses, &c, the survivors of the defeated and dis- 
 graced British expedition sailed from Buenos A} r res to 
 Monte Video. There they resumed the life which had 
 been led before the attack. The people of Monte Video 
 were kinder and more hospitable than ever, and it was 
 noticeable that they showed no exultation over the victory 
 of the Spaniards, nor ever alluded to it in the presence of 
 English officers. Universal regret, almost consternation, 
 had been felt in Monte Video at the news that that place 
 was also to be evacuated. An address was drawn up to 
 Sir Samuel Auchmuty by the cabildo (municipality) of 
 Monte Video, spontaneously testifying to the meritorious 
 conduct of the British garrison and authorities during the 
 seven months' occupation, and expressing regret at their 
 departure. 
 
 The conduct of General Whitelock at this juncture dis- 
 gusted everybody. Instead of being humiliated before his 
 gallant comrades, he put on more airs than ever, and strutted 
 the streets as though he had been the hero of a hundred 
 fights. He resumed holding his levees and receptions, to 
 which, however, no one went unless compelled by orders. 
 
 1 Spanish historians assert that in General Liniers' original draft despatch no 
 mention was made of Monte Video. " Put in," said Senor Alzaga, the president 
 of the cabildo, or mayor, "put in 'that he shall also evacuate Monte Video'." 
 " Oh ! " said General Liniers, "that is out of the question, it would spoil the whole 
 matter." "Let us put it down," replied the resolute mayor, "it can be easily 
 taken out if objected to." It was put down, and it was not objected to. Upon 
 his return to England, General Whitelock was tried by court-martial, and the 
 judgment against him was that "he be cashiered, and declared totally unfit and 
 unworthy to serve His Majesty in any military capacity whatever". Many of the 
 public thought he should have been shot, and that he was only saved on account 
 of his high connections. 
 
 F<>r some time afterwards there was a common toast in England: "Success to 
 gray hairs, but bad luck to white locks ". 
 
WHAT NEXT? 155 
 
 At length, on the 9th September, he handed over the 
 keys of the fort to the Spanish governor, General Elio, and 
 the British fleet set sail, laden with dispirited and disap- 
 pointed soldiers and merchants. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 WHAT NEXT? 
 
 STEPHEN had spent several days in the hospital at the 
 camp near Buenos Ayres, suffering from the effect of 
 his wound and exertions, which had thrown him into a 
 fever, but was unable to get out of bed by the time the 
 fleet sailed for Monte Video. 
 
 Upon his arrival at that city Don Antonio at once in- 
 vited him to his house, and asked him to stay there until 
 his health was completely restored. As for Sandy Fulton 
 and Mick Scanlon, they asked for nothing better than to 
 be allowed to return to the estancia Las Cruces, to which 
 Don Antonio readily consented. 
 
 The departure of the English from the River Plate was 
 a heavy blow to Stephen, as it cut off the prospects he had 
 entertained of being able to make his fortune in a new and 
 rising British colony. 
 
 To Seiior Rodriguez the disappointment was scarcely less 
 great. 
 
 "Ah!" he said, "the troubles which I foresaw were 
 coming to my country when I resolved upon my proposed 
 visit to Europe will now, I fear, arrive more rapidly, and 
 be upon a yet larger scale. Spain is, as you may have 
 heard, in a most deplorable condition at present, owing to 
 internal dissensions; and the Government, even if they had 
 time to take an interest in the affairs of the colonies, are 
 too much endangered by threats of revolution at home to 
 
156 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 be able to spare forces to keep order in their outlying 
 possessions. The recent events in Buenos Ayres have 
 revealed to the people their power, for though General 
 Liniers is in the Spanish service, most of his soldiers in 
 the battles with the English were colonial born, and now 
 that they have, as they think, conquered a strong European 
 power, it is not likely that they will submit much longer 
 to the domination of a weaker, especially when the yoke 
 is so galling as that of Spain. Therefore the ideas of 
 independence which have been rising slowly in men's minds 
 for some years will now gather force, and lead to action. 
 I am myself strongly in favour of independence, but I can 
 see that the country is not yet in a condition to undertake 
 self-government with success. Under the guidance of the 
 English all might have gone well. As it is, I can see 
 nothing before us now but long years of anarchy. As 
 a matter of fact the Spanish colonies are not, nor will they 
 ever be, nations. They are composed of very dissimilar 
 peoples inhabiting the same country. One does not need 
 to go far to see that. You have already had some little 
 experience in the ' camp ', and you may have observed how 
 very different are the people there from those of the towns, 
 although only a few miles apart. Take, for example, my 
 neighbour, Don Manuel Gonzales, whose house you have 
 visited. The lives, dress, habits, and ideas of such people 
 are all quite different from those of the townspeople, who 
 have become, to a certain extent, civilized under the in- 
 fluence of the Spaniards. But if a rising against Spain 
 takes place, it is the country people who will dominate. 
 They have the men who will form the fighting force under 
 their control ; in fact the gauchos will fight only for their 
 patron, and will care very little what the fight is about. 
 What could the townspeople do against such men? But, 
 again, the country land-owners are utterly ignorant of 
 politics, or anything else outside of their ordinary life, 
 and living, as they do, generally leagues apart, there is no 
 
WHAT NEXT? 157 
 
 union or sympathy between them. Even the aboriginal 
 Indians of our plains are better organized. They have 
 their tribes and chiefs, and understand at least the rudi- 
 ments of government, whereby some have to submit to 
 the restraint of authority for the general good. Therefore 
 I foresee nothing but anarchy before us." 
 
 Don Antonio's fears proved to be only too well founded. 
 Many weeks did not elapse after the English had left before 
 news began to come in of disturbances in all parts of the 
 country. In Buenos Ayres and Monte Video it was observ- 
 able that lawlessness and violence had greatly increased 
 amongst the lower orders. Men who had been engaged 
 in the excitement of fighting did not readily go back to 
 the humdrum, monotonous life of the estancias. It was 
 specially notable that drunkenness had become much more 
 usual in Monte Video; many attributed this to the example 
 of the British soldiers and sailors. Money must be had 
 to carry on such a life, and consequently robberies became 
 alarmingly frequent. At length it was not safe to go about 
 the streets after dark. 
 
 In view of the state of affairs, which appeared likely ta 
 grow worse, Don Antonio one day announced to Stephen 
 that he had resolved to leave Monte Video for a time and 
 take up his residence on his estate on the other side of the 
 river, about twenty leagues inland from Buenos Ayres. 
 "There," said he, "we shall at least be free from the danger 
 of meeting these ruffianly classes, and be able to watch the 
 progress of events from a peaceful haven." 
 
 Don Antonio had, as a speculation, bought a flock of 
 about a hundred English sheep, which had been brought 
 out on a ship during the British occupation of Monte Video. 
 These he had sent to Las Cruces, and placed under the 
 special care of the two sailors, who, he thought, would be 
 more reliable than the native herdsmen. He now resolved 
 to take the flock to his estancia in Buenos Ayres, which he 
 thought would suit them better. " There are finer grasses, 
 
158 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 there," he explained, "and, in fact, the country seems 
 specially adapted for sheep. I see no reason why in the 
 course of time the products of our sheep should not be 
 quite as valuable as those of our cattle and horses, or even 
 more so." 
 
 So Stephen was despatched to Las Cruces to instruct 
 Sandy and Mick to drive in the sheep to Monte Video upon 
 a certain day, when Don Antonio had arranged to have a 
 schooner waiting to convey the whole party to Buenos 
 Ayres. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 THE PAMPAS. A GAUCHO TRACKER 
 
 THE estancia house at "El Porvenir", Seiior Rodriguez's 
 estate in the province of Buenos Ayres, was almost 
 exactly like that at Las Cruces, which has already been 
 described, but the aspect of the surrounding country was 
 very different. Instead of the rolling prairie of the Banda 
 Oriental, here there was nothing but level plains as far as 
 the eye could reach. If the former resembled the long swells 
 of the sea in a storm, the latter was exactly like an ocean 
 in a dead calm. The limit of the view was an unbroken 
 line like that of the horizon at sea. The soil was a rich 
 alluvium, not even a pebble was to be found for miles, 
 carpeted with unbroken pastures, the verdure of which, in 
 spring and summer, was variegated by the hues of countless 
 flowers. 
 
 Here Don Antonio and his daughter, Stephen and the two 
 sailors, took up their abode, and soon fell into the routine 
 life of the "camp", which differed in no wise from that at 
 the Uruguayan estancia, except that, inasmuch as there were 
 no streams on these pampas, water had to be constantly 
 drawn for the live stock. This was done by a simple 
 
THE PAMPAS. A GAUCHO TRACKER 159 
 
 apparatus, consisting of a large bucket made of hide, about 
 five or six yards long, and open at both ends. Over the 
 well was a framework, from which was suspended a pulley, 
 through which a long hide rope was passed, one end being 
 secured to the bucket and the other end fastened to a 
 horse. The bucket being lowered into the well, a boy 
 would mount the horse, and, riding away for a little dis- 
 tance, draw up the bucket, which came up doubled in the 
 shape of a horse-shoe, with both ends uppermost. The 
 adjustment of the rope was so accurate that when the horse 
 had reached the extreme point, one mouth of the bucket 
 would lean over a trough into which it emptied itself; then 
 the boy would ride back to the well and repeat the opera- 
 tion. Hour after hour would be spent in this monotonous 
 task, one of the most laborious on the estancia. 
 
 The mayordomo, or manager, of the estate, Don Cayetano 
 Perez, was in many respects a remarkable man. He was 
 about fifty years of age, his long black beard and hair being 
 tinged with gray, but he was apparently as strong and 
 active as many men twenty years his junior. Don Antonio 
 told them that he had, in his earlier years, led the life of a 
 wandering gaucho, which term is more properly applicable 
 to such homeless bedouins of the pampa than to the peons 
 settled on one estate, and that he was an adept in all the 
 craft of the plains. 
 
 If he were asked the direction to any particular place, or 
 where any one of the herds was now grazing, he would 
 unhesitatingly point out the bearings, and, if required, guide 
 the party to it without deviating from the straight line. 
 This faculty seemed to the sailors most marvellous, accus- 
 tomed as they were to rely upon a compass for direction; 
 but Don Cayetano had never seen a compass, nor would he 
 have known how to use it. 
 
 Don Antonio told still more surprising stories of his 
 capabilities. "For example," said he, "let an article be 
 placed, or even buried, at any spot on the plains in his 
 
160 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 presence, and weeks or months afterwards he will take you 
 direct to the place without a blunder. I have even been 
 with him on the pampa when night has overtaken us, but 
 he was never at a loss to find the way. He would jump off 
 his horse and taste the pasture, and be able to tell at once 
 where we were. But this is no uncommon accomplishment 
 among such men of the plains." 
 
 It was not long before they had an opportunity of wit- 
 nessing another aspect of Don Cayetano's wonderful powers. 
 Some horses, including a favourite of Don Antonio's, had 
 been missed from the estate, and the mayordomo went to 
 look for them, accompanied by Stephen and some of the 
 peons. Suddenly the leader cried: "This is no simple stray- 
 ing, the horses have been stolen ! See, there are the tracks 
 of some strange horses, which were mounted, and have been 
 driven round our lot." 
 
 To uninitiated eyes, like those of Stephen, no signs were 
 visible, and such keen-sighted observation seemed almost 
 supernatural. Without hesitation Don Cayetano began fol- 
 lowing the trail at a pace that the others could scarcely 
 keep up with. When he had gone on for some leagues, he 
 said: "I can see that they are making for the Laguna 
 Chica, where they will probably camp. Ah! here they 
 halted for a short time ! " 
 
 After another stretch he turned to some of his men, and 
 directed them to ride off as rapidly as they could, and to 
 make a circuit so as to come on the other side of the lagoon. 
 
 "You will probably find the troop of horses there," he 
 said, "and you need not be afraid, as there are only two 
 thieves, who will most likely make off as soon as they see 
 you." 
 
 It turned out just as he expected, and that night Don 
 Cayetano had the satisfaction of driving back to the estancia 
 the stolen horses. 
 
 Speaking of this exploit to Don Antonio, Stephen ex- 
 pressed his great astonishment at the marvellous feat. 
 
THE PAMPAS. A GAUCHO TRACKER 161 
 
 "Pooh! that was nothing for Cayetano," said Don An- 
 tonio. "He has been known to do much cleverer things 
 than that. Why, once when he was away on a journey his 
 best horse-trappings were stolen from his house. His wife 
 noticed a footprint on the dust, which she took to be that 
 of the thief. She covered it over with a tray. Two months 
 later Cayetano came home and looked at the footprint, 
 which by that time had become blurred, and could scarcely 
 have been made out by other eyes. He said nothing more 
 at the time; but a year and a half later, as he happened to 
 be walking through a street on the outskirts of Buenos 
 Ay res, he suddenly started, and went off on a jog-trot with 
 his eyes on the ground. He turned into a house, and there 
 he found his trappings, by that time blackened by use and 
 nearly worn out, and the man in the house dared not deny 
 the robbery. Cayetano was at one time greatly in request 
 by the officers of justice when in search of a criminal, and 
 his testimony was always accepted in a court of law without 
 question. You may have heard that one of the best ways 
 of throwing a tracker off the scent is that of walking through 
 water for some distance. But no fugitive could ever manage 
 to deceive Cayetano. He would ' reconstitute ' the scene as 
 if he were witnessing it, surprising the onlookers by his 
 remarks. 'Ah! you would, would youf he would cry. 'So 
 you passed here on tiptoe, did you 1 and then you took to 
 the water.' 'Here is where you came out. Ah! why did 
 you not think about these droppings of water on the grass?' 
 and so on. Once he tracked a man into a vineyard sur- 
 rounded by mud walls. 'He is in there,' he said to the 
 soldiers. 'Now your work begins, mine is done. I need 
 not wait longer.' 
 
 "The soldiers searched until they were tired, and then 
 sent to Cayetano to say that they could not find him. ' He 
 is still there; he has not come out,' retorted the tracker, who 
 would not take the trouble to make a second investigation; 
 and he was right, for the man was captured soon after. 
 
 ( II 806 ) L 
 
162 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 But," continued Don Antonio, " there are plenty of men in 
 the country who are almost as clever trackers as Cayetano. 
 I was once riding up near San Luis, when my guide sud- 
 denly cried : ' There was a very nice little Moorish mare in 
 that troop which passed yesterday. She belongs to Don 
 Nicolas Zapata, and probably he was riding her, as she was 
 evidently saddled.' Upon reaching the town I found that 
 what my guide had said was absolutely correct, though he 
 had not seen the mare for more than a year. But the guide 
 was only a mere herdsman, and nobody thought his feat 
 anything out of the common." 
 
 CHAPTER XXV 
 
 A MYSTERIOUS GUEST 
 
 THEY had been at the estancia for some months without 
 any extraordinary incidents happening, when one 
 evening, just after sunset, as they were about to sit down 
 to supper they heard the hail of a traveller — "Ave Maria!" 
 
 Don Antonio went to the door and gave the usual 
 response, "Sin pecado concebida!" 
 
 The stranger, to the surprise of all, did not ride up to the 
 house at once, but, keeping as far as possible in obscurity, 
 said in a low tone: "Is it you, Antonio? Are you alone?" 
 
 " Yes, it is I," replied Don Antonio. " Who is it?" 
 
 The traveller came forward, and was at once recognized 
 by Senor Rodriguez as Senor Padilla, a gentleman with 
 whom he had long been acquainted. With him came an- 
 other gentleman, also a friend of Don Antonio, a Senor 
 Lima. 
 
 "Welcome, seilores!" cried Don Antonio. "Pray dis- 
 mount and come in." 
 
 "Are you alone?" they queried. 
 
A MYSTERIOUS GUEST 163 
 
 "Only my daughter is in the house, and this young 
 English gentleman, my friend," said Don Antonio. 
 
 "Ah! an Englishman! Then we may come in." 
 
 "Why all this mystery, gentlemen?" asked the host. 
 
 "Because," said Seiior Padilla, "we are escorting one the 
 Spaniards would like to lay hold of. But as we are among 
 safe friends we need take no further precautions." So say- 
 ing, he rode off, but returned in a few minutes, followed by 
 two gentlemen, whom he at once took into the house, and 
 promptly shut the door behind them. 
 
 "Don Antonio, my friend," said he, "let me introduce to 
 you, and beg your hospitality for, his excellency General 
 Beresford and his friend Colonel Pack!" 
 
 To say that Don Antonio was profoundly astonished 
 would scarcely describe all the feelings of excitement, 
 apprehension, and even alarm which instantly arose in the 
 mind of the host. But he soon recovered his self-command, 
 and courteously placed his house at the disposal of his 
 unexpected guests. 
 
 " Pray, seat yourselves at the table, gentlemen," he said. 
 
 The travellers needed no second invitation, and it was 
 soon evident that they were almost famishing. 
 
 Supper over, and the visitors having enjoyed a refreshing 
 wash, Seiior Padilla told his story, while the English 
 officers, lying back in their chairs smoking, from time to 
 time signified their approval. 
 
 "You will recollect, Don Antonio, that this gallant 
 general, by the terms of his surrender to General Liniers, 
 understood that he and his soldiers would be granted the 
 honours of war, and naturally expected that he and his 
 men would be allowed to leave the country unmolested. 
 You will also remember that the Spanish authorities, who 
 then returned to office, declared that General Liniers had 
 no power to grant such terms, and disregarded his pledge. 
 Consequently they sent the soldiers, as prisoners, to various 
 places up the country, and most of them are there still, in 
 
164 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 spite of General Liniers having promised to General White- 
 lock to set them free. General Beresford here and several 
 of his higher officers have been held as prisoners ever since 
 the first expulsion of the English, and have for the past six 
 months been confined to the miserable village of Lujan. 
 To a man of activity, bred in camps, like our gallant friend, 
 a life like this was a purgatory, and naturally he was most 
 anxious to escape from it. But how? Help came from an 
 unexpected quarter. There is a mysterious confraternity 
 whose members are to be found in every quarter of the 
 world, in spite of all opposition from Church and State — I 
 mean the Freemasons. While the English occupied Buenos 
 Ay res they held there a Lodge — the first probably ever 
 opened on South American soil — and, to their great sur- 
 prise, they found amongst the natives some 'brothers of 
 the mystic band '. My friend here, Sefior Lima, and myself 
 were of these. General Beresford was the Master of the 
 Lodge. We are bound by our oath to help all brethren in 
 distress. And so when we heard, a few days ago, that the 
 Government had decided to submit our Brother Beresford 
 to a yet more rigorous confinement by sending him to Cata- 
 marca, far into the interior, we thought it was time to act. 
 The order was given to Captain Olivarria to remove the 
 general and his fellow-prisoners to the place I have men- 
 tioned. But our friend and brother, Don Saturnio Pena, 
 who is brother-in-law to Captain Olivarria, managed to 
 secure the Government order, by a stratagem which I need 
 not disclose, and, leaving the captain asleep at his house, he 
 summoned us, and together we galloped to Lujan. Success 
 crowned our plans. The jailer handed over the prisoners, 
 and they are all now off in various parties, finding their 
 way, we hope, out of the country. We two undertook to 
 escort the general and his friend. We have had a long 
 day's ride, as you can see, coming from Lujan to this point, 
 for we have taken a circuit to evade pursuit, and there was 
 .little to be had to eat. Knowing your liberal ideas, Don 
 
A MYSTERIOUS GUEST 165 
 
 Antonio, and your sympathy with the English, which you 
 have never tried to conceal, we ventured to cast ourselves 
 on your hospitality, and, as we anticipated, you have not 
 failed us." 
 
 The effect of this recital upon Don Antonio was greater 
 than would have been expected. He appeared strangely 
 agitated. Presently he spoke with much emotion. " I 
 may now tell you, my friends, that which I have never 
 before revealed to anyone in this country, knowing the 
 prejudices which exist against secret societies. When I 
 was a young man on my European travels, I too was 
 initiated into the mysteries of Freemasonry. So therefore 
 upon me rests also the obligation o£ helping my brethren, 
 whatever nationality they may be, who appeal to my aid. 
 To-morrow I shall place you under the guidance of my 
 mayordomo, who, as he is one of my cleverest of trackers, 
 is also one of the most cunning in the art of hiding tracks 
 from pursuers." 
 
 "This is indeed fortunate!" exclaimed all the party in a 
 breath. 
 
 General Beresford proved to be a most interesting and 
 entertaining companion; how could it be otherwise in a 
 man who, from his boyhood, had led an uninterrupted 
 career of military adventure, and had risen from the rank o£ 
 a subaltern to that of general by pure merit 1 Many were 
 the tales he told of his experiences, to which his audience 
 listened spell-bound, until at last Don Antonio insisted that 
 he must take rest before the arduous journey of next day. 
 
 Early in the morning the party set out under the capable 
 guidance of Don Cayetano, and Don Antonio and Stephen 
 saw them no more. But two days later, when Don Cay- 
 etano returned, they had the satisfaction of hearing that 
 the general and his friend had been safely shipped off to the 
 care of some reliable friends in Monte Video, who would 
 manage to get them a passage to England. 
 
166 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 It may interest readers to learn that General Beresford 
 had subsequently a most brilliant career. He took posses- 
 sion of the island of Madeira on behalf of England, and, 
 later, took an active part in the famous retreat upon 
 Corunna of Sir John Moore's expedition. In the Peninsular 
 War he also took an active part. He was finally British 
 Minister in Brazil, and raised to the peerage as Viscount 
 Beresford. The English Government conferred a pension 
 of £300 a year for life upon Seiiors Padilla, Lima, and 
 Peiia, his gallant rescuers. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI 
 
 A TRIP TO PATAGONIA 
 
 FOR nearly three years Stephen continued to live at the 
 estancia El Porvenir. Don Antonio having soon dis- 
 covered the young man's industry and ability, and desirous 
 of being relieved himself from administrative work, gradu- 
 ally confided to Stephen the general management of the 
 estate, giving him in return a substantial interest in the 
 income. 
 
 The business of land-owners had greatly improved since 
 the first advent of the English at the River Plate. Spain 
 being no longer able to maintain the monopoly of trade 
 with her colonies, many foreigners entered the market, and 
 the prices of produce rapidly rose. 
 
 The increase of live stock on an estancia averaged then 
 between 30 and 40 per cent per annum, so that an estanciero 
 could sell about a fourth of his animals every year and still 
 see his herds increase. Stephen saw that as things were 
 going he would soon become comparatively rich, and he 
 frequently congratulated himself on his good luck. 
 
 His only trouble was that he could have no tidings of 
 
A TRIP TO PATAGONIA 167 
 
 his mother. He had written to her frequently, but had 
 no reply. This, he hoped, was only caused by the very 
 defective postal service existing at the time between Eng- 
 land and South America; but nevertheless it was a great 
 trial. 
 
 The two sailors seemed to be perfectly contented with 
 their new mode of life. The flock of sheep had thriven 
 amazingly, and as Don Antonio had given the men an 
 interest in the increase, they too had reason to congratulate 
 themselves on their prospects. Don Antonio also employed 
 them to attend to the cultivation of a vegetable garden 
 which he had been able to plant with seeds brought out by 
 an English captain. 
 
 It was a tranquil life which they led at El Porvenir. 
 The charming society of Don Antonio and his daughter 
 rendered enjoyable a time which to one of Stephen's tem- 
 perament might otherwise have been unbearably monoton- 
 ous. Nevertheless he sometimes felt oppressed by the 
 effect of the unvarying view of level green plain and blue 
 sky. " How can people born in such a country, and never 
 having seen anything else," he said, when talking with Don 
 Antonio one day, "ever have lofty and poetic feelings? 
 They can form no idea of the emotions caused by the sight 
 of mountain crag and stream, with the varying lights 
 playing over them. The children of this country can only 
 learn from pictures what is the appearance of a hill, a tree, 
 or a waterfall; the beauties arising from frost and the 
 white mantle of snow must ever be unknown to them." 
 
 11 Much of what you have said, I must admit to be true," 
 replied Don Antonio, "nevertheless we have our poets, 
 many of them quite uneducated men, who, like the minstrels 
 of medieval Europe, wander through the country recounting 
 events in verse and song, and are everywhere welcomed. 
 There is, after all, some field for a poetic soul in contem- 
 plating the very vastness of the view, bounded only by the 
 horizon, and in speculating upon what is beyond. Is it the 
 
168 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 «nd of the world, the wilderness, danger, death 1 ? Then how 
 magnificent the effect of the thunderstorms so frequent at 
 night on these plains — one moment the whole scene lit up 
 by a blaze of brilliance, the next, all black obscurity ! Who 
 can tell where the lightning will next strike? There is 
 poetry, too, in the bird-like freedom of the wandering 
 gaucho's life. Believe me, that there is no country without 
 some peculiar attractions and compensations." 
 
 In spite, however, of all that Don Antonio could say 
 with regard to the poetry of the pampas, Stephen at 
 times felt an almost uncontrollable longing for a change. 
 Though his duties gave him plenty of occupation, this life 
 on an estancia, in which months would sometimes pass in 
 uneventful routine, was very different from the adventurous 
 career he had anticipated when he landed in South America. 
 
 It was therefore with delight that he seized upon an 
 opportunity for a break from the routine, the idea of which 
 arose in a conversation which he had with his "patron" 
 one day when the latter had just returned from a visit to 
 Buenos Ayres. Don Antonio had been telling him how he 
 had met there the captain of a schooner who had just come 
 back from the Eio Negro in Patagonia, with a cargo of salt, 
 and of the wonderful stories he had told him about that 
 country. There was a regular trade, he said, in which 
 many such small vessels were employed, taking down goods 
 for the supply of the Indians, which they bartered for 
 skins and ostrich feathers, and also for salt, carted in 
 from the salt lakes at Salinas de las Piedras, a few miles 
 to the north of the river. Sometimes the ships had to 
 wait a few weeks for their cargoes to be collected, and then 
 the captain had an opportunity of going up the country 
 amongst the friendly Indians and joining with them in 
 their hunts. "By all accounts," said Don Antonio, "Pata- 
 gonia is a very different sort of place from this, and the 
 Indians there appear to be a much superior race to those 
 we encounter on our pampas. The captain tells me that 
 
A TRIP TO PATAGONIA 169 
 
 the men average considerably over six feet in height, and 
 that they are finely proportioned, and, dressed as they are 
 in flowing robes of skin, they look quite majestic. It was 
 the discovery of some tracks of footprints of gigantic size 
 by the explorer Magallanes and his men, as you may have 
 heard," continued Don Antonio, " which led to their giving 
 the country its name Patagonia, that is, 'the land of big 
 feet'. Afterwards they saw that the great size of the 
 impressions was caused by the custom of these aborigines 
 of swathing their feet in skins to resist the cold of their 
 rigorous climate. The style of dress adopted by the natives 
 appeared to add to their stature, and when the Spaniards 
 first met them they formed an exaggerated idea in this 
 respect, so that the first report they brought was that they 
 stood between seven and eight feet high. However, though 
 they are now known not to be quite so tall, they are a 
 splendid race physically. 
 
 "The captain told me some very extraordinary tales 
 with regard to his adventures in hunting the ostrich, the 
 puma, and the guanaco." 
 
 "What kind of an animal is that?" asked Stephen. 
 
 "It is a curious -looking creature, peculiar to South 
 America," replied Don Antonio, "a variety of the llama, 
 which, as you know, was the only beast of burden known 
 to the aborigines of Peru prior to the arrival of the 
 Spaniards; but the guanaco has always been a wild animal, 
 bigger and of a redder colour than the llama. Someone 
 has pithily described it as having ' the neck of a camel, feet 
 of a deer, wool of a sheep, neigh of a horse, and the swift- 
 ness of the fiend'. Hunting them is grand sport, as you will 
 readily believe." 
 
 Coming just when Stephen was in the frame of mind 
 described above, this conversation had a very exciting effect 
 upon him, and he eagerly asked Don Antonio whether it 
 would not be possible to accompany the captain on his 
 return voyage. 
 
170 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Don Antonio, with his usual good-nature, acceded sym- 
 pathetically to Stephen's desires, and immediately wrote to 
 his friend the captain on the subject. In a few days it was 
 all arranged, and Stephen joyously set out for Buenos 
 Ayres for this longed-for holiday. 
 
 A voyage of eight days, with somewhat rough weather, 
 but otherwise uneventful, brought the schooner to the 
 mouth of the Eio Negro. The appearance of the land was 
 most uninviting. To the south was a long line of cliffs, 
 perpendicular, but of no great height; the north bank was 
 so low that it did not come into view for some time after 
 the other was sighted. Eighteen miles up the river is 
 situated the settlement of Carmen de Patagones, which they 
 found to be a miserable group of straw " ranchos ", scarcely 
 worthy of the name of a village. This settlement had been 
 founded about twenty -five years previously, and its sole 
 object was to provide accommodation for the people engaged 
 in collecting salt from the brine lakes. The country around, 
 as far as the eye could see, was nothing but an undulating 
 pebbly desert, with not a trace of vegetation, except here 
 and there some isolated clumps of scrub. Monotonous as 
 Stephen had found the pampas, they now appeared like a 
 paradise compared to this. 
 
 There were several schooners at anchor in the river when 
 they arrived in front of the village, and the captain told 
 Stephen that evidently they would have to wait some 
 weeks for their cargo, so deficient were the people in appli- 
 ances for collecting and loading the salt. 
 
 Next day Stephen, having borrowed a horse, went for a 
 trip to inspect these wonderful lakes, which lie about fifteen 
 miles from the town. 
 
 They are a series of shallow pools of considerable area, 
 some of them as much as four miles in length by two or 
 three miles in breadth, the bottoms of which are composed 
 of pure salt, varying in thickness from a few inches to 
 several feet. In summer, when the gathering takes place, 
 
A TRIP TO PATAGONIA 171 
 
 they are quite dried up, and the bed looks as if covered 
 with glistening snow, presenting a wonderful contrast to 
 the brown and desolate plain which surrounds them. 
 
 A pleasing variation in the colouring was, however, given 
 by the beautiful crimson and black plumage of numerous 
 groups of flamingoes which frequented the mud-banks on 
 the margins of the lake. 
 
 In the centre of the lake beds many men were at work 
 digging out the salt, and numerous bullock-carts were bring- 
 ing it to the margin, where it was piled up in great heaps. 
 It was thirsty work this under the burning sun, but not a 
 drop of water was to be had except that brought in barrels 
 from the town. Stephen wondered that people could be 
 found to adopt such a mode of life when so much pleasanter 
 a living could be easily earned tending cattle on the plains. 
 
 It was for sport, however, more than for exploration that 
 Stephen had come to Patagonia, and he was anxious to 
 begin. So the very next day he took his gun, and, accom- 
 panied by a native of the place, sallied forth in search of 
 the famous guanaco, herds of which he was told he would 
 find at no great distance from the town. He felt almost 
 incredulous as to this, however, as he rode over the first few 
 miles. Everywhere was the same scenery, only shingly 
 plains and sparse scrub, not a drop of water to be seen. 
 How could large animals like guanacos ever find subsistence 
 upon such arid land? His reflections were suddenly inter- 
 rupted by a cry from his companion. "Look, seilor, there 
 they are!" 
 
 Following the direction in which his guide was pointing, 
 Stephen quickly discerned a flock of large animals browsing 
 upon the scrub some hundreds of yards off". They were 
 considerably bigger than deer, of a light-fawn colour on the 
 back, with gray ears and white bellies, but quite different in 
 appearance from any animal he had ever seen before, being 
 remarkable for their long necks and the erect manner in 
 which they carried their heads. 
 
172 IN THE DICTATOR'S C4RIP 
 
 Apparently the animals took no notice of them as they 
 approached, and Stephen was almost disappointed to see 
 that they would probably be too easy a quarry and give but 
 little excitement to a hunter. 
 
 Just, however, as he and his companion had got within 
 so short a distance of the herd that Stephen thought he 
 might almost try a shot, and unslung his gun to make 
 ready, the nearest animal uttered a sharp cry, quite like the 
 neigh of a horse, and off the whole pack scampered at a 
 lumbering gallop, apparently slowly, but in reality at a very 
 swift pace, as they soon found out, for they were rapidly 
 left behind, though following at the top-speed of their 
 horses. Stephen was profoundly disappointed at the failure 
 of his first attempt. 
 
 "Never mind," said the guide, "there are plenty about 
 here; we shall soon come across another lot." 
 
 Sure enough, when they had ridden about half an hour 
 in another direction they again spied a herd browsing, like 
 the others, on the scrub. 
 
 "Now," thought Stephen, "I shall try another plan." 
 So, leaping from his horse and throwing the bridle to his 
 attendant, he began to stalk the game in the approved 
 manner he had heard was used by sportsmen after deer. 
 Again he had got almost within gunshot of the herd when 
 the sharp neigh was heard, and off they scampered like the 
 wind. "How tiresome!" cried Stephen to his guide, who 
 had by this time rejoined him. "At this rate we shall 
 never get on at all." 
 
 "Sefior," said his companion deferentially, "I see that 
 you are a new hand at this game. Will you permit me. I 
 will show you how it is managed." And as they came in 
 sight of another flock he dismounted, took the gun from 
 Stephen, and gave the horses into his keeping. 
 
 Now came a curious episode. The guide advanced 
 towards the game, but instead of taking cover or crawling 
 as Stephen had done, he began dancing about as he 
 
A TRIP TO PATAGONIA 173 
 
 approached them, waving his poncho, and finally lay down 
 on his back and began kicking his legs into the air, all the 
 time singing some country song in a rude voice, which 
 seemed little more than discordant shouting. 
 
 To Stephen's surprise, the guanacos, instead of scampering 
 away as before, pricked up their ears and all began looking 
 keenly at the man. Apparently they could not make out 
 what this extraordinary object was, and gradually, their 
 curiosity overmastering fear, they crept nearer and nearer, 
 to find out what it could be, until they were almost within 
 twenty yards of the prostrate man, who kept on kicking his 
 legs about more rapidly than ever. Then like a flash the 
 guide sprang to his feet and fired both barrels into the herd, 
 bringing down two fine animals. "That is how we get 
 them," he cried triumphantly. 
 
 Stephen was not slow to follow his guide's methods, so 
 that in the course of the day he managed to shoot far more 
 game than he could possibly carry home. The guanaco, he 
 found, now that he had time to examine them, were heavy 
 beasts, about five or six feet in length, and standing about 
 four feet high at the shoulder, bearing a curious resemblance 
 to a camel, but without a hump. The guide told Stephen 
 that their flesh was good to eat, especially the head, which 
 was usually the only part taken by hunters when game was 
 plentiful. 
 
 It was curious to see that as soon as a guanaco fell 
 there would sweep down a bevy of carrion-feeding birds, 
 which seemed to come into existence, as if by magic, 
 out of a cloudless sky, where previously not a speck was 
 visible. Generally these were like big crows, "corranchos" 
 the guide called them, or buzzards about the size of a 
 turkey; but sometimes great condors would appear, and 
 then the smaller birds would retire to a respectful distance. 
 These immense vultures are remarkable for their great 
 spread of wing, from eight to ten feet from tip to tip, and 
 for their wonderfully graceful flight, for they never seem to 
 
174 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 move a pinion, but skim through the air by merely varying 
 the direction of their body. Round their neck there is a 
 ruff of white downy feathers, and but for their bare scaly 
 heads they would be beautiful creatures. 
 
 As they continued their ride over the plains Stephen was 
 surprised to see the amount of animal life which frequented 
 them in spite of their barrenness, and, above all, the com- 
 plete absence of water. Once they saw a hare in full night 
 pursued by a gray fox, whilst near a heap of stones were a 
 group of armadillos ambling along with their curious gait. 
 
 A number of black birds of prey, apparently hovering 
 over a carcass, attracted their attention, and upon riding up 
 to the spot they found the body of a guanaco on the ground. 
 Dismounting, Stephen discovered that its neck was broken, 
 and from a gash just over the shoulders the blood was still 
 flowing. 
 
 " The work of a puma, sefior," said the guide in reply to 
 Stephen's enquiring look. 
 
 This was welcome information, for now, thought Stephen, 
 a chance had come of seeing, and perhaps slaying, the South 
 American lion of which he had often heard. He at once 
 looked for its tracks, which were quite visible, and proposed 
 to go in pursuit. 
 
 " No use without dogs," said the guide laconically; and as 
 night was now drawing nigh they had to ride homewards 
 without delay. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII 
 
 AMONGST THE TEHUELCHE INDIANS 
 
 FOR several days Stephen pursued this style of hunting, 
 with plenty of success as regarded the shooting of 
 guanacos, though he never had the luck to come across a 
 puma, but he soon became tired of a sport which seemed 
 
AMONGST THE TEHUELCHE INDIANS 175 
 
 a mere wanton destruction of life. When, therefore, the 
 captain of the schooner asked him to join him in an expe- 
 dition he was about to make for the purpose of trading 
 with some Tehuelche Indians who had encamped in the 
 neighbourhood, he readily agreed. The trading party, 
 consisting of the captain, Stephen, a guide, and several 
 men driving pack-horses laden with the merchandise, 
 started early next morning. 
 
 There is something exceedingly exhilarating in the Pata- 
 gonian air, and in spite of the depressing nature of the 
 surroundings — everywhere the same shingly desert with 
 sparse stunted vegetation — Stephen's spirits rose with a 
 bound as they galloped along at full speed. He felt a 
 complete sense of freedom and an emancipation from all 
 the restraints of civilization. 
 
 In such a mood he could not be content to remain merely 
 following in the wake of the party, so he gave his horse 
 free rein and rode about to one side or another in excited, 
 but unavailing pursuit of every herd of guanacos which 
 came in view. 
 
 He had rushed off upon one of these playful excursions 
 rather farther than before, and when, as was usual, the 
 herd of guanacos he was making for had scampered off he 
 turned to rejoin the party; to his amazement he found that 
 it had disappeared, as if swallowed up by Mother Earth, and 
 that he was apparently alone in the midst of the boundless 
 plain. 
 
 Utterly bewildered, he rapidly continued his ride in the 
 direction from which he fancied he had come, when sud- 
 denly his horse snorted and stopped with all four feet 
 planted together, and Stephen was startled to find that 
 he had drawn up upon the brink of a precipice. About 
 a hundred feet below there flowed, over a wide, shingly, 
 and level bottom, a river, even at this season of consider- 
 able breadth, but which, according to unmistakable in- 
 dications, must have been many times as wide when the 
 
176 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 water from the melting snows of the far-off Andes came 
 rushing down. The valley was covered with luxurious 
 pasture, and Stephen could see that his companions had 
 halted on it for their mid-day rest to give their horses an 
 opportunity to feed. It seemed to him remarkable that 
 until he was upon the actual edge of the ravine he did 
 not even suspect its existence. A few yards back and the 
 landscape seemed but an uninterrupted plain. This, how- 
 ever, would be the experience of anyone, in similar circum- 
 stances, who was unacquainted with the peculiar features 
 of the country. 
 
 By cautiously proceeding along the brink Stephen at 
 last came upon the zigzag path down the steep slope by 
 which his companions had descended. By the time he had 
 reached their camp his appetite had sharpened to such a 
 pitch that he was glad to partake of a portion of a guana co, 
 which he learned one of the men had captured by a cast 
 of the "bolas", and which was now roasting before their 
 fire. 
 
 In a couple of hours they were again on the move, cross- 
 ing the rapid but shallow stream and scrambling up the 
 opposite side of the ravine, arriving once more upon the 
 apparently interminable plain. 
 
 For several leagues they pushed on monotonously, 
 Stephen now keeping more closely to the rest, and at 
 last arrived at the brink of another ravine, and saw in 
 the valley below the Indian camp of which they were in 
 search. 
 
 There were a large number of tents, pitched at the base 
 of the slope, evidently covered with guanaco skins sewn 
 together, rectangular in form, with sloping roofs, and sides 
 nearly vertical. In front of each a fire was burning, round 
 which several figures were reclining, while on the outskirts 
 of the camp numerous horses were feeding. 
 
 The party paused but a few seconds and then began the 
 descent. As they neared the tents they were received by 
 
AMONGST THE TEHUELCHE INDIANS 177 
 
 the discordant yelps and barks of a host of wild-looking 
 dogs of fierce aspect, which were soon, however, driven 
 away by the whips of a group of Indians who advanced 
 to meet the strangers. 
 
 Stephen saw that the stories he had heard with regard 
 to the appearance of these aborigines were not altogether 
 fanciful. 
 
 The "cacique", or chief, was a fine-looking man, over six 
 feet in stature and of massive build. He was dressed, like 
 all the others, in a chiripa made of guanaco skins, worn 
 with the fur side inwards and painted in a symmetrical 
 pattern in red and blue on the outer side. Over his 
 shoulders hung a robe, also of guanaco skins, fur side in- 
 wards. His long black hair was bound with a thong round 
 his brow. The colour of these Indians was a light copper 
 hue, but their faces were painted in brown patches with 
 white stripes. Their foreheads were somewhat low, but 
 not receding, their carriage graceful, and their general 
 appearance pleasing. 
 
 It was not the first time by many that the guide and the 
 captain had visited these people, and they were received as 
 old friends. They and their party were led to the centre of 
 the camp, and it was intimated to them through the guide, 
 who acted as interpreter, that a special tent and fire had 
 been put at their disposal. Their visit had not been un- 
 expected, and plenty of ostrich meat was roasting in front 
 of the fire for their supper, giving forth appetizing odours. 
 The visitors were only too glad to fall to at once, nor would 
 the meal have been despicable had they been less hungry, 
 for the ostrich flesh tasted like turkey; while as a second 
 course they had the gizzards cooked Indian fashion by 
 filling them with hot stones; and finally, as dessert, ostrich 
 eggs roasted in the embers were presented, making alto- 
 gether a very luxurious repast, though served in the midst 
 of a desert. 
 
 While partaking of their supper they were surrounded 
 
 (M806) M 
 
178 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 by Indians who watched them curiously, and who were not 
 less curiously watched by Stephen, as this was his first 
 experience amongst the aborigines of South America. He 
 noticed that the men were all exceedingly well propor- 
 tioned and remarkable for the great development of their 
 arms and shoulders. Their legs were rather short and 
 thick, and frequently bowed, which he concluded was on 
 account of their spending most of their lives on horse- 
 back. 
 
 The dress of the women consisted of a long tunic of 
 calico generally adorned with beads at the neck, and they 
 wore belts embroidered with beads and coloured threads; 
 over all was thrown a guanaco robe or " capa " like those 
 worn by the men. Some of the younger women were 
 quite pretty, but the old ones looked hideous. These 
 people were not at all stolid and silent in their behaviour, 
 as Stephen had been led to believe was usual amongst 
 Indians; but, on the contrary, they kept up a constant 
 chatter, and frequently broke into ripples of laughter, 
 which Stephen fancied, from the glances which were ex- 
 changed amongst them, arose from remarks which were 
 being made upon the appearance of the visitors. 
 
 Presently, as the party lay back resting and smoking, 
 the surrounding Indians approached them with outstretched 
 hands, and the strangers had no difficulty in understanding 
 that they were begging. The object of the men's request 
 was tobacco, and of the women's sugar; and the guide, know- 
 ing their ways, had brought a sufficient supply to give as 
 presents and put them in a good humour. Their wants 
 being satisfied, their hosts now clustered round, eagerly ask- 
 ing them questions like inquisitive children. Most of these, 
 being in their own language, could only be understood 
 by the aid of the interpreter, but some spoke a little 
 Spanish. One of these, a fine, tall young fellow, took his 
 seat close to Stephen, and after looking at him for a minute, 
 said in Spanish: 
 
AMONGST THE TEHUELCHE INDIANS 179 
 
 " Are you not English ? " 
 
 " Yes," replied Stephen, also in Spanish, wondering where 
 a Patagonian Indian could have heard of his nation, when 
 at once his interlocutor exclaimed in English : 
 
 "Hullo, shipmate! Won't you give me a plug of to- 
 bacco?" 
 
 "What! you speak English!" cried Stephen, profoundly 
 surprised at hearing his mother tongue in so unexpected a 
 quarter. 
 
 " What ! you speak English ! " retorted the Tehuelche. 
 
 "Of course I speak English," replied Stephen; "but 
 where did you learn?" 
 
 " Of course I speak English," repeated the Indian, where- 
 upon the whole of the company burst into a roar of laughter 
 upon observing the air of bewildered amazement depicted 
 on Stephen's face. 
 
 The guide now explained that these people have a 
 wonderful faculty of imitating any sounds they hear, for 
 the most part parrot -like, without understanding the 
 meaning. By interrogating this particular Indian, how- 
 ever, he found that when a boy he had once been on 
 board an English vessel for a few weeks in the Straits 
 of Magellan, but the words he had uttered formed almost 
 his whole stock in that language, and had been fixed in his 
 memory by the circumstance that they had generally brought 
 him what he most wanted, tobacco; the other phrases had 
 been merely his repetition of Stephen's own words. 
 
 This circumstance gave rise to a great deal of amusement 
 during the evening, as others of the party would speak to 
 the Indians in Spanish and even in French, with which the 
 captain had some acquaintance, and in each instance the 
 words would be repeated by some Indian just like an echo. 
 But the strangers were quite unable to pronounce the 
 numerous phrases addressed to them in return by the 
 Tehuelches, and their futile attempts caused much merri- 
 ment. 
 
180 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 At last, however, all were so fatigued that they decided 
 to retire for the night. They found on the floor of the tent 
 assigned to them an ample supply of guanaco robes for 
 bedding and coverlets. Following the example of his com- 
 panions, Stephen made a comfortable mattress and pillow 
 from his saddle and was soon fast asleep. 
 
 Next morning they were awakened at dawn by the sound 
 of joyous cries and laughter, and upon going to the door of 
 their tent they saw the whole of the Indians disporting 
 themselves in the river, although the air had a sharp, frosty 
 feeling which would have made less hardy folk shrink 
 from such a cold bath. The guide explained that the Pata- 
 gonians are remarkable for their cleanly habits, and always 
 bathe at least once a day when they can manage it. 
 
 The whole of the day was occupied in trading, the 
 Indians bartering bunches of ostrich feathers, ostrich and 
 guanaco robes, lassoes and bridles beautifully plaited from 
 the sinews of the guanaco or ostrich, against the knives, 
 tobacco, sugar, mate, and other articles brought by the 
 visitors. After a while Stephen became tired of watching 
 the transactions, in which he had no interest, and wandered 
 through the camp to observe the manners and customs of 
 the Indians. He found the women busily at work, some with 
 their domestic employments of cooking or cleaning out the 
 tents, others dressing ostrich and guanaco skins, or sewing 
 them together to form robes. He was surprised to see how 
 neatly this was done, especially as their needles were only 
 pointed bone, and their thread but sinews. The colouring 
 of the skin side of the robes and the drawing of the pat- 
 terns on them were being done by another group, with only 
 natural earths and fat as paint. What men there were 
 about, not engaged in trading, were squatting, lazily smok- 
 ing, or, if doing anything, leisurely knocking stones from 
 the river against each other to round them sufficiently to 
 serve as "bolas". The little boys showed more activity, 
 being busily employed in practising the throwing of 
 
AMONGST THE TEHUELCHE INDIANS 181 
 
 miniature lassoes and " bolas " at the numerous dogs which 
 prowled about. 
 
 While engaged in watching the cleverness of the little 
 fellows, Stephen was accosted by a man, dressed like the 
 gauchos of the pampas, whom he had not noticed the night 
 before. He soon learned that the man was a native of Buenos 
 Ayres, and a deserter from a regiment of the Spanish army 
 stationed on the Indian frontier. He had not dared to 
 make his appearance until he learned that there were no 
 Spanish officials amongst the visitors. His name, he said, 
 was Eleutorio Gomez. Since leaving the army he had been 
 leading a wandering life on the plains as an ostrich-hunter, 
 and he had gradually worked his way to this remote 
 southern point, his safety lying, he considered, in keeping 
 as far as possible from the Spanish settlements. 
 
 From Gomez, Stephen learned much about the territory 
 and the various tribes of Indians who lived on it. They 
 could hardly be said to dwell there, for they were continu- 
 ally wandering about, being obliged to follow the game. 
 " No doubt," said Gomez, " you, like the Spaniards who have 
 come to Patagonia, and who never get far from the coast, 
 have formed an idea that the country is nothing but a stony 
 desert; but I can tell you that you are greatly mistaken. 
 Away back over there," pointing to the west as he spoke, 
 "at the foot of the Andes, it is really a paradise, a land 
 covered with luxuriant pasture and abounding with lovely 
 lakes. How else could you account for the vast quantities 
 of game you meet 1 How could they breed and subsist if it 
 were not that the animals were always within easy range of 
 food and water? But the Indians take good care not to 
 tell the Spaniards of this splendid country, as they know 
 very well that if the white men heard of it they would soon 
 drive them away. 
 
 " I often wonder," continued Gomez, who appeared to 
 be an observant and intelligent man, " what sort of a place 
 this must have been in the old days, for almost everywhere 
 
182 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 one comes upon skeletons of what must have been gigantic 
 beasts, thigh-bones three or four inches thick, and skulls 
 about a yard long, some with great teeth still stuck in 
 them. The Indian traditions speak of them as ' tree-eaters', 
 but there are no large trees to be seen now." 
 
 Gomez went on to tell Stephen of a curious place he had 
 come across in his wanderings, a little plain almost com- 
 pletely covered with the dried -up skeletons of guanacos, and 
 said that the Indians assured him that it was the "panteon" 
 or cemetery of these animals, and that whenever a guanaco 
 felt himself to be nearing his end he would travel for leagues 
 in order to die there; and it looked as if they were correct 
 in their explanations. 
 
 Stephen eagerly asked him about the puma, the so-called 
 "lion" of South America, 
 
 "Bah!" said Gomez, "he is a cur, an utter coward in 
 spite of his fierce appearance; no Indian fears him a jot, as 
 you will soon see for yourself, for I hear that there is going 
 to be a great hunt to-morrow, and it is almost certain we 
 shall come across some of these beasts." 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII 
 
 A HUNT WITH THE INDIANS 
 
 QTEPHEN could hardly sleep that night, so greatly was 
 kJ he excited by the news of the coming hunt. At 
 length he was to witness a scene such as he, like almost 
 every boy, had dreamt of, the pursuit of game in native 
 Indian fashion. He had just dozed off at last when the 
 summons came for the party to get ready to start. The sun 
 was not yet up, but the guide told them that they would 
 have a long way to travel before reaching the place where 
 the hunt was to be, so that it was necessary to start early. 
 
A HUNT WITH THE INDIANS 183 
 
 The camp was now a scene of bustle, the activity of the 
 male Indians contrasting strongly with the indolence they had 
 displayed on the previous day. Soon all the hunting-party 
 was mounted, had forded the river, and was scrambling up 
 the opposite bank of the ravine. Upon reaching the table- 
 land, Stephen found it to be identical in character with 
 that which he had traversed with his party on their way to 
 the Indian camp two days before, but as they galloped on 
 at a rapid pace its nature began to change, and soon clumps 
 of pampa-grass appeared here and there, gradually growing 
 closer together as they advanced ■ and when they had covered 
 a few leagues the country had become almost attractive in 
 appearance, and quite fitted, Stephen thought, to support a 
 few rough cattle. 
 
 At length they came upon a small, shallow lake, which 
 had evidently been their goal, for here the Indians drew 
 rein and dismounted without waiting for orders. The mid- 
 day meal was then taken, consisting of roasted and sun-dried 
 meat brought in the saddle-bags. After about an hour's 
 halt, Stephen observed that the chief gave a signal, where- 
 upon small parties of men mounted and rode off to the 
 right and left. 
 
 In a few minutes other groups started off, also in each 
 direction, and this went on until about two-thirds of the 
 party had ridden away. Stephen now began to understand 
 their manoeuvres. The riders had gone in order to form a 
 large circle, embracing an area of the plain some leagues in 
 extent. Presently those left at the base began to open out 
 their ranks and deployed in a long line. In this order they 
 stood still, evidently waiting for instructions. How the 
 chief had seen the signal from the outposts who formed the 
 other side of the ring Stephen could not tell, but he knew 
 the Indians to be remarkable for their keen sight, and it 
 was obvious that the leader had observed something, for 
 he gave the order to advance. At once the whole line was 
 off at full gallop, and in a very short time Stephen could 
 
184 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 perceive, away off in the distance, herds of guanaco and 
 ostriches rushing hither and thither in alarm. Gradually, 
 as the circle closed, the outside riders came into view, and 
 flying before them were the herds of frightened game, 
 rapidly concentrating into a panic-stricken crowd. At a 
 signal from the leader every man began swinging the 
 " bolas ", of which each carried several sets at his saddle- 
 bow, and with a yell rushed towards the game. Soon as 
 many animals were lying struggling on the ground as there 
 were sets of bolas to throw, for the Indians appeared never 
 to make a miss, and entangled with certainty the legs of 
 the flying ostrich or guanaco as they rushed past. The 
 remainder of the herds rapidly fled out of sight. 
 
 Then the Indians jumped off their horses, which are 
 trained to stand where left, and set to work killing the 
 animals by cutting their throats as they lay, and in an 
 incredibly short time they had them skinned and cut up, 
 the old and lean beasts and birds being left to the vultures 
 which swooped down in black clouds from all quarters. 
 
 Stephen's attention was just then attracted to a pack of 
 dogs which were barking furiously, apparently at something 
 concealed in a clump of bushes. "Ah!" thought he, "it 
 may be a puma, as Gomez said last night." Sure enough, 
 when he approached the spot he was able to distinguish the 
 form of an animal. It looked like a large heavily-built 
 mastiff, with a head resembling that of a lioness. In colour 
 it was a tawny yellow. Its eyes were glaring with demo- 
 niacal fury, and at times it rose up and clawed the air with 
 formidable paws, spitting and yelling like a huge cat. 
 
 But for the character which Gomez had given it, Stephen 
 would have expected it at any moment to spring upon its 
 canine tormentors and tear them to pieces, or even upon 
 some of the horsemen who were now rapidly coming up to 
 the spot. Amongst the first of those was the ostrich-hunter, 
 and Stephen was surprised to see that he did not even take 
 the trouble to throw the bolas, but, coolly riding up to 
 
A HUNT WITH THE INDIANS 185 
 
 within a few feet of the apparently infuriated beast, he 
 brought down one of the heavy balls upon its head, without 
 even letting go the thong, and dashed out its brains. Imme- 
 diately he jumped from his horse, and having driven off the 
 dogs with his heavy "revenque" (riding-whip), he set to 
 work to skin it and cut it up. The flesh, he said, being very 
 fat, was much prized as a change from the lean ostrich and 
 guanaco meat. 
 
 As it was too late to return to the camp that night, the 
 Indians began making preparations to bivouac on the plain 
 near the lake. Fires of brushwood were soon blazing, in 
 front of which plenty of meat was roasting, and the supper 
 eaten by the hunters was a perfectly gluttonous feast, such 
 as is enjoyed by people who have frequently to undergo 
 periods of famine. 
 
 It was the first night which Stephen had ever spent under 
 the open sky, but the fatigues of the day and the freshness 
 of the air soon sent him off into a sound sleep. Towards 
 morning, however, his slumbers were disturbed by dreams, 
 which gradually took the form of a nightmare, a feeling 
 as of a heavy weight pressing on his chest. At last he 
 awoke with a struggle, and it took him some little time to 
 realize that during the night snow had fallen to such an 
 extent as to cover him with a layer of about three inches 
 thick. The sun was just rising, and he saw that the snow- 
 storm had ceased. His companions seemed to have dis- 
 appeared, and only a few white mounds indicated their pre- 
 sence. In a few minutes they rose up like ghosts, shaking 
 the snow from their flowing robes. 
 
 Over the glittering plain the hunting-party rode back to 
 the camp, where their safe arrival with ample provisions was 
 welcomed by the women with joj^ous cries. 
 
186 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 EXIT THE POWER OF SPAIN 
 
 ONE result of Stephen's trip was to make him more 
 contented with his life on the estancia. When he 
 contrasted the smiling verdure of the pampas, flat as they 
 were, with the arid deserts of Patagonia, and its rigorous 
 climate with that which they enjoyed in the settlements 
 of La Plata, he felt that life at El Porvenir had many 
 charms after all. 
 
 Now that his hunting instinct had been aroused, Stephen 
 found that there was plenty of scope for it even upon the 
 pampas. Wherever there was a water-course or lagoon — 
 and Don Cayetano guided him to many of them — there 
 were abundance of wild duck and other fowl, and even storks 
 and flamingoes, which provided ample sport. Upon the 
 plains themselves there were always numerous coveys of 
 partridges and the horned plover, styled by the natives 
 1 ' tiro-tiro " from its cry. Of animals there were the biscachos, 
 which looked like a cross between the hare and the rabbit. 
 They honeycombed the plain with their burrows in every 
 direction, to the danger of horsemen, as the feet of the 
 horses frequently broke through this crust of excavated 
 soil, causing them to stumble and throw their riders. These 
 animals are, however, scarcely worth powder and shot, both 
 their skins and their flesh being useless, and they are only 
 chased as vermin. However, these little sporting excursions 
 helped to break the monotony of their life, and Stephen 
 and his friends had every reason to be contented. 
 
 From time to time news reached them with regard to the 
 progress of events in the country. The invasion of Buenos 
 Ayres by the English seemed to have had the effect of 
 awakening the spirit of the people and of teaching them 
 their capabilities. As the impotence of Spain became daily 
 
EXIT THE POWER OF SPAIN 187 
 
 more evident, so in proportion the desire of the colonists to 
 cast off her yoke was strengthened. But the malcontents 
 were not unanimous with regard to the course to be adopted. 
 They were divided into two great parties — one in favour 
 of only securing local autonomy without severing their 
 allegiance to the Spanish Crown; the other, styled "the 
 American ", would be satisfied with nothing but complete 
 independence. The most prominent man in the first party 
 was General Liniers, who had shown such ability and zeal 
 in repelling the English. With him were associated the old 
 Spanish families. On the other side were ranged all those 
 of colonial birth, in number much stronger, but in influence 
 greatly weaker, for no colonist, under the Spanish regime, 
 was ever appointed to an office of authority in the civil 
 government. 
 
 It was not altogether the same in military service. Many 
 of the officers, and even some of the commanders of the 
 troops, were natives, and the rank and file was largely 
 recruited from the Creole population, which at that time 
 actually outnumbered the old Spaniards in the ratio of 
 about twenty to one. 
 
 As disaffection spread, the "American" party quickly 
 realized how helpless were their former rulers. They 
 resolved that the existing position of affairs should not 
 continue, and took their measures accordingly. On the 
 morning of the 25th May, 1810 — a memorable date in South 
 American history, — Colonel Cornelio Saavedra, commander 
 of the best regiment in Buenos Ayres, waited upon his 
 excellency, Don Hidalgo Cisneros, the Spanish Viceroy, 
 and civilly informed him that the authority of Spain was 
 at an end. As all the military commanders had already 
 been won over by Colonel Saavedra and had agreed to act 
 with him, the viceroy had no option but to surrender as 
 gracefully as he could. He was made to sign a paper 
 transferring his authority to a junta, or committee of 
 citizens, and the act appeared complete. 
 
188 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Soon afterwards the fallen viceroy and his staff were 
 despatched in a small vessel to the Canary Islands on their 
 way to Spain. 
 
 The change of dynasty was not, however, accomplished 
 without bloodshed. The gallant General Liniers (who, 
 though a Frenchman, felt bound in honour to support the 
 cause of the government whose service he had entered) 
 raised a small body of troops, sympathizers with Spain, 
 at Cordoba, a city in the interior, to which he had repaired. 
 
 With these he marched towards Buenos Ay res, but was 
 met by the colonial forces, completely defeated, and taken 
 prisoner. Within a few hours he and his principal officers 
 were tried by court-martial, condemned as rebels, and 
 shot upon the field. Much regret was felt throughout the 
 country at this sad ending of a brave and noble man. 
 
 It soon appeared, as Senor Eodriguez had foreseen, that 
 the colonists were unable to make a proper use of their 
 newly -acquired freedom. Utterly inexperienced in the 
 art of government, they spent many months in debating 
 the form of administration under which the country should 
 now be placed — whether a Unitarian republic, with all 
 authority centred in one congress and executive, with 
 delegates in the provinces; or a Federation, with each state 
 autonomous, and sending representatives to the national 
 government. 
 
 Upon these questions, and others of a more theoretical 
 nature, the whole attention of the new rulers was concen- 
 trated, to the neglect of others of more immediate practical 
 importance. 1 
 
 Few, however, but the people of Buenos Ayres took any 
 interest in such subjects. As Don Antonio had predicted, 
 the country people were entirely absorbed in their own 
 immediate concerns, and too ignorant to understand the 
 
 i It seems almost incredible that the final settlement of the constitution of the 
 republic in its present condition as a confederation was not accomplished for 
 more than forty years later, and that it was this question which gave rise to 
 most of the civil wars and anarchy which devastated the country. 
 
EXIT THE POWER OF SPAIN 189 
 
 process of building up a new nation. Freed from the visits 
 of the Spanish tax-gatherer, they now appeared to believe 
 that they could henceforth live without paying any con- 
 tributions to the Government, and strongly resisted any 
 attempt to collect such levies. They threw all the blame 
 for their demand upon the people of the towns, against 
 whom arose an almost universal odium in the country. 
 Some of the caudillos, or country chiefs, did not even go 
 so far as to reason upon governmental questions at all, 
 but simply saw in the new state of affairs an opportunity 
 to indulge their predatory instincts. With their own 
 people, and bands of outlaws who soon joined them, they 
 roamed the country in search of plunder. The principal 
 booty which excited their covetousness was cattle and 
 horses, especially the latter, for, as it was customary in 
 such bands for every man to have at least three horses, to 
 ensure mobility by remounts, the demand for these animals 
 became enormous. 
 
 After a time these robbers grew to be so audacious as to 
 raid estates in broad daylight and to attack any owners 
 who ventured to defend their property. It was after 
 several visits from such bandits to his estancia that Don 
 Antonio announced to Stephen that he had resolved to 
 leave El Porvenir and reside at his estate in Paraguay, 
 where he believed he and his daughter would be safe, for 
 a time at least, from the dangers which now menaced the 
 inhabitants of the other provinces. 
 
 "I have before told you," said he to Stephen, "that the 
 country is an Eden, and that the people are of a gentler 
 race than those down here. You, my friend, and your two 
 countrymen, are of course at liberty to remain here to look 
 after your interests, but for the sake of Pepita I must leave 
 all mine to take their chance and go." 
 
 Stephen did not hesitate to assure him that he too would 
 go to Paraguay. 
 
 The thought of being separated from Pepita, whom he 
 
190 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 had come to love more day by day, though he had never 
 dared to utter a declaration of his feelings, was unbearable, 
 whilst the prospect of travelling in a new country was to 
 one of his temperament far more attractive than that of 
 stagnating on the everlasting plains, even though he knew 
 that his means were thereby being increased. 
 
 As for the two sailors, they were not the sort of men 
 to let mere accumulation of property stand in the way of 
 change and adventure. Their desertion from the ship and 
 abandonment of their profits had already proved that. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX 
 
 ON THE ROAD TO PARAGUAY 
 
 THERE were two modes of travelling then in vogue in 
 those countries for such long journeys as that now 
 contemplated by Don Antonio and his party. One was 
 to keep to the main roads, along which post-houses were 
 established at regular intervals, where fresh horses could 
 always be obtained; the other was for the party to take 
 with them a tropilla, or troop of horses, for remounts when 
 those which they rode became tired. 
 
 Serior Rodriguez chose the latter, the usual one adopted 
 by people of his class, as it left them free to take any route 
 they chose. He owned plenty of horses, some of which 
 had been specially trained to run in tropillas. 
 
 These little troops are always led by a mare, which 
 carries a bell hung from her neck, and the horses, if well 
 trained, will never leave her side. It is a beautiful sight 
 to watch the horses and their leader. They vie with each 
 other in getting near enough to fondle her, placing their 
 necks over her back. When a halt has to be made, all 
 ihat has to be done is to manacle the mare, so that she can 
 
ON THE ROAD TO PARAGUAY 191 
 
 just hobble along to feed. The horses will never stray- 
 far. 
 
 The horse gear used for such long journeys would 
 appear to Europeans somewhat cumbrous, but experience 
 has taught travellers in those countries its advantages and 
 almost indispensability. The bridles were of plaited raw 
 hide, with enormously strong bits. On the back of the 
 horse Avas first placed as a foundation a large sheep-skin, 
 semi-tanned and with the wool removed. Over this was 
 put a woollen blanket or rug folded, which was covered 
 with a piece of untanned hide to keep off the rain. Next 
 came what may be termed the real saddle, from which the 
 heavy wooden stirrups were suspended. It was formed of 
 wood and strong leather. The whole of this furniture was 
 secured to the horse by a broad girth of raw hide, fastened 
 by another strip of hide running through rings on the 
 girth and saddle, which could be laced up to any tension 
 required. Over the saddle was put a sheep-skin with the 
 wool on, then a piece of soft leather for the rider's seat, 
 and the whole was again secured by a surcingle of woven 
 wool, bound by a thong like the other. From such a 
 saddle a comfortable bed and pillow can be made at 
 night, most useful in camping- out. To complete the 
 outfit there were two saddle-bags behind to carry clothes 
 and provisions, while the lasso was coiled under the 
 saddle-bow on the right side and secured to the girth. 
 The gauchos, two of whom accompanied the party, also 
 carried sets of bolas. 
 
 "And so we're off to Paraguay!" said Mick. "How far 
 away might that place be, Mr. Herrick'?" 
 
 " About thirteen hundred miles," replied Stephen. 
 
 "Sure, that's a long distance. Whenever will we get 
 there?" 
 
 "Mick," said Sandy, "ye mind me of an old woman — 
 one from your own country — that once was going to 
 America in a ship I was in. She was always asking when 
 
192 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 we would get there. So one day the mate says, after she 
 had been pestering him with questions that no man could 
 answer: 'D'ye see that line yonder ahead, Mrs. OTlahertyf 
 pointing to the horizon. ' Yes,' says she. ' Well,' said the 
 mate, ' when we get up to yon line we'll be in Ameriky.' 
 That puzzled her sore for days, and we all had some fun 
 seeing her watching the horizon, while she sometimes 
 muttered: 'Och, the decaving man; it gets no nearer.' 
 So," continued Sandy, pointing to the horizon on the 
 plain, " when we get up to that line we'll be in Para- 
 guay." 
 
 It was a lovely morning when they set out. They went 
 at a rapid pace for miles, but so little was there to indicate 
 their progress that Mick declared it "just to be like horizon- 
 hunting." 
 
 Don Antonio had decided not to pass through Buenos 
 Ayres, but to cut across the country outside it. Cayetano 
 acted as their guide until they struck the northern road. 
 
 After a long day's ride they reached Lujan, the miserable 
 village where General Beresford had been kept a prisoner. 
 It consisted of only a few mud-built huts, but had a 
 wonderfully fine church for such a place, built in honour of 
 a celebrated image of the Virgin, which had once indicated 
 by miraculous signs, when on a journejr from Chili to 
 Buenos Ayres, its determination not to be taken bejond 
 that spot. 
 
 For accommodation at night, all that the party had to do 
 was to ride up to the nearest estancia house and intimate 
 their desire to stay there. Everywhere they were wel- 
 comed with the utmost hospitality, and no charge was 
 made for their entertainment. To have offered payment to 
 the hosts would have been regarded by them as an insult. 
 
 At Lujan they joined the main road, or rather the track 
 leading from Buenos Ayres to the interior. From the 
 earliest settlement days this was the principal route used 
 by the Spaniards, after they had possessed themselves of 
 
ON THE ROAD TO PARAGUAY 193 
 
 the River Plate, to their distant colonies in Peru and 
 Paraguay, in preference to navigation by sea or river. 
 Thus the country along it soon became much more popu- 
 lated than did the vast plains in the south. 
 
 As the party proceeded, Stephen observed that the land 
 was much more undulating than the pampas they had 
 started from, though there was nothing in sight worthy of 
 being denominated a hill. Here and there they came upon 
 patches of land which had been cultivated, and were now 
 covered with crops of maize, and occasionally they would 
 see luxuriant meadows of alfalfa (vetches), on which cattle 
 were being fattened. The most novel feature, however, 
 was the enormous thickets of thistles, growing from three 
 to twelve feet high, through which the path was sometimes 
 so narrow that but one horse could pass at a time. The 
 riders suffered severely from the strong sharp spines, which 
 penetrated their clothing like needles, until they obtained 
 some sheep-skins, with the wool on, with which to cover 
 their legs. 
 
 Don Antonio told Stephen that however great a nuisance 
 these thickets of thistles might appear, they were also of 
 great use, for in times of drought cattle could find sub- 
 sistence from them for weeks, when not a blade of grass 
 was to be had on the plains. 
 
 They met or passed numerous trains of wagons, carry- 
 ing goods up the country or bringing down produce — 
 great carts carrying about a ton and a half, drawn by six 
 yokes of oxen and driven by men on horseback. Some- 
 times these trains, Don Antonio said, took as long as twelve 
 months on a round trip to the far inland provinces. Some- 
 times also they met long troops of mules laden with bars of 
 silver bullion from the mines in Peru. "It is remarkable," 
 said Don Antonio, "that these treasure transports are 
 rarely, if ever molested, nor an ingot lost, though each bar 
 of silver represents a fortune to the scantily-paid mule- 
 teers." 
 
 ( M 806 ) N 
 
194 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Two more days' riding at a fairly rapid pace, and they 
 reached the village of Rosario de Santa Fe. They had 
 passed the villages of Carmen del Areco and Arricife, and 
 the towns, if so they might be called, of San Pedro and 
 San Nicolas de los Aroyos. They had forded rivers and 
 rested for a siesta for some hours each day, but neverthe- 
 less covered about sixty miles of their way. The post- 
 houses Stephen found to be miserable mud huts, and he 
 was glad they were independent of their accommodation. 
 
 Rosario at that time was a wretched-looking place with 
 only about a thousand inhabitants, living in mud -built 
 houses. It stood on a high precipitous bank overlooking 
 the River Parana, which was a noble-looking stream, Don 
 Antonio told Stephen, as they looked across it, that it was 
 over two miles broad at this point, and averaged more than 
 ten feet in depth. " When you remember," he said, " that 
 the place where we now stand is about two thousand miles 
 from the source of the river, and two hundred miles above 
 its mouth, it gives some idea of the immensity of this 
 channel. For hundreds of miles above and below us 
 there is not a cataract to obstruct navigation, and it is 
 easy to predict that some day this little town will become 
 a vast commercial emporium, for from it branch off the 
 roads to all the principal places in the interior." 
 
 Their halting-place at noon next day was at the Francis- 
 can monastery of San Lorenzo, where they were received 
 with the usual hospitality. By the rules of the order, how- 
 ever, no woman could enter the gate, so Pepita and her 
 father rode on to the estancia of a friend of theirs. Stephen 
 asked to be allowed to dine with the monks, as it would be 
 a novel experience to him. The refectory was a long arched 
 room, dimly lighted. On the walls were pictures of the 
 saints and Scripture scenes. A large crucifix hung at one 
 end, and a reading-desk stood in the centre, from which 
 one of the brothers recited prayers whilst the meal pro- 
 ceeded. The dinner was served upon narrow tables extend- 
 
ON THE ROAD TO PARAGUAY 195 
 
 ing along the room. The prior, a venerable gray-bearded 
 man, presided, and about fifty monks sat down to dine. 
 The food was plentiful, and the Spanish wine circulated 
 freely. Looking at the ample proportions and jovial 
 countenances of the brethren, Stephen thought as he rode 
 on that afternoon that the}'' had little reason to complain of 
 their lot. 
 
 The estancia where Don Antonio and his daughter, with 
 the rest of the party, had put up, was the property of a 
 Seiior Gomez, who, it appeared, was then at his house at 
 Santa Fe, leaving his country place in charge of his mayor- 
 domo, Don Justo Carillos, who with his wife and daughter 
 did their best to entertain the friends of their "patron". 
 The daughter was a very pretty girl of about eighteen, and 
 no sooner had Mick Scanlon cast eyes upon her than he 
 was, as he described it, "struck all of a heap". It seemed 
 indeed to be a case of love at first sight on both sides. The 
 Irishman had now grown a long fair beard, which seemed 
 to be an attraction to the ladies of a race of whom all the 
 men are of dark complexion ; besides, he was a past 
 master in the art of "blarney", an accomplishment which 
 is supposed to be characteristic of his countrymen. 
 
 Mick could now speak Spanish fluently, if not always 
 grammatically, but with a Milesian accent which excited 
 the amusement of the young lady, and probably materially 
 helped his progress in her affections. The whole of the 
 party derived much entertainment that evening in watching 
 the development into a serious courtship of what appeared 
 at first to be only a simple flirtation. 
 
 Very reluctant was poor Mick to leave next morning 
 when the party started, and for hours he could do nothing 
 but talk to Sandy about the charms and grace of Dona 
 Manuelita, until the latter, getting tired of the subject, 
 rated him for his foolishness. " It's just like an Irishman," 
 he said, " tae take up with a lass withoot ever thinking of 
 hoo he could keep her if he had her. Noo in Scotland 
 
196 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 we're better brought up, and taught that we should never 
 fall in love until we see a certain prospect of settling doom 
 an' I intend tae stick tae that principle." 
 
 " Sure an' it's a cold-blooded lot ye are, ye Scotch, always 
 calculating the cost beforehand, and measuring your affec- 
 tions with callipers. Your hearts must be as hard as the 
 boulders on your hills ! " 
 
 "And the Irishmen's seem tae be as soft as the bogs in 
 their valleys," retorted the Scot. 
 
 About the middle of the day Don Antonio's cavalcade 
 galloped into the city of Santa Fe. 
 
 It was the hour of the siesta, and it seemed like a city of 
 the dead, so still and deserted was it. 
 
 It was a poor -looking place, only some scattered one- 
 story thatched -roof adobe houses; all, however, built on 
 lines of a plan evidently intended to be filled up as streets 
 as the population increased. The roads were loose sand, 
 without side -walks. 
 
 "So this is the famous city of Santa Fe," thought 
 Stephen, "the capital of a province, and seat of a governor; 
 and such is its condition after 300 years of occupation by a 
 European power ! How different would it have been had 
 the first settlers been of the English race!" 
 
 The mean appearance of the town was, however, to a 
 large extent obliterated from their thoughts by the gener- 
 ous hospitality afforded to them by the people. Nothing 
 seemed to be too good to offer, if it added to the comfort of 
 their guests. The few days they rested there were spent 
 in a constant round of social entertainment. 
 
 A curious custom prevailed in the town. In tho hot 
 evenings all the people, men and women together, of every 
 rank, dressed in flowing garments of white cotton, flocked 
 down to the River Salado, which flows past the town, and 
 there disported themselves for an hour or two. Then they 
 would return, resume their ordinary dress, and spend the 
 evening at tertulias, the ladies allowing their hair to remain 
 
A SOUTH AMERICAN ARCADIA 197 
 
 unconfined, and hanging in luxuriant masses down to their 
 waists. 
 
 Don Antonio, after about a week, decided to resume his 
 journey. The tropillas of horses were left here, to be sent 
 back under charge of one of the men. The remainder of 
 the party embarked in boats and were ferried down the 
 Salado and across the magnificent Parana, there about 
 three miles wide. The land on the other side was known 
 as the province of Entrerios (that is, "between the rivers"), 
 as it forms a peninsula between the rivers Parana and 
 Uruguay. 
 
 It was a beautiful well-watered country, a rolling prairie 
 like the land in Uruguay, which they all remembered so 
 well at Las Graces, with here and there clumps of algarroba- 
 trees. The travelling had now to be made by the use of 
 the horses obtained from the post-houses, and progress was 
 not so rapid, owing to the inferior quality of those animals ; 
 nevertheless they accomplished the journey to the city of 
 Corrientes, a distance of about 160 leagues, in about seven 
 days. The city of Corrientes, in style and appearance, was 
 somewhat similar to Santa Fe. It stands near the junction 
 of the Parana and Paraguay rivers. 
 
 The hearts of the travellers beat high, for now they were 
 approaching the promised land. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 A SOUTH AMERICAN ARCADIA 
 
 AFTER a day or two's rest the party proceeded on their 
 journey, and having traversed a short stage by land, 
 crossed the broad river Parana and landed at last in 
 Paraguay. 
 
 Soon Stephen saw that Don Antonio, whose description 
 
198 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 led him to expect much, had in no way exaggerated the 
 attractions of the country. What a contrast it was to the 
 dead-level plain where they had been spending the past few 
 years! Even the undulating prairie of Entrerios, with its 
 occasional groves of trees, had scarcely prepared him for 
 its beauties. 
 
 Paraguay, he saw, was a land of wooded hills and verdant 
 meadows watered by copious streams and placid lakes. 
 Now the travellers would pass under the shade of a tract of 
 vast forest trees, whose sturdy trunks were encircled by 
 flowering parasitic plants. High overhead amongst the 
 branches played troops of chattering monkeys, brilliantly- 
 plumaged parrots, white cockatoos, and great-billed toucans. 
 In graceful festoons gigantic lianas hung from aloft, and 
 clouds of lovely orchids embalmed the air with their fra- 
 grance. Soon they would leave the forest and be amongst 
 groves of orange and lemon trees, upon which the golden 
 fruit and white blossoms commingled. Graceful palm-trees 
 waved their umbrella-like fronds over the broad-leaved 
 banana plants. The fig-tree offered its fruit and gave a 
 welcome shade. Gaudily-painted butterflies and humming- 
 birds fluttered in the air, and active little lizards scuttled 
 away from the rocks as our friends advanced. "White- 
 washed cottages peeped through the woods, from the midst 
 of plantations of tobacco, mandioca, maize, and sugar-cane, 
 the lofty prickly-pear cactus serving as a very efficient fence 
 to enclose them. 
 
 Nor were the people less in contrast to those Stephen had 
 been accustomed to meet on the plains. In place of proud 
 bearded gauchos, grave in temperament and fierce in fight, 
 here were lithe but beardless men, with remarkably small 
 hands and feet, suave and polite almost to excess, and 
 apparently indolent in a high degree, as could be seen 
 from the manner in which they lolled in hammocks in the 
 shade, leaving the women to do most of the work. In 
 movement and carriage the women were surpassingly grace- 
 
A SOUTH AMERICAN ARCADIA 199> 
 
 ful, which to some extent was accounted for by the uni- 
 versal practice of carrying all burdens on their heads. 
 
 Both sexes were clad in garments of white cotton of 
 native manufacture, the dress of the men being merely 
 white shirt and draw- ers, that of the women a short skirt 
 and a loose upper garment, half -chemise, half -jacket, 
 generally elaborately embroidered, styled the tepoy. 
 
 They seemed to be of a happy, careless temperament, 
 constantly chattering in their native Guarani language; 
 few understood Spanish, and the sound of song and the 
 twanging of the guitar fell constantly on the ear. 
 
 That night the party stayed at a country house, where 
 they were treated with the utmost hospitality and the 
 greatest deference. Their beds were placed on platforms 
 of bamboo, under shady awnings raised on palm trunks to 
 a height of about twenty feet above the ground, in order to 
 secure coolness and avoid the mosquitoes. 
 
 It was pretty to see the children of their hosts come one 
 by one, before they retired to rest on their elevated couches, 
 and kneel before their parents to ask their blessing. 
 
 Next day their journey was through a constant series of 
 scenes of varying beauty. It was like Arcadia found at last. 
 
 As they approached Asuncion they came into roads, 
 sunk below the level of the country, completely arched 
 over for miles by the interlacing of the branches of trees- 
 planted on each side. Don Antonio explained to Stephen 
 that originally these avenues had been palisade ways con- 
 structed as a defence against the Indians, but that such was 
 the fertility of the climate that the posts used as palisades 
 had taken root and blossomed into these trees, whose shade 
 was now so grateful to the traveller. 
 
 At length they reached the capital, a straggling town of 
 white houses with thatched roofs, and each surrounded 
 with a shady veranda, under which the inhabitants sat, or 
 swung in net hammocks. So mild was the climate, Don 
 Antonio said, that the people practically lived in the opera 
 
200 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 air, and so simple and honest were they in their ways that 
 doors and windows were never fastened. 
 
 As Don Antonio's house was only about two miles 
 beyond, they did not stop in the town, but proceeded to it 
 at once. Stephen found it to be of a very different style 
 from those on the estancias in Uruguay and La Plata. It 
 stood in the midst of extensive orchards of orange and 
 lemon trees, peaches, and almonds. Close to the house 
 was a trim flower-garden full of lovely blossoms; the house 
 itself was covered with luxuriant flowering creepers, and 
 vines hung from trellises around it. Like the others, it 
 was built of adobe, and white-washed, with thatched roof. 
 A wide veranda surrounded it, under which the pleasing 
 sight of a dinner-table, spread in readiness for their arrival, 
 met their gaze. 
 
 Refreshed by a delicious bath, contrived in a pool close 
 by behind thick hedges, the travellers were ready to do 
 justice to the al fresco repast. The variety of meats and 
 the luscious fruits were a welcome change from the ever- 
 lasting beef diet of the pampas. 
 
 To one of a less energetic temperament than Stephen, the 
 life they led at the country house for the next few weeks 
 might have been destructive of all capacity for work in the 
 future. There seems to be something in the Paraguayan 
 atmosphere which disposes one to accept the dolce far niente 
 so prevalent amongst the natives of the male sex, and for 
 which the warmth of the climate and the easiness of obtain- 
 ing a living is some excuse. 
 
 The revenues of Seiior Rodriguez's Paraguayan estate 
 were derived principally from the products of the yerba 
 forests, situated far up the river, and only worked at one 
 season of the year. At other times there was little to do 
 beyond supervising the orchards, which were tended by a 
 host of native women. 
 
 In the warm, reposeful afternoons Don Antonio told 
 Stephen something of the history of the country. He had 
 
A SOUTH AMERICAN ARCADIA 201 
 
 already related how Asuncion was for years the principal 
 city of the Spaniards, before Buenos Ayres and Monte 
 Video had been founded. 
 
 " The original colonists," said Don Antonio, "were mainly 
 Basques from the northern frontiers of Spain, who inter- 
 married with the Guarani Indians, the most handsome and 
 docile tribe of aborigines whom the Spaniards had met in 
 South America. Then came missionaries sent out by the 
 Jesuit authorities in Spain and elsewhere. As you probably 
 know, they soon established a remarkably efficient organi- 
 zation of the Indian population. This has been greatly 
 praised for the work it enabled the Jesuits to do for the 
 aborigines, and it has also been strongly criticized for its 
 shortcomings and failures. 
 
 "Originally," continued Don Antonio, "I have no doubt, 
 these missions were founded from a pure desire to 
 spread the gospel and to protect the helpless Indians 
 from their numerous enemies, among whom, it is said, the 
 Portuguese settlers in Brazil were the fiercest and most 
 relentless. 
 
 " In course of time the Jesuits came to control the entire 
 Indian population, great areas of land and enormous 
 numbers of cattle and sheep. They were the real rulers 
 of the country, indeed." 
 
 "But," interrupted Stephen, "they were expelled at 
 last, were they not ? How did that happen 1 " 
 
 "It was like this," replied Don Antonio: "they refused 
 to pay attention to the viceroys and officials sent out by 
 the Spanish authorities, and they even frequently defied 
 them by armed force. Things became so intolerable that 
 Carlos III finally decided upon expulsion of the Order 
 from Spain and her colonies. Secret orders were dispatched 
 to all parts of the Spanish dominions, and everywhere, on 
 the 22nd of July, 1767, the blow was struck. At midnight 
 the Jesuits were awakened, to find their establishments 
 surrounded and themselves made prisoners. Almost to a 
 
202 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 man they were sent down to Buenos Ayres and placed on 
 board ships bound for Europe." 
 
 "And what has become of their possessions," asked 
 Stephen. 
 
 "All gone to rack and ruin," said Don Antonio. "In 
 some respects it is a pity." 
 
A MODERN DIONYSIUS 203 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII 
 
 A MODERN DIONYSIUS 
 
 THE account which Don Antonio had given of the 
 Jesuits' mission awoke in Stephen an ardent desire 
 to visit the scene of these famous settlements; so a few 
 days later, accompanied by Sandy and Mick, he rode off on 
 a tour through the district. 
 
 He found, as Don Antonio had led him to anticipate, 
 nothing but scenes of desolation and ruin. Nature was 
 smiling and beautiful, as she always is in Paraguay, but 
 her very exuberance had tended to aid the obliteration of 
 man's handiwork. 
 
 Near one of the old churches, whose very ruins showed 
 what a magnificent edifice it must have been in the heyday 
 of the Jesuits' prosperity, they met with an old priest, 
 who had lived there, he told them, for more than half a 
 century, and was endeavouring to keep together the few 
 straggling Indians left of the once numerous colony. His 
 name, he said, was Father Anselmo, and he had been brought 
 up by the Jesuits, but escaped expulsion because he was not 
 a member of the Order. 
 
 He looked back on the time of their sway with un- 
 ceasing regret, and tears would flow down his venerable 
 face as he recounted the events of the expulsion, some 
 forty -five years before, and the subsequent ruin of the 
 settlements. 
 
 "Ah!" said he, "the Jesuits, whatever may have been 
 their faults, were at least kind masters to these poor 
 people. How different it has been under the rapacious 
 treatment of those who came after them! The present 
 administrator of the territory, for example, Don Ignacio 
 Lopez, who has only recently been sent up, is a demon in 
 human form." 
 
204 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 "What!" exclaimed Stephen, "Don Ignacio Lopez! 
 Must that villain for ever be coming across my path!" 
 
 "Then you know him, senor," replied Father Anselmo; 
 " so there will be no need for me to tell you what sort of 
 a man he is. I hear that he rendered some valuable service 
 to the Government when the English were in Monte Video, 
 so they have given him this post as a reward. But he has. 
 never concealed his dislike to the life, and he is trying to 
 wring everything he can out of the unfortunate people. 
 He works them to death, and robs them of every scrap of 
 property and their wages as far as he can. 
 
 "Ah, if he only knew it!" continued Father Anselmo 
 mysteriously. "There is not far from here something 
 which would enrich him far beyond his dreams, but he 
 will never hear of it while I live. No tortures will wring 
 from me the secret." 
 
 "What can the old man mean 1 ?" thought Stephen. "Is 
 it a treasure which the Jesuits concealed before they 
 left?" 
 
 But, finding further enquiries and speculations to be 
 useless, he dropped the subject, and bade the old priest 
 farewell. 
 
 Another trip which Stephen made not long afterwards, 
 at the request of Don Antonio, was to the yerba plantations, 
 in which his friend had large interests. 
 
 He went up the river in a canoe, pulled by four strong 
 natives, a journey of ten days of utter misery, caused by 
 the intense heat and the assaults of biting insects, to a 
 place named Villa Eeal. This he found to be an utterly 
 desolate hole, full of heat, stench, and malaria, and he was 
 glad to be able to start at once for the Yerbales. For 
 four days he rode through dense tangled forests, the haunt 
 of the jaguar and venomous serpents, where the clothes 
 of the traveller were apt to be torn to pieces by thorns, 
 and his flesh blistered by mosquitoes. At length he 
 emerged on the high ground amidst the characteristic land- 
 
A MODERN DIONYSIUS 205 
 
 scape of Paraguay, where grew in abundant clumps the 
 famous yerba-tree, a species of holly. 
 
 Here Stephen found gangs of men laboriously engaged 
 in the heavy task of cutting off the branches, and carrying 
 them for long distances to the camp, where the leaves were 
 stripped and roasted, pounded to fragments, and then 
 packed into bags of raw hide. 
 
 Terrible were the sufferings and privations of the poor 
 yerba gatherers from the heat and insects and the diffi- 
 culty of getting supplies, but nevertheless nothing seemed 
 capable of repressing their natural gaiety, and they 
 twanged the guitar and sang songs round the camp fires 
 at night. 
 
 " I propose," said Don Antonio to Stephen one evening 
 after his return, " to pay a visit to a gentleman who has 
 recently taken up his residence near us, and if you like 
 you can come with me. I think he will interest you, as 
 he is one of the most remarkable men in the country." 
 
 Stephen intimated his willingness to go, and asked Don 
 Antonio to give him some particulars about their new 
 neighbour. 
 
 "His name," said Don Antonio, "is Dr. Gaspar Rodriguez 
 Francia. He is a native of this country, but was educated 
 at the University of Cordoba, in La Plata. His parents 
 intended him to be a priest, but he chose instead to be a 
 lawyer, and in this I think he acted wisely, for he has 
 acquired the reputation of being the cleverest lawyer in 
 Paraguay, and what is more, in my estimation, he bears 
 an honourable name as being incorruptible, which, unfor- 
 tunately, cannot be said of all the lawyers here. This has 
 been proved upon many occasions, as he has been known 
 to allow his own private interests to suffer in order to 
 defend the case of his personal enemy, even when offered 
 heavy bribes to keep silence. 
 
 "But this is not all," went on Don Antonio; "he is a 
 strange character indeed. Far off as we are from Europe, 
 
206 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 he follows every event which passes there with the keenest 
 interest. He reads several languages, and has gone to the 
 considerable expense of having the principal European 
 papers sent out to him regularly. Then he is a student of 
 the sciences, and has acquired such a varied knowledge that 
 it is little wonder that the people of such an ignorant 
 country as this look upon him as a magician." 
 
 "But how comes it," said Stephen, "that such a man 
 should be living in retirement at a country house?" 
 
 "Ah! replied Don Antonio, "there is a history attached 
 to that too. When, last year, the provinces of La Plata 
 declared their independence from Spain, there was naturally 
 some commotion caused up here. Now Spain had never 
 kept a strong force in Paraguay, trusting probably to the 
 well-known docility of the people, which renders them loyal 
 to almost any form of authority. So when the news came 
 that Buenos Ayres had thrown off its allegiance to the 
 mother-country, the Paraguayans were bewildered. They 
 scarcely knew what side to take. They therefore took a 
 middle course, and appointed a committee of three promi- 
 nent citizens to administer the affairs of the country, to 
 decide later on, when they should see how matters went, 
 whether they would adhere to Spain or side with the 
 revolting colonies. Dr. Francia was appointed the secretary 
 and assessor of this committee, as no one better fitted for 
 the position could have been found, and it is rumoured that 
 he has constantly advocated that the junta, that is the 
 committee, should declare for the entire independence of 
 Paraguay, not only from Spain, but from all the other 
 colonies. As the junta have not been able to make up 
 their minds to take this bold step, he is reported to have 
 retired in disgust." 
 
 With curiosity fired by the description he had just heard, 
 Stephen got quickly ready to walk with Don Antonio to 
 Dr. Francia's house. 
 
 On the way Don Antonio explained that Dr. Francia was 
 
A MODERN DIONYSIUS 207 
 
 a bachelor, and lived entirely alone, so that he must not 
 expect to find many elegancies in his abode. 
 
 They found the doctor standing in front of his door 
 gazing at the stars, which had just begun to make their 
 appearance through the twilight. He welcomed Seiior 
 Rodriguez cordially, and accorded a gracious bow to Stephen 
 when he was introduced. 
 
 The ex-secretary of the junta was of striking appearance. 
 He was a man of about fifty, of tall gaunt figure, a stern 
 mould of countenance, a high forehead and penetrating 
 dark eyes. His luxuriant black hair, thrown carelessly 
 back from his brow, fell in natural ringlets over his shoulders. 
 He was dressed in a suit of black, with large gold buckles 
 at his knees and on his shoes, while over his shoulders he 
 had thrown a scarlet cloak. 
 
 His bearing was dignified, and he spoke with gravity and 
 deliberation. At times, however, a smile would light up 
 his countenance and give it an irresistible charm. 
 
 The conversation at first related to astronomy, the 
 doctor apparently taking no small pride in displaying his 
 knowledge by pointing out the principal constellations and 
 stars; but suddenly remembering his duties as a host, he 
 invited Don Antonio and Stephen to enter the house. The 
 room into which he introduced them was evidently his 
 study. On the table lay heaps of papers, and some pon- 
 derous volumes bound in vellum, obviously works on law, 
 which he had just been consulting. A great silver inkstand 
 and numerous quill pens stood in the middle, and in front 
 of the chair, from which Doctor Francia had evidently 
 recently risen, was an unfinished draft of a legal document. 
 
 The room was furnished in very simple style. Besides 
 the table, there were only some massive wooden chairs 
 with high carved backs, seated with stamped leather. The 
 floor was laid with brick-red flat tiles, and was without 
 carpet or mat. It was strewn with fragments of torn letters, 
 and slippers, boots, and shoes lay scattered about. In one 
 
208 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 corner stood the doctor's horse-gear on a trestle, in another 
 a celestial globe and a theodolite. But the most attractive 
 feature of the room was the library, consisting of about 
 three or four hundred books, standing upon a set of rough 
 shelves on the wall behind Dr. Francia's chair. 
 
 The usual civilities of presenting the guests with the 
 mate cup and cigars, brought in by a little negro boy, 
 having been observed, the talk at once fell upon the books, 
 a subject which more than any other appeared to interest 
 their host. 
 
 Dr. Francia invited Stephen to come up closer to inspect 
 them. The lower shelf was principally filled with ponder- 
 ous works on law, bound in calf, but the collection above 
 was of a miscellaneous character. It included the works 
 of Voltaire, Eousseau, Volney, Diderot, and other philo- 
 sophical French writers, several treatises upon astronomy, 
 mathematics, and the inductive sciences, also in the French 
 language, and numerous works in Spanish and in Latin. 
 Stephen's education was not at that time sufficiently ad- 
 vanced to enable him to appreciate the scope and tendency 
 of these works, but he understood enough to form a high 
 idea of the doctor's learning. 
 
 Don Antonio, however, knew enough of the books to 
 enable him to discuss their contents with their owner. 
 
 It was evident from the discourse that Dr. Francia had 
 a great admiration for Voltaire. 
 
 "There was a man," he exclaimed, "who saw things 
 clearly, and who was brave enough to proclaim his opinions 
 oven though they were against the views held by the great 
 majority. No tyrant, no priest could stop him!" 
 
 Of Diderot and the other precursors of the French Re- 
 volution he also spoke approvingly, but against the eccle- 
 siastics, and especially the Jesuits, he uttered a bitter 
 tirade. 
 
 Stephen observed that he held the same ideas with regard 
 to the operations of that order in Paraguay as had already 
 
A MODERN DIONYSIUS 209 
 
 been expressed by Don Antonio, only the doctor was more 
 bitter with regard to them. The conversation flowed on 
 with references to recent and current events, and Don Fran- 
 cia displayed a remarkable acquaintance with the history of 
 the French Revolution and of men and affairs in France. 
 He became quite enthusiastic when he spoke of Napoleon. 
 
 "What a genius is that little Corsican!" he cried. "He 
 knows exactly what he is aiming at and how to accomplish 
 his wishes. He has the true idea of how to govern; for 
 the mass of the people never know what is best for them 
 and their country. They must be directed by one master 
 mind and compelled to obey his instructions." And then 
 he proceeded to trace the events of the emperor's career 
 with many admiring comments. 
 
 Don Antonio had avoided speaking of the affairs of 
 Paraguay, knowing the delicate nature of the topic, but 
 Dr. Francia introduced it himself and spoke freely. For 
 the men then in power he expressed the highest contempt, 
 characterizing them as perfect ignoramuses, without a policy, 
 or sufficient ideas to frame one. He dwelt also upon the 
 ineptitude of the men at the head of affairs at Buenos Ay res 
 and Monte Video, and called attention to the numerous 
 disorders and disregard of the law which had happened in 
 these countries in consequence of the want of proper control. 
 
 " Until a strong hand is on the bridle," he said, " I can 
 foresee nothing but years of seething anarchy before them, 
 and the best policy for Paraguay will be to keep entirely 
 aloof from their struggles. What need have we of them, 
 or to be mixed up with their affairs? Have we not in this 
 country of our own all that man requires for sustenance, 
 clothing, and every other want] Our people are industrious 
 and docile— much easier to rule than their fierce gauchos, 
 who are all more or less bandits by nature. Believe me, 
 Seiior Rodriguez, Paraguay's best policy is to isolate herself 
 entirely and live on her resources. The hour has come for 
 it, but where is the man?" 
 
 ( M 806 ) o 
 
210 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 As they walked homewards Don Antonio and Stephen 
 discussed with much interest the remarkable words they 
 had heard from Dr. Francia. " He is certainly a wonderful 
 man," said Don Antonio, "and is, I feel sure, destined to 
 play a great part in the affairs of this country. He is un- 
 doubtedly a genius, some think a madman ; and the curious 
 thing is, that he is of very obscure origin, and none can 
 fathom whence is derived his extraordinary talent." 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII 
 
 ELYSIUM AND MAMMON 
 
 HAD Stephen been a classical scholar, he would certainly 
 have thought that in Paraguay he had found the 
 land of the Lotus Eaters. Life there, at that time, flowed 
 on so pleasantly and so dreamily that even the most ener- 
 getic felt themselves to be gradually losing their activity 
 and ambitions. Society, if not highly cultured, was sym- 
 pathetic and agreeable in a simple way. No one was either 
 really poor or very rich, and all had ample time upon their 
 hands for social intercourse, and enjoyed it to the fullest. 
 
 Don Antonio was one of the most influential and popular 
 men in the country. He and his friends were asked every- 
 where, and scarcely an evening passed in which they were 
 not attending some party or extending hospitality at the 
 quintet (country villa). 
 
 The entertainment on such occasions was much more 
 varied than at the tertulias which Stephen remembered 
 at Monte Video. The Paraguayans were a music-loving 
 people, and had many lyrics and melodies of their own. 
 They had, besides, several dances peculiar to the country, 
 in which only one couple took part, to the tinkling accom- 
 paniment of a guitar. In these there was much scope for 
 
ELYSIUM AND MAMMON 211 
 
 the introduction of graceful skill and fancy, inasmuch as 
 they were symbolical of love and the course of courtship. 
 The suitor would sometimes advance gallantly, only to find 
 his partner retire coyly, and then he would have to picture 
 his despair, and by expressive gestures display his various 
 artifices to win the lady's favour, which would sometimes 
 appear to be about to be granted, but would again be with- 
 drawn with playful coquetry, until at last he carried her off 
 triumphantly, unless in the meantime he had been cut out 
 by some bolder and more attractive rival. The rest of the 
 company would watch the performance with great enjoy- 
 ment, from time to time applauding when some particularly 
 novel or ingenious ruse or movement was introduced. 
 
 When tired of the dance, it was always a delight to 
 wander forth into the garden under the dark-blue sky and 
 brilliant stars, and enjoy the warm soft air, redolent of the 
 perfume of orange blossoms, of myrtles, and other delight- 
 fully-scented plants, while listening to the deep-toned songs 
 of the night-birds. 
 
 But Stephen felt that it would not be right for him to 
 drop into a careless repose in this elysium without remem- 
 brance of the past or thought of the future. He was now 
 a young man, verging upon twenty-one years of age, with 
 his way in life still to make. He had not forgotten that in 
 his farewell letter to his mother he had promised to try to 
 make a fortune quickly and to return to her; but above 
 all, he was anxious to achieve a position soon which might 
 enable him to realize his secret ambition, the dearest wish 
 of his life, that of being able to ask for the hand of Pepita. 
 
 He spoke of his ideas to Don Antonio one morning, ex- 
 pressing to him his gratitude for the many kindnesses 
 which his friend had rendered him, but saying that he had 
 resolved that he should now take steps to gain independence 
 by his own exertions, and he asked for the old gentleman's 
 advice. 
 
 " I am glad you mentioned the subject to me," said Don 
 
212 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Antonio. " It shows that you have the spirit which I like 
 to see in a young man. Fortunately I am able to show 
 you a way whereby you should easily be able to accomplish 
 your desire." 
 
 Don Antonio went on to explain his scheme. He pointed 
 out that, as Stephen had probably also observed, Paraguaj- 
 was teeming with produce, much of which was entirely lost 
 for want of a ready market, and what was actually exported 
 was sold at exceedingly low prices for that very reason. 
 His project was that Stephen should go down to Buenos 
 Ayres and charter a suitable vessel to come up the river, 
 and at the same time enter into arrangements for the sale 
 of its cargo when it returned, or for its shipment to Europe. 
 "There are now," said Don Antonio, "several English 
 mercantile houses at Buenos Ayres which would willingly 
 undertake such business." 
 
 Don Antonio promised that when Stephen was away 
 upon this errand, he would, for his part, occupy himself 
 with the purchase of enough produce to load the vessel. 
 
 Stephen was delighted with the project, which was 
 clearly one likely to bring lucrative results. He had fre- 
 quently thought of such a plan before, and the practical 
 difficulty which had stood in the way of its accomplishment 
 had now been removed by Don Antonio placing his capital 
 and credit at his disposal. 
 
 Seilor Eodriguez then explained his proposals for the 
 division of the profits, and Stephen was more than satisfied 
 with the generous share which was to be allotted to him. "I 
 intend also," added Don Antonio, "that your two country- 
 men shall participate in this enterprise, for I do not forget 
 that they, too, took part in the rescue of my daughter and 
 myself from certain death. Besides, they will be able to 
 render us most useful services in the work of collecting 
 and shipping the produce when the time comes." 
 
 The two sailors were delighted with the news, and 
 thanked Don Antonio cordially for his kindness. 
 
ELYSIUM AND MAMMON 213 
 
 Within a few days Stephen and his two companions 
 started upon their long journey, full of high spirits and 
 hopes. 
 
 Their instructions were, that after they had done their 
 business at Buenos Ay res, they were to pay a visit for 
 some weeks to the estancia El Porvenir to see how the 
 business was progressing, for though Don Antonio had 
 full confidence in his mayordomo, unfortunately the latter 
 could neither read nor write, and so had been unable to 
 report the state of affairs to his patron. 
 
 As the vessel they would send might take between 
 three and four months to ascend the river, no time would 
 be lost in their making this excursion. They were further 
 instructed to bring back Don Cayetano with them, both 
 with the object of conferring with Don Antonio upon the 
 future management of the estancia, and also to aid them in 
 guarding the large amount in silver and gold which it 
 would be necessary to bring up to Paraguay in order to 
 pay for the produce bought. 
 
 The party accomplished their journey as far as Santa Fe, 
 through the scenes which have already been described, 
 without extraordinary incidents. But at that place Wick 
 begged his companions to make a detour from the straight 
 route in order to pay a visit to the house of the maiden 
 who had so charmed him on the upward journey. Nothing 
 could exceed his delight when they complaisantly acceded 
 to his request, nor his enthusiasm at the prospect of the 
 meeting. For hours he would sing the praises of his lady- 
 love: — "Isn't she a darlinU" "Did ye ever see such 
 beauty 1 ?'*' "Och, mavourneen, how I'm longing to see your 
 sweet eyes!" 
 
 But all he could wring out of the phlegmatic Scotchman 
 was such remarks as: "Aye, she's no such an ill-lookin' 
 lassie. I hae seen waur!" 
 
 Mick's reception by the Carillos family was all that he 
 could have desired. During the evening that the party 
 
214 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 spent there he made rapid progress in the good graces of 
 Dofia Manuelita, and when they retired to rest — though for 
 Mick it was not to sleep — it seemed as though everything 
 was going as well as he could have wished. 
 
 Nor was he disappointed next morning when he broached 
 the subject to Don Justo, and made formal application for 
 his daughter's hand. He was now able to assure him that 
 he had some settled prospects, and the father, having learned 
 that Mick was a good Catholic, readily gave his consent. 
 
 Mick was neither " to hold nor to bind " for the rest of 
 that day, and the unfortunate horses he rode had a rough 
 time of it as he went circling round his companions whoop- 
 ing for very joy, much to the amazement of the solemn 
 Sandy, who declared that " He had ne'er seen a man gae 
 sae clean gite owre a bit lassie! Wait till ye're marrit a 
 year or sae," he warned his excited comrade, "an I'se 
 warrant ye'll no be crying sae crouse. Maybe the lauch 
 'ill be on the ither side o' yer face ! " 
 
 No untoward incident marred their progress as they rode 
 rapidly on past the monastery of San Lorenzo and the town 
 of Rosario, and continued in lengthy stages until they 
 reached Buenos Ayres four days later. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV 
 
 AN INDIAN RAID 
 
 THE business arrangements at Buenos Ayres did not take 
 long to complete, as Don Antonio had predicted, and 
 in less than a week Stephen had the satisfaction of knowing 
 that the schooner Tridente was preparing to start up the 
 river for Asuncion, while Messrs. Macdonald, Graham, and 
 Co. were getting together the coin which would have to be 
 taken back with them to Paraguay. 
 
AN INDIAN RAID 215 
 
 At El Porvenir they found that all things had been going 
 on in the most satisfactory way during their absence. 
 Thanks to the vigilance of Don Cayetano but few horses 
 had been stolen, while the sheep and cattle had progressed 
 wonderfully both in condition and numbers. 
 
 But Stephen could not bear to stay long on these dull, 
 level plains, in spite of their money-making attractions. 
 He longed to return to the Arcadian beauty of Paraguay, 
 above all, to be once more with Pepita, and, as may readily 
 be believed, Mick was quite as anxious to be near his own 
 divinity. 
 
 So within a fortnight they were once more on the road 
 to the north, accompanied by Don Cayetano and two mules 
 bearing a precious load of specie. 
 
 As rapidly as horses could carry them they pushed on 
 their journey, and when they at last reached San Lorenzo, 
 Mick's impatience became uncontrollable, and, mounting a 
 fresh horse, he started on ahead so as to abbreviate as far 
 as possible the interval which lay between him and the 
 attractive face of Dona Manuelita. 
 
 It was with profound astonishment that his companions 
 met him within a league of Don Justo's house, riding back 
 at a tearing speed; but when he came near they saw from 
 his face that something very serious had happened. 
 
 For a few moments he was too excited to speak; but soon 
 he broke forth with : " The murthering villains ! They've 
 killed them all and burnt the house!" winding up with a 
 cry of despair so terrible as to strike all hearts. 
 
 Putting spurs to their horses the party rushed forward 
 until they came in sight of where the house had stood, 
 when an appalling sight met their gaze. 
 
 Of the house nothing was left but a few blackened walls, 
 borne down by the embers of the still smoking roof. In 
 front of it lay on its back the corpse of Don Justo, but of 
 men and animals nothing was to be seen. 
 
 The quick eye of Don Cayetano was able to interpret 
 
216 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the meaning of the scene at once. Biding up to the house 
 and making a few short circles round it, keeping his eyes 
 to the ground, he returned to the others and briefly said : 
 
 " Indians ! Been here yesterday ! Carried off the cattle ! 
 Have got a good start!" 
 
 The sound of voices led to another surprise, when they 
 saw a figure cautiously emerge from a ditch close by, which 
 they soon recognized to be that of an old woman whom 
 they remembered as a servant at the house. She was in a 
 woeful condition, having spent the night lying in terror at 
 the bottom of the ditch, not daring to move, and she now 
 broke down into piteous wailings. At length they were 
 able to elicit the story from her incoherent words, con- 
 stantly interrupted by songs and lamentations. 
 
 In the afternoon of the previous day a band of Indians 
 had suddenly ridden up to the house yelling terribly, and 
 almost before they could realize it the house was fired, poor 
 Don Justo had fallen with several lance-thrusts in his body, 
 and the band were driving away the cattle almost as quickly 
 as they had come. The senora, the old woman said, was, 
 fortunately for her, away on a visit to Santa Fe, but " Dios 
 Mio!" she cried, "they have carried away the senorita! Ay 
 de mi, por la pobre Dona Manuelita!" 
 
 Mick's grief and excitement were terrible, and it was as 
 much as his companions could do to restrain him from 
 galloping off madly upon the trail of the Indians. 
 
 Stephen appealed to Don Cayetano for advice. Before 
 replying, the tracker spent some minutes in carefully recon- 
 noitring the ground, and then, turning to the old woman, 
 he asked her to give some description of the Indians. 
 
 She had been too excited and terrified to take particular 
 notice, but recollected that they had all bands of plaited 
 straw, or something like it, round their heads. 
 
 "Ha!" said Cayetano. " As I thought, Tobas. And about 
 a hundred of them as nearly as I can guess from their 
 tracks." He then explained to Stephen that the Toba 
 
AN INDIAN RAID 21 T 
 
 Indians were the fiercest and most formidable tribe of 
 these regions, tall, athletic, and active— a very dangerous 
 foe to tackle. Their distinguishing mark was the band 
 round the head which the old woman had mentioned. 
 
 "I strongly advise you," he said, "not to attempt to 
 follow them with the idea of rescuing the young woman. 
 What is done is done ! It is a pity, but what could you do 
 against such a horde?" 
 
 Mick, however, would not listen for a moment to the 
 proposal to leave his sweetheart to her fate, and cried that 
 if nobody else would try he would go by himself, come 
 what might. Nor could Stephen or Sandy bear the 
 thought of not making an attempt to save the poor girl 
 from her terrible position. 
 
 " Well," said at last Don Cayetano, " whatever you de- 
 cide to do, my duty is clear, that is to guard Don Antonio's 
 money and to take it to him as quickly as possible. As for 
 catching up with these Indians, that would be easy enough. 
 The track is so clear that anyone could follow it, and as- 
 they cannot travel fast when driving cattle before them, 
 you would soon overtake them. But I advise you not 
 to try, as I can show you a much better plan if you will 
 go. I know this country well, I have been all over it in 
 my youth. The tolderias (villages) of the Tobas are about 
 thirty leagues from here due west. Now what I think you 
 should do is to go right to the chief tolderia of the Mataco 
 tribe, which is about the same distance from here, but to 
 the north-west. You will easily find the road by turning 
 due north after you have crossed the second arroyo (stream) 
 you meet. The Matacos are the hereditary enemies of the 
 Tobas, and when they hear that the latter have carried off 
 a good spoil, they will easily be persuaded to attack them 
 when they are feasting over their victory." 
 
 Stephen and his friends saw that Don Cayetano was right, 
 and that this would be their best chance, so they resolved 
 to follow his advice. 
 
218 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Don Cayetano rode off with his treasure -laden mules 
 towards Santa Fe, and promised to send out soldiers from 
 the town to protect the people and bury the body of poor 
 Don Justo, while Stephen and his two companions struck 
 •out in the other direction in search of the Matacos' villages. 
 
 By carefully following Don Cayetano's directions they 
 came that evening in sight of the object of their quest. 
 
 Acting still according to the instructions of the tracker, 
 as soon as they saw that the Indians had perceived their 
 -approach, they dismounted and stood still, and put their 
 guns, which they had been carrying slung across their 
 shoulders, down upon the ground, and waited until the 
 Indian spokesman came within hail. Then they crossed 
 their arms upon their chests and bowed three times to the 
 ground. 
 
 To their great relief the Indian who had come out as a 
 Iierald laid down his lance and also bowed three times. 
 He then addressed them in Spanish, which indicated to 
 Stephen that a great part of their difficulties had been 
 removed. 
 
 Slowly the Indian approached them and asked them 
 what they wanted, and if they were friends. 
 
 Stephen in a few words told him that they had come to 
 give their noble tribe a chance to revenge themselves upon 
 the miserable Tobas. 
 
 At the sound of the hated name the eyes of the Indian 
 flashed, and he became visibly more interested, though still 
 preserving his imperturbable gravity. 
 
 Stephen asked him how he came to speak Spanish, and 
 he replied that when a boy he had been taken prisoner and 
 made to serve for some years in the Spanish army. 
 
 This was a common practice of the Spaniards, but they 
 always took care to employ their Indian troops in places far 
 remote from their own country. 
 
 The Indian then invited them to follow him into the 
 village. 
 
THE TOLDERIA OF THE MATACOS 219 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV 
 
 THE TOLDERIA OF THE MATACOS 
 
 AS they approached the village Stephen saw that it was 
 composed of a large number of huts (toldos) built of 
 post and wattle, with strong thatched roofs. These dwell- 
 ings were long and low, the walls being only about four 
 feet high, with a door on one side through which a fire 
 could be seen burning in the middle of the floor of each. 
 They were built at irregular intervals along the fringe of a 
 dense wood which covered a gently-sloping eminence. This 
 was a custom universally followed by the Indians of those 
 countries, for two reasons: first, that as they were always 
 exposed to attack, and the Indian tactics of warfare were 
 entirely those of surprises, the wood behind, with its intri- 
 cate paths, afforded them a means of escape if too severely 
 pressed; second, that the bean of the algarroba-tree, of 
 which these woods were mainly composed, is the principal 
 article of sustenance amongst those tribes. 
 
 In front of each hut stood, fixed into the ground, the 
 lance of the owner of the house, and Stephen observed with 
 rather a creepy feeling that from these lances frequently 
 hung a bunch of scalps, recognizable by the long lock of 
 black hair and the ghastly fragments of skin still adhering 
 to it. On one side, just outside the door-post, stood the 
 Indian's bow and arrows and his heavy wooden club. It 
 was difficult to comprehend why the Indians adhered to this 
 custom of thus leaving their weapons exposed. For they 
 must have known by experience that the first step taken by 
 their enemies when about to attack a village is to send for- 
 ward scouts, who, crawling in like serpents under cover of the 
 night, seize the lances, clubs, and bows as they pass each door, 
 and thus leave the inmates without means of defence. Only 
 the conservatism of immemorial usage can account for it. 
 
220 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 As they slowly followed their guide towards the centre of 
 the village, leading their horses by the bridles, the Englishmen 
 saw that they were curiously watched by groups of women 
 and children in front of each hut. They were of a dark 
 coppery colour, and some of the younger women would 
 have been good-looking but for their having tattooed their 
 faces in dark-blue lines so closely as almost to conceal tho 
 true colour of their skin. 
 
 Their dress consisted, in most instances, of only a short 
 skirt or kilt, made from deer-skins, still with the hair on, 
 and generally in a very filthy condition. Some, however, 
 wore, in addition, dark -blue cloaks of woollen material 
 somewhat like ponchos. All had the lobes of their ears 
 bored, into the slits of which were thrust pieces of wood 
 or stones. Their long, black hair was plaited into two tails 
 which hung down their backs. Their general attitude was 
 a standing position, with their hands resting upon their 
 breasts. 
 
 Children up to about eight years of age ran about quite 
 naked. Those still in infancy were tied to boards and hung 
 each on its mother's back, suspended by a thong passing 
 over its forehead. 
 
 No men were yet visible; they had gone, the guide ex- 
 plained, to the centre of the village, where burned the 
 council fire, a great pile of wood in an open space, which 
 had been lit, and a summons given by beating the "pimpim" 
 (a species of drum formed by stretching a sheep-skin over 
 a large earthen pot), when the news had spread that 
 "Christians" (so the Indians call all of European race) 
 were approaching the village. 
 
 Round the fire, Stephen saw that the warriors had 
 collected in rows, all squatted upon the ground smoking 
 their pipes in solemn silence. Stephen noted that they 
 were short, broad men, with remarkable development of 
 arms and shoulders. Some wore blue, woollen ponchos, but 
 the majority were naked with the exception of a belt of 
 
THE TOLDERIA OF THE MATACOS 221 
 
 deer -skin round the loins, or a skin thrown over their 
 shoulders. 
 
 The guide told them to tie up their horses and to 
 approach. 
 
 Stephen took the precaution to whisper quickly to his 
 companions each to sit upon a different side of the fire, so 
 that they might be able to warn each other if there were 
 any indications of an attack from behind upon any one of 
 them. The interpreter took his place by Stephen's side. 
 
 Presently an old man spoke. He was evidently the 
 " cacique ", or chief, being adorned with a circlet of ostrich 
 plumes on his head and armlets of smaller feathers above 
 the elbows, and the interpreter told Stephen to proceed 
 with his story. 
 
 Briefly Stephen told, and the interpreter repeated, how 
 the Tobas had the previous day attacked Don Justo's house, 
 killed him, carried away his daughter, and driven off some 
 hundreds of head of cattle and horses. 
 
 The killing of the owner and the abduction of the 
 daughter did not appear to affect the Indians in the least, 
 but grunts and glances told of their excitement when they 
 heard of the stolen cattle. 
 
 After a long palaver, in which many of the men took 
 part, the interpreter at last informed Stephen that they 
 had resolved to take away the cattle from their enemies, 
 and asked if the " Christians " would help with their fire- 
 arms, and if so, what share of the booty would they ask as. 
 a reward. 
 
 Great was the surprise of the Indians when Stephen 
 replied that the only condition would be that the young 
 woman who had been carried off should be handed to 
 them. 
 
 The Matacos had expected much heavier demands, and 
 they seemed to think that these " Christians " were indeed 
 simpletons. 
 
 The interpreter now informed them that it had been. 
 
222 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 resolved to call to their aid all the rest of the tribe, and that 
 this would occupy the whole of the next day. 
 
 Stephen soon observed that messengers on horseback were 
 being despatched in several directions, each bearing a bundle 
 of twigs twisted in a peculiar manner, and smeared with 
 the blood of a goat which had been killed for the 
 purpose. 
 
 That night they were assigned quarters in one of the 
 toldos. Their interpreter explained that it was the custom 
 of his people for the oldest members of the family, such 
 as the grandparents, to be nearest to the fire, the places of 
 the others being assigned by seniority, and strangers coming 
 remotest of all. 
 
 The hut to which Stephen was shown was certainly far 
 from inviting, being filthy in the extreme. All the bones 
 of the animals which had been eaten from time to time 
 seemed to have been thrown upon the earthen floor and 
 left there to fester. 
 
 Long before morning he was unable to endure the horrible 
 stench from these and the bodies of the sleepers, the heat, 
 smoke, and fleas, and was glad to make up a bed from his 
 horse-gear and sleep under the open sky. He could not 
 help comparing these people unfavourably with the cleanly 
 and genial Tehuelches of Patagonia. 
 
 Early next day, upon the invitation of the interpreter, 
 Stephen and his companions went to the top of a neighbour- 
 ing hill, upon which the Indians had built a large fire and 
 were making signals to their friends by means of smoke. 
 This they did at intervals, throwing on the fire an armful 
 of green wood. Away on the horizon, though he would 
 scarcely have noticed them had they not been pointed out by 
 their Indian guide, similar puffs of smoke were rising from 
 various points. These the Indians appeared to read quite 
 intelligibly, and to understand to mean that the messengers 
 who had been sent off the previous night had arrived, and 
 that each village had agreed to send its contingent. 
 
THE TOLDERIA OF THE MATACOS 223 
 
 In the afternoon the bands of warriors began to pour in, 
 and soon there were some hundreds of men assembled, all 
 in war array. Each had put on his war-paint, which had 
 also been assumed during the day by the men in their own 
 tolderia. This was done by blackening their faces with 
 charcoal-dust mixed with fat, while across their forehead 
 and in line with the mouth were drawn two red bands 
 about an inch wide. In such garb the Indians looked 
 horribly fierce. 
 
 It was evident that there was to be little repose that 
 night, for preparations were being made for a great feast. 
 Several mares had been slaughtered, and great joints were 
 roasting at various fires. The warriors, each as they arrived, 
 were presented with a bumper of mare's blood in a cow- 
 horn, which they quaffed with great gusto. Probably this 
 was a symbolical rite. But the excitement was not merely 
 to be kept up by the anticipations of fighting and plunder, 
 for near every fire stood a large earthenware jar filled with 
 a liquor which the interpreter said was a fermented drink 
 made from algarroba beans, and of this the Indians heartily 
 partook, using cow -horns as drinking- vessels. Stephen 
 tried some of the stuff, but found it utterly unpalatable 
 (probably, had he known how it was made, he would not 
 have ventured to taste it). However, the warriors appeared 
 to relish it exceedingly. 
 
 Mick and Sandy were also unable to stomach it. Mick 
 said it reminded him of the story of an Indian who once 
 described drinks as being of two kinds, " the one good for 
 'drinky', the other good for 'drunky'." "I expect," he 
 said, "that this aloja, as they call it, is of the last kind, 
 judging from the results upon these bhoys." 
 
 As the night wore on, the effect of the libations became 
 more and more pronounced. The Indians had lost their 
 habitual gravity of demeanour, and gave vent at times to 
 their rising spirits by exclamations and cries. 
 
 At length, upon a signal given by the chief, the whole 
 
224 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 assembly rose and began the war -dance. Each Indian 
 grasped his weapons, and then the warriors who were to 
 take part in the expedition formed in circles round the 
 fires, with intervals of about a yard and a half between 
 each man. Slowly they began to move round the fire, at 
 first in silence, then to the accompaniment of a monotonous 
 chant, which, however, soon grew in volume and rapidity 
 of utterance. Then one man would take up the leadership, 
 while the whole band would regularly join in the refrain as 
 a chorus. Stephen would notice that the leader usually had 
 a bunch of scalps hanging from his girdle, from which he 
 would take one at a time and address to it a long song. 
 The interpreter told him that he was recounting the story 
 of how he had won it, and promising to capture many more. 
 Gradually the excitement increased. The Indians would 
 clash their weapons together, uttering loud yells. It was a 
 weird sight to watch their dark forms circulating in the 
 firelight to such an accompaniment. For hours did the 
 dance go on, until, utterly worn out, the warriors lay 
 down, and, wrapping themselves in their blankets, fell into 
 a profound sleep. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI 
 
 THE RESCUE OF MANUELITA 
 
 AT early dawn the expedition started, Stephen and his 
 companions, attended by the interpreter, riding near 
 the cacique. 
 
 For the greater part of the day they rode rapidly on, 
 being in their own country and under no need of conceal- 
 ment, but at length in the afternoon they drew up in a 
 thick algarroba wood, in which they carefully hid them- 
 selves and horses and lay down to rest, after having planted 
 sentries at the outskirts. 
 
THE RESCUE OF MANUELITA 
 
 Page 227 
 
THE RESCUE OF MANUELITA 225 
 
 As evening began to come on, scouts were selected to 
 reconnoitre the enemy, whose tolderia, Stephen now learned, 
 was about a league off. These men went out on foot, and 
 each was chosen on account of the ability he had previously 
 shown for such work. The interpreter told Stephen that 
 it was simply marvellous what some of them could do, 
 travelling for miles like snakes in the grass, without giving 
 the slightest indication of their presence. As a proof, he 
 pointed out that some of them had actually corns on their 
 elbows. 
 
 Away they went, and vanished instantly from sight. 
 For the next few hours Stephen and his friends were in 
 a state of nervous tension, but nothing seemed to disturb 
 the stolidity of the Indians. Keenly as Stephen watched 
 the direction in which the scouts had gone, he was unable 
 to make out a movement or to distinguish the slightest 
 sound, until he was startled by the sudden uprising of a 
 dark figure almost at his feet. Soon this scout was fol- 
 lowed by the others, and all went in a body to the chief. 
 
 The Englishmen then heard from the interpreter that all 
 was going on in the enemy's camp as they had anticipated. 
 Following the usual custom of Indians after a successful 
 raid, they were now indulging in a gluttonous orgie, and 
 appeared not to have the slightest suspicion of danger. 
 They were lying about the fires completely gorged with 
 beef, and mostly drunk with aloja. Upon such occasions 
 it is the custom of the women to take away the weapons 
 and hide them, lest those who become irascible in their 
 cups should attack and injure their friends. Everything 
 indicated that the Tobas would become an easy prey if the 
 blow were struck at once. 
 
 The chief of the Matacos lost no time in making his 
 dispositions. He divided his forces into four parties. 
 Three of the divisions were to attack the Tobas' village 
 from different directions, the fourth was to keep up the 
 hill behind the sheltering wood and to cut off the retreat 
 
 (M806) p 
 
226 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 of any who might try to escape in that direction. The 
 signal for the attack was to be given by this party, as they 
 had the farthest distance to travel. Their commander was 
 to throw up a blazing branch in the air when they had 
 reached their position. 
 
 In profound silence the first three troops rode off, and 
 soon afterwards the force led by the cacique, with whom 
 Stephen had remained, took the route slowly towards the 
 doomed village. 
 
 After a long halt within half a mile of the tolderia, the 
 fires of which could be distinctly seen through the dark- 
 ness, the anxiously- awaited signal was perceived. In an 
 instant every man was in saddle, and with blood-curdling 
 yells the Matacos charged upon their enemy's village. 
 
 What followed in the next few minutes can be better 
 imagined than described. It was not a fight, but a mas- 
 sacre. The panic which seized upon the Tobas was 
 appalling, and was rendered even more terrifying, if that 
 were possible, by the shots which Stephen and his friends 
 fired into the crowd round the fires. Each carried a gun 
 and two double-barrelled pistols, which caused the Tobas 
 to yell "Los Christianos! Los Christianos ! " Evidently 
 they thought they were being attacked by Spanish troops 
 sent out to avenge the raid. 
 
 Leaving to their Indian allies the work of slaughter, 
 Stephen and his friends at once»went in search of Manuelita. 
 Some of the Matacos had taken brands from the fires, and 
 set the thatch of the toldos alight, and soon the flames added 
 to the terror of the scene. 
 
 No women had been seen round the camp fires, and the 
 unfortunate girl, they concluded, must therefore be, if in 
 the village at all, within one of the huts, which were now 
 becoming like blazing furnaces, and she was perhaps in 
 imminent risk of a terrible death. 
 
 Like madmen, Stephen, Mick, and Sandy rushed from 
 hut to hut, and at length, with a triumphant yell, Mick 
 
THE RESCUE OF MANUELITA 227 
 
 dragged his sweetheart from a tolda, just in time to save 
 her from being caught by the fall of the burning roof. 
 
 She was in a deplorable state, bound hand and foot with 
 hide ropes, so as to prevent her from trying to escape 
 during the feast, when vigilance might be relaxed, and 
 almost dead with terror from the new attack, of which 
 she could not, of course, understand the meaning. 
 
 Her joy upon recognizing Mick was most affecting, 
 though for a time she was almost swooning from the 
 effects of the severe mental and physical strain which 
 she had undergone during the previous few days. 
 
 The triumph of the Matacos was complete, and was now 
 being celebrated by them with excited yells, while some 
 of them were engaged in the ghastly work of scalping their 
 fallen foes. No quarter had been given. So far as Stephen 
 could judge from the appearance of the bodies, the Tobas 
 seemed to have been a much more handsome race than 
 the tribe with which chance had thrown him into alliance. 
 Tall and well-proportioned, with handsome features even 
 in death, Stephen could not help, in spite of the circum- 
 stances, regretting their wholesale destruction. 
 
 Quickly the Matacos began collecting the cattle, so as 
 to be able to get away before the alarm could spread 
 amongst the allies of the Tobas. Soon after morning the 
 whole tribe were well on their homeward route, driving 
 their booty before them. Manuelita was placed on Mick's 
 horse, he riding behind and carefully holding her in his 
 arms. 
 
 On the evening of the second day, their pace having 
 been delayed by the cattle, they arrived at the Matacos' 
 tolderia, and were welcomed by loud cries of rejoicing. 
 
228 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVII 
 
 UNEXPECTED DIFFICULTIES 
 
 STEPHEN had imagined that the Matacos would now 
 thank them for their services, and allow him, with 
 his friends and Manuelita, to take their departure. He 
 did not, however, understand the Indian nature; for when 
 he proposed, after giving the young woman a few days to 
 recover strength for the journey, that they should make 
 a start, he was met with unexpected opposition from the 
 chief. 
 
 At first the reasons given for this were veiled in hos- 
 pitality — a pretence that they wished to have more of their 
 "Christian" friends' society — but soon the real truth came 
 out. The fact was that the Indians had seen what a 
 powerful assistance to victory over their enemies was the 
 use of the firearms so skilfully handled by the English- 
 men. As they were wholly without metals, their lances 
 and arrows being tipped with deer-horn, there was nothing 
 the Indians so much coveted as the knives, sabres, and guns 
 of the "Christians". But the Spaniards had always made 
 it a strict rule — a wise one, Stephen considered — never to 
 allow the Indians to have such weapons. Now, however, 
 the Matacos saw a chance of not only having at their dis- 
 posal these deadly implements, but also men who knew 
 how to use them, and who could, they believed, be com- 
 pelled to fight in their service. So they had made up 
 their minds that they would attach these "Christians" 
 permanently to their tribe. 
 
 Great was the alarm of the Englishmen when they 
 discovered these intentions and realized that they were 
 virtually captives, watched day and night by ever-vigilant 
 eyes. 
 
 Stephen saw that escape was impossible in the cir- 
 
UNEXPECTED DIFFICULTIES 229 
 
 cumstances unless some unlooked-for chance should present 
 itself. He therefore counselled his friends to appear to 
 take no notice, but to be constantly on the alert for an 
 opportunity to make a dash for freedom. 
 
 Some miserable weeks were spent in this trying position, 
 during which the Englishmen joined the Indians in their 
 hunting and fishing expeditions, and did everything they 
 could to allay any suspicion of their design. But they 
 observed that they were so carefully kept under guard 
 that any attempt at evasion would instantly have been 
 detected. 
 
 Had they been alone they might have chanced a break- 
 away when distant from the camp, trusting for success to 
 their superior arms, but they could not think of deserting 
 Manuelita. At last Stephen resolved to try other tactics, 
 and through the interpreter he asked the cacique what 
 terms he would accept for their ransom. Finally, after 
 long and irritating negotiations, it was agreed that they 
 should give the Indians twenty guns and a supply of 
 ammunition; also about a dozen knives and a quantity of 
 scrap-iron, from which they could manufacture spear-points 
 and arrow-heads. 
 
 To ensure that this bargain would be carried out the 
 cacique stipulated that one of them should remain as a 
 hostage until the arms and other articles had been deli- 
 vered. Now came the delicate point of selecting the 
 hostage. It was quickly settled by Sandy, who pointed 
 out that Stephen must go of course, for only he had the 
 means, by the aid of Don Antonio's credit, to purchase 
 the arms; while Mick must also go perforce, to take care 
 of Manuelita and restore her to her friends. "So there's 
 naething else for it," sighed Sandy, "but I maun stop. 
 Ay, but it'll be a weary time ! " 
 
 Stephen, while admitting the force of the reasons ad- 
 duced, scarcely liked to accept the Scotchman's generous 
 self-sacrifice. Though he did not say so, he feared that it 
 
230 
 
 might take a longer time than Sandy expected to carry out 
 the transaction, since it might even be necessary for him to 
 see Don Antonio in Paraguay in order to get the funds, 
 and then the arms would have to be smuggled out of the 
 Spanish settlements under great difficulties. Nevertheless, 
 he saw no other way open out of their dangerous position. 
 On the very next day, therefore, he, with Mick and 
 Manuelita, started out on their journey to Santa Fe. 
 
 "Dinna be ower anxious aboot me," said Sandy, trying 
 to keep up bravely. " There's no mony tae lament me if 
 the scoondrels tak' it into their heads tae put an end tae 
 me. Whereas you, Mick, an' you tae, Mr. Stephen, if I'm 
 no mistaken," he said significantly, "have them that would 
 greet sair if ony thing happened tae ye." 
 
 When he arrived at Santa Fe, Stephen found himself 
 brought face to face with a new set of difficulties so for- 
 midable that he was almost driven to despair. 
 
 Though only about three months had elapsed since he 
 had left Paraguay, events had moved so rapidly in that 
 country as to completely transform its condition. From 
 Corrientes had come down the news that Dr. Francia, as 
 the result of carefully-planned intrigues, had succeeded in 
 getting himself appointed to the head of the Government, 
 and almost immediately afterwards persuaded the people 
 to place the entire power absolutely in his hands, and to 
 elect him " First Consul of the Paraguayan Kepublic " for 
 life. 
 
 "'First Consul' indeed!" thought Stephen; "he is 
 closely following the footsteps of his ideal, Napoleon, and 
 we all know what that led to." As soon as the doctor had 
 found himself securely in power, he had evidently decided 
 to put in force that policy which he had advocated on the 
 occasion Stephen and Don Antonio had visited him. He 
 now issued decrees setting forth his intention of cutting 
 Paraguay off from all the rest of the world, and no one was 
 to be allowed to enter or leave the country without his 
 
UNEXPECTED DIFFICULTIES 231 
 
 permission. Nor would any export or import trade be 
 permitted unless by bis special sanction. 
 
 Tbis was a cruel blow to Stephen, for not only were bis 
 trading projects, from wbicb be expected to derive a 
 fortune, completely destroyed, but be would even be pre- 
 vented from rejoining his dear friends, Don Antonio and 
 Pepita, without whom life, he thought, was worth nothing. 
 How, also, could he proceed to carry out his bargain with 
 the Matacos, and rescue the devoted Sandy 1 
 
 To add to his troubles, he found that the river was now 
 dominated by a set of men known as the "marinos", 
 mostly runaway sailors from the Spanish navy in those 
 waters, who had taken advantage of the disorderly state of 
 the times to become little else than pirates. Without their 
 permission no one could go up or down the Parana, or even 
 cross into Entrerios on the route to Paraguay. And what 
 about the Tridente 1 Stephen thought in alarm. 
 
 It happened, however, that a few clays later the Tridente 
 actually arrived in the port of Santa Fe. The captain told 
 him that he had fortunately been able to evade the marinos 
 so far, but that he would not dare to proceed farther on 
 the voyage. 
 
 Appalled though he felt by these obstacles, Stephen 
 resolved that he would not give way without a struggle. 
 It happened that Don Antonio had given him the name of 
 a house in Santa Fe to which he might appeal in his name 
 if he found himself in straits. Stephen now went to find 
 these people. To his delight, he found that not only were 
 they disposed to render assistance to their friend, Senor 
 Rodriguez, but that they were in a position to do so 
 effectively. By the aid of private agents they opened 
 negotiations with the commander of the marinos, and by 
 paying a considerable fine they obtained permission for the 
 Tridente to continue her voyage up the river. Stephen 
 then gave instructions that she should not attempt to enter 
 the port of Asuncion, but should make for a point on the 
 
232 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 opposite bank, in front of the city, and there await his 
 orders. The firm also advanced him a sum on Don 
 Antonio's account, which Stephen declared to be necessary, 
 but without specifying the object. With this he was able 
 to purchase the arms and other articles necessary to carry 
 out his treaty with the Matacos. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII 
 
 THROUGH THE GRAN CHACO 
 
 STEPHEN had now before him two important and dim. 
 cult problems to resolve, and that without delay, and 
 there was no possibility of retrieving his position should 
 he come to a wrong decision. 
 
 He had first of all to contrive to convey the arms to the 
 Indians against the severe prohibition of the existing laws, 
 and he had next to decide how he could get into Paraguay 
 in spite of the orders of the Dictator. 
 
 By all accounts, even if he succeeded in crossing the 
 river by permission, or elusion, of the marinos, he would find 
 Entrerios and Corrientes overrun by wandering bands of 
 robbers, who might prevent his progress at any point, and 
 even murder him and his party. 
 
 After long and careful consideration of the circumstances, 
 he finally came to the conclusion that his best course would 
 be to give out that he had resolved upon undertaking a 
 trading journey to the interior provinces of Cordoba and 
 San Juan. In view of this announcement, no suspicion 
 would be aroused by his purchasing arms and ammunition 
 in quantity amongst other goods, and mules upon which to 
 load them. 
 
 By the aid of Mick, who had now placed Manuelita 
 in charge of her friends, he was able to carry out this 
 
THROUGH THE GRAN CHACO 233 
 
 business in a few days, and he had all the goods sent to the 
 "warehouses of Don Antonio's friends. 
 
 While among the Matacos, he had learned that they and 
 their allied tribes held the entire territory on the western 
 side of the Parana River as far north as the Pilcomayo, 
 which flows with the Paraguay River in front of Asuncion, 
 so that he now decided that the best means of reaching 
 Paraguay would be to keep on that side, as probably the 
 Matacos would be able and willing to supply him with a 
 guide. He did not conceal from himself the difficulties of 
 the enterprise, which meant the traversing of the vast 
 unexplored wilderness known as the "Gran Chaco", 
 through which no passage was possible but with the good- 
 will of the various tribes of Indians who claimed it as their 
 own. 
 
 "Isn't it wonderful," he said to Mick, "how out of evil 
 good often comes ! If we had not had to rescue Manuelita, 
 and so been led to make friends with the Matacos, what 
 could we have done now?" 
 
 Stephen had the guns brought to the place where he was 
 living, and there he and Mick carefully took the barrels 
 and the stocks apart, and packed them at the bottom of 
 wicker baskets suitable to load upon mules, the upper part 
 of which was filled with harmless merchandise. He took 
 care to acquire a quantity of goods with which to propitiate 
 the Indians he would meet on his passage through the 
 Gran Chaco. In a few days more they were able to make 
 a start, and got away without molestation, as the authorities 
 were informed that their destination was Cordoba. Nor 
 were they stopped at the frontier, as the disorganized state 
 of the country seemed to have relaxed the vigilance of the 
 customs officers. 
 
 Once clear of the recognized Spanish territory, no further 
 obstacles arose to prevent their journey to the tolderias of 
 the Matacos. There they were received with great en- 
 thusiasm, especially by Sandy, who said to Stephen: "Man! 
 
234 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 I sometimes was feart ye were never coming! Ah, but it's 
 been a dreich wearisome time wi' me since ye left." 
 
 The guns were delivered to the cacique, also the knives 
 and iron, and the Indians could scarcely contain their joy 
 upon receiving them, especially as Stephen had brought 
 even more than he had bargained for. 
 
 The grim face of the cacique relaxed, and he appeared 
 to be in such a pleasant humour that Stephen thought it 
 would be a good opportunity to ask him to assist him in 
 carrying out his adventurous journey. 
 
 Instantly a change came over the countenance of the 
 chief. "You know not what you ask," he said. "Never 
 has a Christian been allowed to cross that territory. We 
 Indians know too well what would probably be the result 
 if the white men became acquainted with its richness. 
 Besides, it is a long way; many, many days, and none of 
 our people know all the way." 
 
 Here was another difficulty, and Stephen thanked his 
 stars that he had had so much foresight as to provide 
 himself with a sufficient quantity of such things as he knew 
 were coveted by, and irresistible to, the Indians, to enable 
 him to buy his way through. Bat it took a long time and 
 much negotiation before he could satisfy the demands of 
 the greedy chief, and of the wily interpreter, who had been 
 chosen as the best guide. 
 
 Patience and perseverance, however, generally win in the 
 end, and finally the three " Cristianos " were allowed to set 
 out upon their long journey through the unknown wilds. 
 
 It is needless, even were it possible, to recount the many 
 incidents and perilous adventures through which the party 
 passed upon that protracted and hazardous expedition. But 
 for the anxiety which Stephen constantly felt with regard 
 to the safety of Don Antonio and Pepita, and the success of 
 their commercial undertaking, he would have thoroughly 
 enjoyed this voyage of exploration through lands which 
 no white man had ever before seen. They traversed vast 
 
THROUGH THE GRAN CHACO 235 
 
 tangled forests, the haunt of the jaguar, wading through 
 leagues of marsh and palm swamp, but frequently also came 
 upon fertile regions destined in time to be the site of pros- 
 perous civilized settlements, followed up by tracts of desert 
 only passable at the cost of great hardships and dangers. 
 A token which their guide bore from the cacique of the 
 Matacos everywhere secured them friendly welcome from 
 the Indians, while the presents Stephen was able to give 
 assured them of hearty good-will and assistance. But these 
 people place no value upon time, and were unable to under- 
 stand why the " Cristianoc v were so eager to press on, and 
 it was frequently necessary to remain for days at a tolderia 
 in order to appease them. It was more than two months 
 after they left the tolderia of the Matacos that they rode, 
 one afternoon, into an Indian village at the junction of the 
 rivers Pilcomayo and Paraguay, whence, looking across the 
 latter, they could see the lights of the city of Asuncion. 
 
 There was little beyond its topographical position to 
 distinguish this village from the hundreds of Indian tolderias 
 through which the party had passed on their way through 
 the Gran Chaco. The proximity of a civilized country like 
 Paraguay, only separated from it by a river a few hundred 
 yards wide, appeared to have had no effect upon the bar- 
 barism of its inhabitants. They, however, extended to the 
 travellers such hospitality as they could offer, which, if 
 rough, was apparently well meant. 
 
 Having carried out the formalities customary upon 
 arrival, the guide informed Stephen that he had learned 
 from the cacique that a " Christian " was lying ill in one of 
 the toldos, and would like to see them. 
 
 Stephen and his companions at once went to the hut 
 pointed out to them. There they found, lying upon a pile 
 of skins, an old man having the appearance of a priest, 
 though so worn with sickness, unshaven and dishevelled, 
 dirty and ragged, that it was difficult to discern through the 
 smoky atmosphere of the hut that he could possibly be of 
 
236 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 European race. Great was their astonishment to find, after 
 exchanging a few words, that he was none other than the 
 venerable Father Anselmo, whom they had met a few 
 months before when on their tour through the district of 
 the old Jesuit missions. With almost equal surprise, though 
 too weak for emotion, the aged priest recognized his former 
 visitors. 
 
 "Ah, my friends!" he exclaimed in a mournful tone, 
 " the hand of God has fallen heavily upon me and upon my 
 country. His will be done! But, oh, that terrible man!" 
 His words greatly alarmed Stephen, who had long felt that 
 affairs in Paraguay could not be going well under the 
 unchecked sway of such a man as Dr. Francia. Neverthe- 
 less he curbed his impatience, and did all in his power to 
 render more comfortable the condition of the invalid. 
 Cheered as much by the presence of Europeans as by their 
 attentions, Father Anselmo recovered sufficiently to be able 
 to give them an account of the principal events which had 
 happened since they left Paraguay. 
 
 They had already heard how Dr. Francia had succeeded, 
 apparently in a constitutional manner, in getting himself 
 elected as the head of the Government, and shortly after- 
 wards appointed First Consul for life with absolute power. 
 Very soon, Father Anselmo told them, he began to make 
 use of this power in an arbitrary and extraordinary manner, 
 such as his poor deluded countrymen, who had placed it in 
 his hands, could never have imagined or dreamt of. Those 
 who dared to remonstrate with him had met with such 
 treatment as to serve all others with a terrorizing warning 
 not to interfere. Men did not now venture to criticise 
 the Dictator's conduct, even to members of their families 
 and in the privacy of their homes; for this awful man, 
 who really appeared to be a magician, seemed to hear 
 every word that was spoken, and even to divine unspoken 
 thoughts. His vengeance was swift and implacable, without 
 possibility of escape for the victim, for the arm of his power 
 
THROUGH THE GRAN CHACO 237 
 
 was very long. Already he had remorselessly sent many of 
 the strongest of his foes to the scaffold. He had shut off 
 the country from all intercourse with those outside. No 
 one could now enter or leave it without his permission. 
 People were not allowed to be out of their houses after 
 dark, except by his authority. "He has gone further," 
 almost shrieked the priest; "he has dared to lay his hands 
 upon the Lord's anointed, he has closed all the churches, 
 and expelled the clergy from the country. That is why I 
 am here, left stranded, too weak to follow my unfortunate 
 brethren — I, who was living so peaceful a life, so far remote 
 that one would have thought my existence was quite un- 
 known." 
 
 Stephen was in agony to learn the fate of his friends Don 
 Antonio and Pepita, but Father Anselmo was too excited to 
 give heed to his enquiries. 
 
 "The tyrant," he continued, "has surrounded himself 
 with men scarcely less wicked than their master, fitting 
 instruments to carry out his villainous designs. Chief 
 amongst them are that execrable wretch, the late governor 
 of my province, Don Ignacio Lopez, whom he has made his 
 minister, and Captain Rugerio, a military adventurer from 
 no one knows where." 
 
 At length Stephen managed to get the old man to attend 
 to his repeated questions. 
 
 From the priest's disjointed answers he learned the 
 position of his friends to be as follows : — 
 
 Senor Rodriguez was, of course, far too influential a man 
 for the Dictator to leave alone, so he had been notified to 
 keep in his country house and consider himself as under 
 arrest within the bounds of his property. So far he had 
 not been otherwise molested, and it was thought that the 
 First Consul would not readily take further steps against 
 him unless Don Antonio by some action gave him a pretext, 
 which he was far too prudent a man to do. 
 
 "But what have I been thinking of!" suddenly exclaimed 
 
238 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Father Anselmo. " Here is something which was put into 
 my hands just before I left, which may tell you more than I 
 can." So saying, he brought from the folds of his soutane 
 a crumpled piece of paper. 
 
 Stephen seized it eagerly, and at once, though it bore no 
 signature, recognized the writing of Don Antonio. 
 
 It was but a brief note, cautiously worded, saying that as 
 he, Don Antonio, had learned of the intended journey of 
 Father Anselmo to Corrientes he had made use of this 
 means of communication to warn Stephen, if it should 
 reach him, not to endeavour to return to Paraguay for the 
 present, as it would only complicate matters and might 
 increase the danger in which the writer realized that he 
 stood. He therefore requested him to wait at Corrientes 
 with the schooner, where he hoped to be able to rejoin him 
 soon. In any case, he believed that he could always inform 
 him how matters were going in Paraguay through certain 
 agents he had in that city. While relieved from his most 
 serious apprehensions, Stephen felt exceedingly reluctant to 
 go back when he had got so near to his goal; but he recog- 
 nized the wisdom of Don Antonio's advice, and felt that he 
 had no option but to obey. 
 
 After a few days' careful nursing Father Anselmo was 
 sufficiently recovered to undertake a journey by easy stages, 
 and the whole party set out by a route along the right bank 
 of the Paraguay. 
 
 After a tedious journey they reached a point opposite 
 Corrientes. There they found but little difficulty in being 
 ferried across to the town. 
 
 To his delight Stephen learned that the Tridente had 
 arrived in the port only a few days previously. She had 
 made a very lengthy passage owing to adverse winds, and 
 by taking the precaution of working up only by night, 
 which the captain thought necessary to avoid attack or 
 capture by the numerous piratical craft reported to be on 
 the river. 
 
THE JESUITS' TREASURE 239 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX 
 
 THE JESUITS' TREASURE 
 
 THERE was nothing now to be done but to wait at 
 Corrientes until the arrival of the promised com- 
 munication from Don Antonio. It was a weary life, this 
 stagnation, after the excitement of the previous months, 
 and as day after day dragged monotonously by, bringing 
 no tidings, the constant anxiety with regard to the safety 
 of his friends and the enforced inaction preyed seriously 
 upon Stephen's spirits. 
 
 One evening while he was strolling along the river bank 
 with Father Anselmo, and after a prolonged pause in which 
 each seemed busy with his own thoughts, the old priest 
 suddenly said: "I see, my son, that this standing still is 
 wearing you out; it is but natural to youth, we old men 
 have learned hoAv to wait. Now I have been thinking of 
 something we might do, which, if carried out successfully, 
 would bring us a great reward; but it will be a difficult 
 and perhaps a dangerous task." Stephen was instantly 
 aroused to attention, and eagerly questioned his friend for 
 further particulars. 
 
 But the old man was not to be hurried, and Stephen had 
 to curb his impatience until they had found a retired spot 
 where they could talk without fear of being overheard. 
 
 "I believe I can trust you," at length said Father 
 Anselmo, "and that I can rely upon your carrying out 
 any conditions I may impose; or, if you find them unaccept- 
 able, that you will at least respect my confidence." 
 
 Stephen readily expressed acquiescence. 
 
 "And now, what I have to say," resumed the priest, "is 
 that I know where there is a great treasure concealed, and 
 that it might be possible to bring it away. But it will need 
 brave hearts and strong arms." 
 
240 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 "And these, Father," cried Stephen, "you have at your 
 disposal, for I presume you will want my companions' aid 
 as well as mine." 
 
 "Yes," replied the old man, "we shall need their services 
 if we decide upon the undertaking; and now let me explain. 
 Do you remember an allusion to treasure I made when I 
 first met you 1 ?" 
 
 Stephen remembered it well, and said that he had often 
 since wondered what it meant. 
 
 Father Anselmo then went on to relate how, when the 
 Jesuits had been expelled from Paraguay without an hour's 
 warning about forty -five years previously, they had, of 
 course, to leave behind the great property they had 
 amassed. Much of this consisted of lands and cattle; but 
 in the churches and in the monasteries there was also an 
 accumulation of enormous wealth in the form of gold, sil- 
 ver, and jewels. The guards who had been sent to effect 
 the expulsion had been too busy in the first few hours 
 looking after their prisoners to think of anything else. 
 Meanwhile a few devoted friends of the order, like him- 
 self (then a secular priest), had quietly collected such valu- 
 ables and concealed them in a safe place until the Jesuits 
 should return, which they then thought would be soon. 
 
 "Alas!" said the old man, "our hopes were disappointed ; 
 but I have always regarded these treasures as held in trust 
 for their rightful owners, and even now I will not be a 
 party to recovering them unless it is agreed that at least 
 one-half of their value be restored to the Holy Order of 
 Jesus." 
 
 Stephen readily accepted this stipulation, which he told 
 the venerable priest did him honour. He then enquired 
 what value the treasure he spoke of might have. 
 
 "It is difficult to tell," said Father Anselmo, "but I 
 should say that it would be worth at the very least some 
 two hundred thousand gold dollars (£40,000). 
 
 Stephen, upon hearing of such a prize, was naturally very 
 
241 
 
 much excited, and he eagerly plied Father Anselmo with 
 questions as to what would have to be done to secure it. 
 The old priest, still very cautious from long habit, gradually 
 informed him that the treasure was buried at a spot not 
 far from the ruined church where they had first met. To 
 reach it they must take a boat up the Alto Parana, which 
 joined the Paraguay River near the place where they were. 
 The journey upwards might take about four days and the 
 return about three, while the recovery of the treasure 
 might occupy two days more. 
 
 Stephen at once urged Father Anselmo to authorize him 
 to undertake the expedition. But as he spoke, the thought 
 suddenly occurred to him, " What if a message from Don 
 Antonio should arrive while we are gone?" and his heart 
 fell, for not even for the sake of so great a gain could he 
 abandon his duty to his friend. 
 
 He explained this thought to the father, who quite saw 
 the force of it, and remarked resignedly: "My son, we must 
 be guided by Providence. If God wills us to go, the way 
 will be opened." 
 
 It seemed as if the venerable priest's words were pro- 
 phetic, for next day Stephen heard from Don Antonio's 
 agents that they had just received a message by some 
 mysterious means announcing that he had decided to at- 
 tempt to leave Paraguay with his daughter, and that he 
 would not take the direct way from Asuncion down the 
 river, as that was too well watched, but would come by a 
 circuitous route to the opposite bank of the Alto Parana, 
 and cross to Corrientes. It would be some weeks at least 
 before he could start, even if all went well. 
 
 After several consultations, in which the two sailors were 
 taken into their confidence, it was finally decided that the 
 attempt should be made. It was arranged that of what- 
 ever treasure was recovered the representatives of the 
 Jesuits at Buenos Ayres were to receive one-half; of the 
 remainder, Stephen was to take one-half, and Sandy and 
 
 (M806) Q 
 
242 IN THE dictator's grip 
 
 Mick one-quarter each. Father Anselmo claimed nothing 
 for himself, being content, he said, to rely upon what the 
 Jesuits would give him as a reward. 
 
 Instead of going up in a canoe, as Father Anselmo had 
 originally proposed, Stephen, as representative of Don 
 Antonio, obtained the use of the Tridente's roomy boat, 
 which was provided with a mast and sails, and was of 
 sufficient capacity to carry down the heavy load of treasure, 
 should they find it. It was well provisioned for the jour- 
 ney, and spades and picks were easily procured in Corrientes. 
 
 It was given out that the Englishmen had offered to 
 accompany Father Anselmo to his former home to bring 
 away some little property of his, which he had not had 
 time to remove when the priests were expelled by Dr. 
 Francia; so no undue curiosity was awakened. 
 
 On the evening of the fourth day of the voyage Father 
 Anselmo at length intimated that they had reached the spot 
 where they must leave their boat. They therefore moored 
 to a tree for the night. 
 
 Their progress, when they landed next morning, was 
 terribly hindered for the first few hundred yards by tho 
 difficulty of forcing their way through a thick jungle of 
 undergrowth, the branches of which, many of them armed 
 with sharp spines, were so interlaced that a passage could 
 only be made by the use of cutlasses, and at a cost of 
 lacerated flesh and torn clothes. At length they emerged 
 into a more open forest, and finally reached land which 
 looked like a carefully-laid-out park. 
 
 The party could scarcely help pausing to admire the 
 beauty of the scene. Father Anselmo was especially 
 affected, as he was gazing again upon a place which called 
 up many old associations. Thoroughly familiar with the 
 locality, he led them without hesitation towards the village 
 which had been for many years the field of his devoted 
 labours. 
 
 A piteous sight met their eyes when they arrived. Of 
 
THE JESUITS TREASURE 243 
 
 the huts where his simple flock had lived so happily there 
 remained but a few blackened embers, and even the ancient 
 church had not been spared. The charred beams of its 
 roof had fallen in disordered piles across its floor. The old 
 man could not restrain his tears. "Alas, my children!" he 
 cried; "what has been your fate?" 
 
 The whole place was completely deserted, and looked 
 a picture of desolation. 
 
 Presently Father Anselmo explained that what had hap- 
 pened would add greatly to the difficulty of their task. 
 The treasure had been buried beneath the floor of the 
 church in a vault which had been prepared for such 
 eventualities, the entrance to which had been carefully 
 concealed, and was only discoverable by those who held 
 the clue to the secret. A flag-stone had to be raised at a 
 point where formerly the shadow of the head of a saint's 
 statue standing in one of the windows was projected on the 
 floor when the sun had risen to a certain height, but now 
 the floor was encumbered and the image was gone. 
 
 The first step was to clear a space on what had been the 
 floor as near what had been the site of the vault as the 
 priest could remember. To this work they applied them- 
 selves at once, but it was so toilsome and difficult, as well 
 as dangerous on account of the numerous scorpions and 
 venomous insects which had made their haunts in the 
 fallen debris, that but slow progress was made. The 
 evening shadows warned them that they would have to 
 camp there for the night. In such a climate this was 'no 
 great hardship, especially to seasoned campaigners, and 
 even the aged Father Anselmo seemed to bear up with 
 renewed vigour. Soon, however, they realized that there 
 were unexpected dangers. The place, since it had been 
 deserted by its inhabitants, appeared to have been made a 
 special resort by wild beasts, and almost as soon as the 
 darkness set in it became alive with their cries. All night 
 long the jaguars prowled round with their angry snarls, 
 
244 IN the dictator's grip 
 
 threatening at any moment to spring upon one of the 
 party. It was only by keeping up a great fire and occa- 
 sionally tossing lighted brands into the trees that they 
 could obtain some sense of security. 
 
 As early as daylight permitted, the work was resumed, 
 and carried on with such vigour that soon Father Anselmo 
 told them they had cleared away enough for his purpose. 
 They had been encouraged by finding that a considerable 
 area of the tiled floor still remained intact. The priest asked 
 them to sweep it carefully with boughs. This being done, 
 he entered upon his search after first kneeling down and 
 making obeisance towards the place where the grand altar 
 had once stood. He carefully examined the flags, traversing 
 them row after row, and at length he exclaimed excitedly, 
 "Praise to our Lady, I have found the spot!" 
 
 He then related that he had often prayed over the site 
 of the buried treasure for the return of the Jesuits, and in 
 these hours of devotion he had almost unconsciously noted 
 certain minute peculiarities of the flags, amongst them a 
 crack which appeared in his fancy to outline the head of 
 a saint, and this he now recognized. A few strokes of a 
 pick soon revealed the fact that the venerable priest was 
 not mistaken ; for when the flags were raised, an iron ring, 
 lying flat, was disclosed, which Father Anselmo declared to 
 be attached to the trap -door of the vault. A vigorous 
 push upon the end of a pole thrust through the ring proved 
 that his assertion was correct, for the trap was raised and 
 the opening was displayed. 
 
 Stephen at once leapt into the vault, involuntarily 
 recalling his old adventure in the smuggler's cave near 
 Bristol. He found it stored with strong wooden chests 
 set upon stone shelves round the walls. Their weight, 
 when he tried to move them, seemed to prove that Father 
 Anselmo's story was no myth. 
 
 By the aid of the sailors, and the use of levers and picks 
 as wedges, they were soon able to force open the lid of 
 
THE JESUITS' TREASURE 245 
 
 some of the chests, and were enchanted to find them full of 
 bags of money and jewels; whilst a large number of solid 
 silver pillars, which had at one time formed the balustrade 
 in front of the grand altar, stood in one corner. 
 
 But, having discovered the treasure, the tantalizing 
 thought arose, "How is it to be taken away?" There was 
 apparently no help for transporting such a load to be 
 obtained in the neighbourhood, and even if they decided 
 to carry it down to the boat on their shoulders, it would 
 take them weeks to accomplish the task. Meanwhile there 
 would be the risk of discovery by the ubiquitous myrmidons 
 of the Dictator. 
 
 While they were debating this perplexing problem, they 
 were startled by the sudden appearance of an Indian, who 
 had stolen upon them silently and unperceived. Upon 
 recognizing Father Anselmo, however, he had at once left 
 his concealment and thrown himself at the priest's feet, 
 where he knelt with many demonstrations of reverence and 
 affection. The venerable pastor showed that he was no 
 less delighted with the meeting. He conversed with his 
 humble friend for a long time in the Indian dialect. At 
 length, turning to the young men, he exclaimed: "This is 
 indeed a providential deliverance out of our difficulty. This 
 man was formerly one of my flock, and he tells me that 
 his tribe, all of whom are devoted to me, are encamped in 
 the woods but a short distance away. I have asked him 
 to bring them to our aid. These people are accustomed to 
 bear heavy loads for long distances through the woods, and 
 as there is a large number of them, by dividing up the 
 treasure into small parcels we may soon be able to trans- 
 port it to the river. These Indians are as honest as the 
 day, and I question if they will be able to form any idea 
 of the value of the things we shall confide to their care. 
 At any rate it will be enough for them to know that they 
 are doing me a service." 
 
 In about an hour the Indian returned accompanied by 
 
246 IN THE DICTATORS GRIP 
 
 his friends. There were about a hundred of them, men 
 and women, all of whom saluted Father Anselmo joyously 
 but reverently. 
 
 Stephen and his men had in the meantime been busy 
 making up the treasure into small parcels, each of which 
 could easily be carried on the head of an Indian. Mick 
 was sent off with the first party to guide them to the boat, 
 and he remained there to stow the precious freight. All 
 the afternoon the Indians kept coming and going like a 
 stream of ants, and by the evening the treasure-seekers had 
 the satisfaction of accompanying the last party of willing 
 porters, and of seeing the whole treasure embarked. 
 
 Father Anselmo gave the helpful Indians his blessing, 
 and parted from them with much regret. 
 
 During the next two days, as they rapidly sailed down 
 the river with favourable wind and current, the question 
 was seriously debated as to what they should do to secure 
 the treasure until the time came when they could carry it 
 down safely to Buenos Ayres. Finally it was decided to 
 bury it on the southern bank of the river at some secluded 
 spot within easy reach of Corrientes. And this they did 
 without interruption, in a little creek which they could 
 easily recognize when, as they hoped, they would return 
 with the schooner. 
 
 CHAPTEK XL 
 
 TERRIBLE NEWS 
 
 STEPHEN was happier than he had been for months 
 when, after having concealed their precious freight, 
 the boat was gently drifting onwards towards Corrientes. 
 His first thought was that now, even though his hopes of 
 success from the trading venture had been dashed to the 
 ground by the unexpected change of affairs in Paraguay, 
 
TERRIBLE NEWS 247 
 
 he had at last secured for himself a fortune which would 
 place him in no unfitting position to aspire to the hand of 
 Pepita, and he looked forward with eager anticipation to 
 meeting her and Don Antonio within a very short time, 
 safe beyond the power of the terrible Dictator of Paraguay. 
 
 His companions had also every reason to be satisfied 
 with the result of the expedition, and it was in the most 
 cheerful frame of mind that they talked of their prospects 
 and what they would do with their money. 
 
 They had just rounded a bend of the river when they 
 observed a canoe approaching them, urged on with all the 
 force of the strong Indian paddlers, and they soon under- 
 stood from the signals, which a man in the stern was 
 making, that they wished to communicate with them. In 
 a few seconds the canoe was alongside, and the steersman 
 handed to Stephen a letter, which he said he had been 
 asked by Don Antonio's agents in Corrientes to deliver 
 without delay. Stephen tore it open with feverish haste. 
 It contained terrible news. A message had reached the 
 agents that Seiior Rodriguez and his daughter had, while 
 on their way southwards, been captured by Dr. Francia's 
 troops, and that Don Antonio was now a prisoner in Asun- 
 cion, while Pepita had been allowed to go to some friends 
 in the town. 
 
 It was feared that the Dictator might any day wreak his 
 vengeance upon Don Antonio by putting him to death, as 
 he had already done with so many whom he considered his 
 rivals or opponents. 
 
 This news threw Stephen and his companions into a 
 fever of anxiety. They decided that they must go to the 
 rescue of their friends as quickly as possible. The oars 
 were at once thrown out, and the boat urged on at highest 
 speed to Corrientes. Arrived there, Stephen immediately 
 gave orders for the Tridente to get ready to sail up the 
 Paraguay, for he felt that she would be needed to bring 
 back his friends should he succeed in rescuing them. 
 
248 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 The captain was ordered to make for the Indian village 
 opposite Asuncion where they had found Father Anselmo. 
 The aged priest insisted upon going up with the schooner, 
 as he felt that he must help if he could. Without delay 
 Stephen and his companions crossed the River Paraguay, 
 taking their riding-gear only; they knew from past ex- 
 perience that they could get plenty of horses from the 
 Chaco Indians. 
 
 On through the Chaco they pursued their way, taking 
 but little rest upon the journey, until, within what would 
 have appeared to them in other circumstances an incredibly 
 short time, they arrived at last at the tolderia in front of 
 Asuncion. 
 
 But even then Stephen felt that he could not rest. Con- 
 stantly there was before him the thought of Don Antonio 
 a prisoner, likely to be put to death at any moment, and 
 Pepita, driven from her happy home, in constant suspense 
 and misery. Oh, he must go to them at once ! 
 
 But how 1 But how 1 
 
 Between him and Asuncion lay the swift -flowing river, 
 too broad for the strongest swimmer to cross, even if he 
 escaped the jacards (alligators) and the palometas, fierce shark- 
 like fishes, which would soon drag down any man who 
 ventured into the water. Could a boat be found ? 
 
 Through enquiries he soon learned that an Indian living 
 not far off owned a piroga or canoe, and at once Stephen 
 and his party went in search of this man, whom they found 
 without difficulty, and who readily agreed to let out the 
 frail craft for as long as was desired, in exchange for a 
 knife. 
 
 The canoe was only a tree-trunk hollowed out, and 
 scarcely capable of carrying one person. It was easy to 
 see that great skill would be required to manage it, and to 
 avoid being upset, especially in such a swift current. 
 
 Sandy and Mick earnestly begged Stephen not to attempt 
 such a risky passage, but he would not listen to them. 
 
A HEAVEN-SENT DELIVERER 249 
 
 He had only the one thought — Pepita and her father were 
 in peril, and he must go to them. 
 
 He asked his companions to go back to the Indian village,, 
 and promised to return in three days if possible. They 
 were also to ride down the river daily, and keep a good 
 look-out for the Tridente, which ought now to be not far 
 away. Should she arrive, they were to keep her there- 
 until he returned. 
 
 CHAPTER XLI 
 
 A HEAVEN-SENT DELIVERER 
 
 FOLLOWING the advice of the Indian boatman, Stephen 
 paddled slowly up the river, keeping close into the 
 continuous fringe of reeds and bamboos on the near side, 
 until he appeared to be a mile or so above the town. As 
 his friends had anticipated, he found that it was only with 
 the greatest care that he could manage the paddle and keep 
 the canoe from overturning. It was a trying position; 
 darkness was coming on, and not a soul was in sight. 
 Frequently he was startled by the plunge of a carpincho 
 (water-hog) into the river, or by the snort of a great un- 
 wieldly tapir swimming close by. From some mud-banks 
 the horrid, black, scaly forms of three or four jacares (alli- 
 gators) slowly slid off as he approached. As the darkness- 
 increased, the cries of the denizens of the neighbouring 
 forest, the snarl of the jaguar, the shriek of the peccary, 
 and the hoarse growl of the puma, arose, adding to the 
 eeriness of his position. A cloud of mosquitoes and other 
 stinging insects continually surrounded him, driving him 
 nearly mad. 
 
 At length he determined to attempt the crossing, and, 
 nerving himself for the great effort, he made for the 
 opposite shore. To his satisfaction he found that the- 
 
250 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 water, though swift- running, was unbroken, and his pre- 
 liminary up-river stretch had taught him how to manage 
 the boat. He struck out, therefore, with more confidence, 
 and was soon pleased to see that he would probably be able 
 to get across without accident. He began to consider where 
 he would land. All the usual landing-places, he knew, from 
 Father Anselmo's account, were watched constantly by the 
 Dictator's sentries. To attempt to go on shore at them 
 would mean immediate arrest. 
 
 Finally he decided to land, if possible, upon a little point 
 which he could just discern upon the shore. From his 
 previous acquaintance with Asuncion, he knew that this 
 was the site of the Panteon (cemetery), a place shunned at 
 night by the natives with superstitious dread, where even 
 the power of the Dictator would scarcely be sufficient to 
 induce them to remain. By skill and good fortune he was 
 able to carry out this design, and having reached the shore, 
 he carefully concealed the canoe among the rushes. As he 
 expected, he found the Panteon solitary and unwatched, 
 left to the solemnity of its silent occupants. A death-like 
 shudder passed through him as he made his way among 
 the clustered crosses, and realized the risk and difficulty of 
 his mission. 
 
 Not a person did he meet as he cautiously made his way 
 into the town. He was oppressed with the dreadful still- 
 ness of the place, so different from the state of the town 
 upon his previous visit. No longer were the sound of 
 cheerful voices, the tinkling of the guitar, and the lively 
 song heard from each house. All was mute as the grave. 
 But for his knowledge of the cause, the Dictator's dread 
 decree, he would have believed it to be a city of the 
 dead. 
 
 But how was he to find Pepita? There was no one in 
 the street he could ask, and every door was shut, while 
 the occupants were probably shrinking behind them, too 
 timorous to respond to a summons. 
 
A HEAVEN-SENT DELIVERER 251 
 
 Keeping in the shadow of the trees by the roadside lest 
 any lurking spies of the tyrant might observe him, he 
 wandered about in perplexity. Suddenly an owl hooted 
 overhead. 
 
 Like a flash there flew through his brain the thought 
 that he had found a means whereby he might discover 
 Pepita. 
 
 Slowly advancing along the rear of the houses, he from 
 time to time gave utterance to the hooting cry "Pep-eet-ta! 
 Pep-eet-ta!" like some night owl, just as he and Don 
 Antonio used to do on the ship, trembling the while with 
 anxiety. For a time there was no response, but presently 
 he fancied he saw a curtain being drawn aside in a window. 
 Cautiously he approached the house, and once more uttered 
 the signal. 
 
 This time there could be no mistake; evidently someone 
 was watching, and immediately he heard a voice call out in 
 low, nervous tones : " Who is there ?" 
 
 Quickly he responded. "It is I — Stephen. Is it you, 
 Pepita?" 
 
 The reply, "Ay, Dios Mio! Thanks, Blessed Virgin!" 
 assured him that he had in reality found the object of his 
 anxious quest. 
 
 Soon he heard the bolts of the door withdrawn, and 
 with infinite caution it was opened, and he crept into 
 the house in darkness. A candle was now lit, and with 
 rapture he found himself once more in the presence of 
 the loved one, whose image was always before his mental 
 vision. 
 
 Yes it was Pepita, but not the Pepita he had left behind 
 him a few short months ago. No longer the bright joyous 
 countenance, careless and happy, but a woman upon whose 
 brow mantled a cloud of care. Her face was drawn and 
 pale, and her demeanour sad and troubled. Yet for a 
 moment as she welcomed him there flashed over her 
 features that same old look that he remembered so well — 
 
252 IN the dictator's grip 
 
 a flush of joy as she involuntarily uttered the words : " Oh, 
 my darling! my love! God has sent you to deliver us." 
 
 In other circumstances these words, that look, would 
 have sent Stephen into a delirium of joy, and for long after- 
 wards he treasured the remembrance of that welcome, for 
 was it not an acknowledgment that the ardent passion he 
 had so long silently cherished was returned. 
 
 The light was carefully screened to prevent it from being 
 seen from outside, and the lovers proceeded to recount to 
 each other their story. Stephen had already heard of Don 
 Antonio's terrible position, but he now learned from 
 Pepita something which added to its horrors. She told 
 him that ever since her poor father had been cast into 
 prison she had been persecuted by the villainous Don 
 Ignacio Lopez, who had never forgotten the passion she 
 had roused in his breast when they were fellow-passengers 
 on La Purisima Conception. Feeling a great abhorrence for 
 this man, she had not hesitated to repel his advances, or 
 to conceal from him her dislike and disdain. But, foiled 
 in his direct approaches, he now sought to accomplish 
 his ends by other means, which were quite in keeping 
 with his odious character. He had brutally intimated to 
 the girl that unless she accepted him as a suitor, and con- 
 sented to marry him within a month, he would use his 
 influence with Dr. Francia to have her father put to death. 
 Everyone knew only too well that Lopez's influence with 
 the Dictator was all-powerful, so that this was no empty 
 threat. 
 
 No marvel was it that Pepita had been driven to utter 
 despair, and had welcomed Stephen as a heaven-sent 
 deliverer. 
 
 Far into the night did the lovers discuss their plans for 
 effecting Don Antonio's deliverance, until Stephen at last 
 persuaded Pepita to retire to rest, while he himself sank 
 into a hammock, utterly worn out with the fatigues and 
 anxieties of the day. 
 
A VISIT TO THE PRISON. A KNOTTY PROBLEM 253 
 
 CHAPTER XLII 
 
 A VISIT TO THE PRISON. A KNOTTY PROBLEM 
 
 THE friends with whom Pepita had taken shelter, to 
 whom Stephen was duly presented next morning, 
 Were an elderly man, Don Rufino Gomez, a very old 
 acquaintance of Don Antonio, who was a widower, and 
 his maiden sister Dona Prudencia, and, as Pepita ex- 
 plained, they were thoroughly to be relied upon. Their 
 greatest wish was first to secure the release of Don Antonio, 
 and then to escape from the country, away from the odious 
 tyranny of Francia. 
 
 By their aid Stephen was provided with a costume like 
 that worn by the Paraguayan peasantry, and when he had 
 donned this and dyed his complexion somewhat darker, he 
 felt comparatively secure in setting out to reconnoitre the 
 surroundings of the place of Don Antonio's captivity. 
 
 The building which had been converted by Dr. Francia 
 into a state prison had formerly been a villa belonging 
 to some prosperous resident. It stood within its own 
 grounds a little way out of the town, and was sur- 
 rounded by an open space which had been the garden of 
 its owner. 
 
 Stephen observed, with a somewhat despairing heart, 
 that the Dictator apparently relied for the security of his 
 prisoners more upon the vigilance of his sentries, who were 
 constantly upon guard on every side, than upon the strength 
 of the walls, or bolts and bars. 
 
 He did not, however, venture to make too close an in- 
 spection, for to have approached the building without 
 some ostensible purpose would certainly have exposed him 
 to suspicion and possibly to arrest. He noticed, however, 
 that several itinerant vendors of provisions and fruit were 
 allowed to approach the house and to hold converse with. 
 
254 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the prisoners through the grated windows. Apparently 
 those confined had to provide for themselves. 
 
 This gave him an idea, upon which he was not slow to 
 act. He at once procured a basket of fruit, and in the 
 centre of a melon he concealed a note to Don Antonio 
 announcing his presence, and holding forth a hope of a 
 speedy release. 
 
 The note he wrote in English, feeling confident that no 
 one in Paraguay but Don Antonio was likely to be able to 
 decipher it, even if it fell into the hands of the authorities. 
 
 Slouching his broad hat over his features he made for 
 the prison. All went as well as he could have desired. 
 The clamour of the fruit-vendors brought every prisoner to 
 the window, for even if they had not the means wherewith 
 to buy, the scene was at least a brief relief to their mono- 
 tonous captivity. 
 
 With difficulty did Stephen restrain a gesture which 
 might have betrayed him, when he first caught sight of his 
 old friend. So great had been the effects of confinement 
 and anxiety upon him that he appeared to have aged by 
 at least ten years within the six months which had passed 
 since they had separated. He had a long white beard, and 
 his face was furrowed with deep wrinkles. Instead of the 
 alert, active manner, so well remembered by Stephen, Don 
 Antonio now crossed his narrow chamber with the dragging 
 steps of a feeble old man. Stephen saw that his hand shook, 
 as if with palsy, as he grasped the window bars. 
 
 Don Antonio's attention was quickly directed to Stephen, 
 as he alone, amongst the hawkers, spoke Spanish; the 
 others in offering their wares shouted in the Guarani 
 language. 
 
 After purchasing a few oranges, Don Antonio was about 
 to retire when Stephen pressed him to accept a melon. 
 "No charge, patron," said he; "I give it you as a 'Llapa' 
 (gift thrown in), as I am new here, and you are my first 
 customer." When Stephen returned next day to his post 
 
A VISIT TO THE PRISON. A KNOTTY PROBLEM 255 
 
 as a hawker, he was greatly pleased to see from the glance 
 of Don Antonio's eye that he had recognized him, and that 
 he appeared to be more cheerful. No audible communica- 
 tion, however, could take place between them in the presence 
 of the ever-vigilant sentries. 
 
 While hawking his fruit, Stephen had kept his eyes 
 open, so as to observe the possibility of rescuing Don 
 Antonio. He soon realized that it was no easy problem he 
 had to solve. As has been explained, the building stood 
 a considerable distance back from the road, and was sur- 
 rounded by open ground in which sentries continually 
 patrolled. 
 
 Stephen's first idea had been to make a subterranean 
 passage from some spot outside the enclosure to come 
 underneath the floor of the room in which Don Antonio 
 was confined. He soon abandoned this scheme as imprac- 
 ticable. The ground upon which Asuncion stands is com- 
 posed of a deep bed of loose sand, under which is rock. 
 No tunnel could be made through the upper stratum 
 without timbering to support the earth, nor through the 
 lower without blasting. He had not the appliances for 
 either of these methods, nor would there have been suffi- 
 cient time to excavate such a passage. 
 
 To get the prisoner out through the window would be 
 equally impracticable. Even if he could have sawn through 
 the massive iron bars which guarded it, the vigilance of the 
 sentries would have prevented any such attempt. 
 
 Finally, he came to consider the possibilities of evasion 
 through the roof. As in most other buildings in that 
 country, the villa had a flat tiled roof, surrounded hy a 
 parapet about breast-high. Through the window of the 
 room occupied by Don Antonio, Stephen observed that a 
 wooden stair led from the floor to a trap-door giving access 
 to the azotea (flat roof), which is a favourite resort in the 
 cool of the evening in such climates. Stephen concluded, 
 however, that this trap-door must now be strongly barred. 
 
256 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 And then he thought that even if it were not, or if 
 he could force it open, he would not be much further 
 advanced towards his purpose, for no one could drop from 
 the roof without attracting the attention of the sentries 
 and being at once recaptured. Besides, he saw that Don 
 Antonio was now too infirm to attempt any such feat, or 
 to be able to run away even if by some means he had been 
 got out of the building. 
 
 Stephen was almost in despair when his eye lighted upon 
 a splendid sycamore-tree which stood behind the wall of 
 the adjoining garden, so close that some of its branches 
 overhung the grounds in which stood the prison. 
 
 Upon returning to Pepita and talking the matter over, 
 he learned that the villa in the garden of which the tree 
 stood was occupied by friends of Don Rufino, who could be 
 relied upon to assist the escape of Don Antonio in any way 
 which did not involve risk to themselves. It was easy, 
 therefore, for Stephen to obtain permission to enter the 
 garden, which he did, unobserved, just before dark, in order 
 to make a reconnaisance of the prison and study the problem 
 more carefully. The sycamore he had seen to be large and 
 wide-spreading, and when he came to climb it he found 
 it even better developed than he had expected. The main 
 trunk, over three feet in diameter, rose to a considerably 
 greater height than the roof of the jail, and then threw out 
 several sturdy limbs, which again subdivided into innumer- 
 able branches, carrying over all a thick canopy of foliage, 
 sufficient to hide from observers anybody in the tree on the 
 other side of the wall. But the longest of the overhanging 
 branches was separated from the roof of the prison by a 
 space of not less, Stephen calculated, than about thirteen 
 or fourteen feet. A rope flung from any fork sufficiently 
 strong to bear the weight of a man would fall perpen- 
 dicularly about eight or ten feet outside the wall of the 
 building. 
 
 Stephen observed from the high station to which he had 
 
THE PLAN OF ESCAPE 257 
 
 crept that the trap-door on the roof was, as he had antici- 
 pated, fixed down by two strong iron bars passing through 
 staples outside. It would be scarcely possible to force it 
 open from within. 
 
 It was with despair at his heart that he returned to the 
 house of Don Rufino, but he would not confess this to 
 Pepita, though he lay most of the night in his hammock 
 sleepless, searching in his mind to contrive some means of 
 overcoming the obstacles which lay between Don Antonio 
 and freedom. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIII 
 
 THE PLAN OF ESCAPE 
 
 FXT morning Stephen awoke with a start. An idea as 
 to how he might release Don Antonio had come to 
 him like an inspiration in a dream. The more he thought 
 of it the clearer he saw that the plan might possibly suc- 
 ceed, though doubtless it would be attended with great risk. 
 But to carry it out he would need to have the co-operation 
 of his sailor friends, and also assistance from the Tndente. 
 He now remembered his promise to return to the Indian 
 village on the opposite side of the river in three days, and 
 he resolved to make an immediate start. 
 
 Having informed Pepita and her friends of his intentions, 
 and intimated that he believed he had a plan to save Don 
 Antonio, he started upon his perilous journey. 
 
 Knowing that every point was watched, he proceeded 
 with great caution, taking a roundabout route to the point 
 where he had landed. There he found the canoe safe as he 
 had left it. He then paddled up-stream for a long distance, 
 keeping within the shade of the belt of reeds, and finally 
 struck boldly across the river and allowed the boat to drift 
 down to the landing-place near the Indian village. 
 
 (M806) R 
 
258 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 Mick and Sandy were overjoyed to see him again, having 
 passed the time during which he was absent in great 
 anxiety. From an Indian who had been sent down the 
 river, Stephen learned that the Tridente had been seen some 
 miles below, but that she would probably take about three 
 days more to reach the village, as she had to warp her way 
 up against the current. 
 
 Stephen then related to Mick and Sandy the position of 
 affairs in Asuncion, and proceeded to explain to them his 
 plans to effect Don Antonio's rescue from the prison. His 
 first idea had been to rig up in the sycamore-tree a long 
 pole, like the derrick of a crane, from which a tackle could 
 be swung down to or near the roof of the prison. By this 
 means he could get upon the azotea and withdraw the bolts 
 holding down the trap-door, then bring Don Antonio up, 
 put him in a strop, or "boatswain's chair", attached to the 
 tackle, hoist him to the derrick, swing it round, and lower 
 him into the adjacent garden. 
 
 Provided this could be done silently, and the sentries did 
 not look up (he had noticed that they generally marched 
 with their eyes on the ground), there was just a chance 
 that the manoeuvre might be carried out successfully. By 
 the same means Stephen could also return to the tree. But 
 the risk was terrible, for while suspended in mid-air he or Don 
 Antonio would offer an easy target for the sentries' bullets. 
 
 Nevertheless, he could think of no better way, nor could 
 the sailors suggest any other. They therefore resolved to 
 make the attempt. A practical difficulty of importance at 
 once presented itself Where were they to obtain the pole 
 for the derrick — or, if they had it, how could they convey 
 it to the tree and rig it up without being detected ? 
 
 There were no pine-trees in the neighbourhood, and such 
 timber of suitable size as could be cut was as hard and as 
 heavy as iron, too dense to float, too cumbrous to take 
 across in a boat, or to carry through the streets of the 
 town without attracting attention. 
 
THE PLAN OF ESCAPE 259 
 
 " Necessity is the mother of invention ", and in his per- 
 plexity a brilliant idea came to Stephen. He instructed 
 Sandy and Mick to get some bamboos, of which there was an 
 abundance close at hand, to cut them into lengths of about 
 three feet, with a thickness of about two or two and a half 
 inches, to split them, to take out the pith, and to bore holes 
 in the middle and at the extremity of each piece, for which 
 purpose a red-hot ramrod would answer admirably. They 
 were then to cut some hard-wood pins and drive them 
 through the holes in the middle of two pieces of bamboo, 
 so as to make a series of St. Andrew's crosses. These 
 crosses were again to be connected by pins at their ex- 
 tremities. A splinter of bamboo in each pin on opposite 
 sides would prevent the pin from falling out. Stephen 
 pointed out that the result of this construction would be to 
 make a contrivance somewhat like what is styled "lazy 
 tongs ". By bringing together the two ends of the last 
 cross of the series, the whole combination would elongate, 
 say to a length of about twenty feet, if they put in seven 
 crosses, while by pushing the arms of the end cross apart 
 the whole apparatus would shut up into a size of about 
 three feet long by two feet wide, and only about two inches 
 thick. In that form it would be easy to transport it across 
 the river, and, when covered by a poncho, through the town 
 in comparative security. 
 
 One such appliance would scarcely give sufficient resist- 
 ance to serve as a derrick in the manner they proposed, 
 therefore they would have to make two. The mode of 
 working them would be to have a long thong of hide 
 running through the holes in the ends of the last cross, by 
 means of which they could bring them together, or allow 
 them to separate as much as they desired. Having con- 
 veyed them to the tree and hoisted them up, they would 
 step the two derricks on two branches some distance apart, 
 so as to make the base of a triangle, of which the derricks 
 formed the sides. The two outer ends of the derricks 
 
260 
 
 would be lashed together, a long tackle attached to them, 
 a rope for a stay would be carried from their outer ends 
 and made fast high up in the tree. When all was ready, 
 the derricks would be pushed out and the rest of the opera- 
 tion would be carried out as Stephen had proposed. 
 
 The practicability of the apparatus was admitted by the 
 two men, who as sailors would be well able to work it, but 
 it was seen that it would be necessary to await the arrival 
 of the Tridente in order to obtain the ropes and tackle 
 necessary. Meantime they could be preparing the bamboo 
 derricks. 
 
 Before he left for Asuncion that evening Stephen had 
 thought out the whole plan, and carefully instructed the 
 sailors how to act. When the schooner had arrived and 
 they had all their tackle ready, they were to make a fire 
 upon the point opposite the village. Stephen undertook 
 to keep a look-out for this signal from the cemetery, to 
 which he would repair every night after dark. When he 
 had seen the beacon he would understand that the attempt 
 was to be made on the following night. 
 
 The sailors were to get the captain of the Tridente to 
 lend them his boat, which would be large and roomy, as 
 these schooners generally use their boats to load hides, 
 and would therefore be able to accommodate the large 
 party he meant to bring back. The boat would make for 
 the cemetery point, where the two sailors would land, 
 leaving someone behind to take charge. If by any accident 
 Stephen was not there to meet them, they were to make 
 their way to the house of Don Rufino, the description and 
 locality of which Stephen carefully gave, and there they 
 would receive directions, and probably a guide to the scene 
 of operations. 
 
 Stephen was fortunately able to effect his return to 
 Asuncion that night in safety. 
 
CAPTAIN RUGERIO 261 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV 
 
 CAPTAIN RUGERIO 
 
 "VrEXT morning Stephen wrote out a full description of 
 JLi the proposed plan of rescue in English, and after 
 having fully explained it to Pepita, he managed to trans- 
 mit it without detection to Don Antonio's hands by the 
 same means as he had previously employed. He added 
 that he would give him a certain signal upon the morning 
 of the day when the attempt was to be made. 
 
 Pepita, while admiring the boldness and ingenuity of 
 the plan, could not help seeing that it was exceedingly 
 risky, and she spent the next few days in a terrible state 
 of anxiety and suspense. She did not, however, try to 
 dissuade Stephen from making the attempt. Every indi- 
 cation now tended to show that the Dictator had fully 
 decided to exterminate all his opponents. Almost daily 
 prisoners were taken from the jail to be executed, and it 
 was scarcely likely that Don Antonio would be long 
 spared, especially when the malignant influence of Senor 
 Lopez was at work. 
 
 Every evening, as had been arranged, Stephen stole 
 down to the dark cemetery, there to watch for the pro- 
 mised signal. 
 
 It was not, however, until the fourth night that he at 
 length saw the light blaze up from the opposite shore. 
 
 Next morning he was again at the prison, and managed 
 once more to transmit a note to Don Antonio, which con- 
 tained simply the words: "It is for to-morrow". 
 
 His task done, he was returning as usual to the house of 
 Don Eufino, where Pepita was waiting for him anxiously. 
 As he slouched along the road with his basket on arm, 
 keeping up his character of fruit-hawker as well as pos- 
 sible, it suddenly occurred to him, he could scarce say 
 
262 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 why, that he was being followed. Anxious to make sure 
 if this were the case, he adopted several plans, such as 
 suddenly doubling back on his track, moving quickly on 
 and then almost stopping and taking a roundabout course 
 But though he could never see anything which actually 
 proved that he was being watched, he could not throw off 
 the idea that some invisible person was shadowing him. 
 
 At length, however, he came to the conclusion that this 
 must be only a morbid fancy. He decided to go to the house, 
 as he felt he ought not to keep Pepita longer in suspense. 
 
 Just as he reached the door four soldiers sprang out 
 from behind a wall, and seized him by the arms before he 
 had time to realize what had happened, or take any mea- 
 sures for escape or defence. 
 
 Stephen felt as if his last hour had come, and what 
 instantly rose in his mind was that his plot had been 
 discovered, and Don Antonio's escape would thereby be 
 frustrated. This gave him more trouble than the mere 
 alarm with regard to his personal safety. 
 
 At this moment an officer in gorgeous uniform came up, 
 evidently the commander of the guard, the famous Captain 
 Eugcrio, of whom Stephen had heard so much. 
 
 He was a man of about fifty years of age, tall, and of 
 commanding presence, with a long black beard and fierce 
 moustaches. 
 
 "Ah!" he exclaimed, "and so you have got the rascal! 
 Well, let's see what he has got to say." Then turning to 
 the sergeant in charge he said: "This business is too press- 
 ing to allow waste of time in going to the guard-house, 
 just put him into this house," pointing to Don Eufmo's 
 door, "and I will myself examine him in private." 
 
 It was the hour of the siesta, and the outer room was 
 unoccupied. Stephen stepped in as ordered, closely fol- 
 lowed by Captain Eugerio. 
 
 For a few seconds the two men faced each other in 
 silence, Stephen wondering what was about to happen. 
 
CAPTAIN RUGERIO 263 
 
 "And so, sir," suddenly broke forth Captain Eugerio, 
 "you propose to set free our prisoner, Don Antonio 
 Rodriguez! and to-morrow! and a very clever plan you 
 have contrived, too, it appears, with your crane from the 
 tree ! All very fine, but I guess we shall have a word or 
 two to say about that." 
 
 Stephen was thunderstruck. 
 
 How came this man to know so much? The Dictator's 
 magic knowledge of all that was happening was no myth, 
 then. 
 
 Following his startling surprise came a feeling of despair. 
 All was over now for Don Antonio, for Pepita, and himself. 
 The Dictator's arm was long, and smote hard. 
 
 Suddenly he resolved not to give in without a struggle. 
 In the hurry of his capture the soldiers had forgotten to 
 disarm him, so, quickly he seized his pistol and brought it 
 to bear upon Captain Rugerio, resolved to sell his life as 
 dearly as possible. 
 
 Captain Rugerio never flinched, nor did he apparently 
 make any movement to draw his own pistol in defence. 
 
 He merely smiled grimly, and said: " No nonsense! That 
 will not help you. My men are outside. At the sound of 
 a shot they will rush in, and they would make short work 
 of you and all in the house." 
 
 Stephen's arm fell as if paralysed. He realized his help- 
 lessness, and he would do nothing to bring danger upon 
 Pepita. 
 
 But, recovering his courage, he again boldly faced Captain 
 Rugerio, and cried in a bold voice, "I admit nothing! 
 What have you to do with raef 
 
 For a moment the captain gazed upon him steadily, and 
 presently Stephen noticed a sudden change in his expres- 
 sion, which became more kindly. 
 
 "You are a brave young man!" he exclaimed. And 
 then, to Stephen's amazement he addressed him in Eng- 
 lish in the words, " Come, my lad, perhaps things are not 
 
264 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 so bad as you think. Friends often arise in the most 
 unexpected places, and I mean to be your friend in this 
 matter." 
 
 Had the ground opened up beneath his feet, Stephen 
 could hardly have been more astonished. 
 
 The fact that the captain spoke English, and had pro- 
 bably got hold of the papers he had left with Don Antonio, 
 at once explained much; but what could he mean by say- 
 ing, " I am your friend"? 
 
 " Yes," went on Captain Rugerio, speaking English, but 
 hurriedly and in a low tone, "it will astonish you, no 
 doubt, to learn that I am your own countryman. I drifted 
 by chance into the service of Dr. Francia, but then I had 
 no idea of how things would turn out. I am as disgusted 
 as anyone could be with the tyrant, and have long wished 
 to leave him; but how can I do sol You know that 
 here no one is safe from his vengeance; high and low 
 are alike exposed to his wrath. Every man is a spy on 
 the other. Were he to suspect my desire, my life would 
 not be worth many hours' purchase. Therefore, when I 
 discovered your plot in the course of my duties, I hailed 
 it as a means whereby I too might make my escape 
 from my hateful position. Listen, for there is no time 
 to waste; even my men outside may suspect and de- 
 nounce me if I spend too long a time in here. I can 
 help you much in your plan, but it will now have to be 
 carried out differently. I must, for the sake of appear- 
 ances, take you to prison, but I will lock you up in the 
 room next to Don Antonio's. There will be only an adobe 
 wall between you, and I will contrive to leave you your 
 knife. You understand? I will see that the bars are 
 taken off the trap-door, and when the time comes I will 
 look after the sentries. Your friends can still carry out 
 your plan in the tree. You can leave word with the young 
 lady to tell them what to do. Call her." 
 
 Stephen at once went in search of Pepita, whom he 
 
THE ESCAPE OF DON ANTONIO 265 
 
 found close to the door of the room in a state of great 
 alarm. In a few words he explained to her the surprising 
 event which had just occurred, and told her what instruc- 
 tions to give to the sailors when they arrived. 
 
 With blanched face Pepita listened, but by an effort 
 managed to retain her presence of mind, for were not the 
 lives of her father and of her lover at stake ? 
 
 This over, Captain Rugerio resumed his stern expression, 
 threw open the door, and called in his men. 
 
 "Ah!" he said to the sergeant, "now I know all. Take 
 this fellow off to the prison. Put him in the vacant room 
 next to Senor Rodriguez, and keep a close watch upon 
 him." 
 
 CHAPTER XLV 
 
 THE ESCAPE OF DON ANTONIO 
 
 THE events of the preceding hours had thrown Stephen's 
 brain into such a whirl that it took some little time 
 for him to be able calmly to contemplate the situation from 
 his altered point of view. As he sat upon the bed in the 
 room in which he was now locked up, a thousand doubts 
 assailed him with regard to the possibility of his scheme 
 succeeding. 
 
 Would the two sailors be able to find the house? Would 
 they have the pluck and ability to carry out his plan? 
 How was Don Antonio to be informed of the changes 
 which would now have to be made? And so on. On 
 the other hand, the chances of success would doubtless be 
 materially improved through the aid of this new ally; 
 but could he rely upon him? Might not his proposed 
 offers of aid be only a part of a diabolical plan laid by the 
 Dictator ? 
 
 This thought drove him nearly mad, more especially as 
 
266 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 he was now so helpless. He felt that he must act, do some- 
 thing, if possible, to advance matters, or he would go out of 
 his mind. The guard had taken from him his pistols, but 
 he was delighted to find that his strong "gaucho" knife, 
 which he had carefully secreted in his girdle, had escaped 
 observation. This gave him some hope, which rose con- 
 siderably when he found, by examining the partition wall 
 which divided him from Don Antonio's room, that it was 
 only made of a single thickness of adobe, or sun-dried 
 bricks. As these were built in mud mortar, he felt that it 
 would be a comparatively easy matter to make an aperture 
 into the next room. 
 
 But with a sentry constantly pacing before the window 
 he did not venture to make any attempt to cut through the 
 wall so long as it was light. Impatiently he waited for the 
 coming darkness, and never had he experienced so long an 
 afternoon. Nor even when the night had completely fallen 
 did he venture to set to work, for, as he remembered, pro- 
 bably the jailer would soon be bringing him his evening 
 meal. 
 
 It was well he had thought of this, for that functionary 
 soon afterwards arrived bringing a loaf and a jar of water, 
 all the meagre fare the prison afforded. 
 
 As soon as the guard had wished him good -night and 
 locked the door, he decided to wait no longer. Dragging 
 the bed close to the wall, he got down behind it, and with 
 his knife began to pick out the mortar between two of the 
 bricks. To his joy he found it yielded with comparative 
 ease, and he was in a short time able to loosen one of the 
 bricks and pull it into his room. 
 
 As he found that the noise he had been making, slight 
 as it was, must have startled Don Antonio, he now ventured 
 to call softly to his fellow-prisoner. 
 
 After a brief interval, which Stephen attributed to the 
 old gentlemen's nervous fears, he had the satisfaction to 
 hear the reply: "Here I am ! Who is it calls?" 
 
THE ESCAPE OF DON ANTONIO 267 
 
 " It is I, Stephen, coming to your aid, come closer to the 
 wall. Be cautious, lie down on the floor!" 
 
 Don Antonio, who had now recovered his presence of 
 mind, gradually, by feeling along the partition, discovered 
 the opening Stephen had made. When he was once there, 
 Stephen was able to communicate to him in hurried whispers 
 all that had occurred in that day, and the change it had 
 made in their plans. 
 
 It took but a short time longer to enlarge the opening 
 sufficiently for Stephen to be able to wriggle through it 
 into Don Antonio's room. The two friends fell upon each 
 other's neck in a close embrace. 
 
 " But there is no time to be lost," said Stephen, " let me 
 try the trap -door and see whether Captain Rugerio has 
 kept faith." 
 
 So saying he mounted the stairs. To his great satisfac- 
 tion he found that the trap-door yielded after a slight push, 
 and there was now nothing to prevent them from getting 
 on to the flat roof. 
 
 Stephen thought that they ought to take their station 
 there at once, so as to be ready for the next move. But he 
 found that even this, the easiest part of their task, was 
 by no means so easy of accomplishment as he had expected. 
 Owing to the effects of age and his long confinement, Don 
 Antonio had now become so weak and stiff in his limbs 
 that it was with the greatest difficulty that he was able, 
 even with Stephen's aid, to mount the stairs. At last he 
 reached the roof and lay down exhausted. 
 
 All this time the pacing of the sentries, and every half- 
 hour their loud cries of "Sentinel Alerte!" were clearly 
 heard. 
 
 Stephen scarcely expected that his friends would be in 
 the tree so early; and he watched the movements of the 
 branches with eager anxiety for what appeared to him an 
 eternity, but was probably not more than an hour. 
 
 It was a clear night, with just enough light from the stars 
 
268 IN THE dictator's grip 
 
 to distinguish objects a few feet off. At length he fancied 
 he detected a movement amongst the upper branches, such 
 as would be caused by a climber. His excitement rose to 
 a high point. 
 
 At this moment they were startled by the sudden roll of 
 a drum, and the word of command: "Guard turn out!" 
 
 " Great heavens ! What can it mean ? Has our evasion 
 been discovered?" thought Stephen. The noise continued. 
 The voice of Captain Eugerio could be heard calling, 
 "Sentries to the front! Attention! Present arms to His 
 Excellency! Stand steady!" 
 
 "What! The Dictator come to inspect! Good God, we 
 are lost!" groaned Don Antonio. 
 
 Stephen remembered that he had been told it was the 
 Dictator's eccentric habit to ride out only by night and at 
 unexpected hours, some said for fear of assassination. He 
 fancied he saw in this drilling and distracting the attention 
 of the guard a part of Captain Kugerio's plan to assist 
 him. 
 
 At that moment Stephen caught sight of some object 
 pushing its way through the foliage of the tree towards 
 him. "Thank heaven," he exclaimed, "it is the derrick!" 
 
 Nearer and nearer it came, and he soon made out through 
 the dim light that it was really the derrick as he expected, 
 and with a tackle and seat suspended from it as he had 
 planned. But, alas! when it appeared to have reached its 
 greatest extension it still fell short of the house by about 
 three feet. 
 
 Had Stephen been alone this would have troubled him 
 little. A bold spring from the roof would have enabled 
 him to catch the ropes, and so to swing on to the tree. 
 But it was of course completely beyond the powers of Don 
 Antonio to attempt this feat. 
 
 Again his heart fell. It was most tantalizing to see 
 delivery so near and yet unattainable. 
 
 Presently, however, he noticed that the tackle had been 
 
THE ESCAPE OF DON ANTONIO 269 
 
 slacked off a little and was beginning to swing backwards 
 and forwards like a pendulum. He understood at once that 
 the sailors had thoughtfully attached a light rope to the 
 lower block, and were trying by this means to bring it into 
 his reach. Getting close to the parapet, Stephen now 
 ventured to stand up, and when the block swung nearer to 
 him he was able by a quick movement to grasp it, and 
 bring it and the bamboo seat hanging from it within the 
 parapet. So far all was satisfactory. And now to rescue 
 Don Antonio! 
 
 All this time the voice of Captain Rugerio could be heard 
 uttering sharp words of command as he was putting the 
 guard through various evolutions. 
 
 1 A nourish of trumpets announced the arrival of Dr. 
 Francia. 
 
 Stephen crawled to Don Antonio, and to his dismay dis- 
 covered that he was quite insensible. The excitement and 
 the startling alarm of the drum had proved too much for 
 him, and he had fallen into a swoon. 
 
 " Perhaps it is just as well," said Stephen to himself, as 
 he pushed the bamboo seat below the unconscious body and 
 fastened the ropes. When all was ready he struck the 
 tackle sharply three times, the vibration travelled along 
 the taut ropes, and the men in the tree began to haul up. 
 So long as Don Antonio was on the roof, Stephen was able 
 to assist them by half-lifting, half-carrying the weight, but 
 when at length he had to let him swing clear, there came 
 another anxious moment. Would the derrick withstand 
 the weight? He could see it bend like a fishing-rod, and 
 hear it creak as if it were about to snap. But it held. 
 
 Presently Stephen noticed that one of the derricks was 
 being shortened, he understood this by seeing the lattices 
 closing, and then the upper rope was slacked off gradually. 
 By this manoeuvre the direction of the jib was altered and 
 swung round so that the tackle with its burden hung per- 
 pendicularly behind the wall enclosing the garden of the 
 
270 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 prison. The tackle was then rapidly slacked off, and the 
 body of the unconscious man gently and safely lowered 
 behind the wall. 
 
 "Thank God for that!" muttered Stephen. 
 
 In another moment the derricks had been brought back 
 to their former position, and Stephen, without waiting for 
 the tackle to be swung, made a flying leap at the ropes, 
 and soon was safely lowered beside Don Antonio. The 
 derricks were then allowed to collapse, and immediately 
 were concealed behind the foliage of the sycamore. 
 
 Just then a shout arose from the guard, "Long live 'El 
 Supremo', Dr. Francia!" 
 
 CHAPTER XL VI 
 
 THE LAST OF LOPEZ 
 
 THOUGH they had now accomplished an important part 
 of their task by getting Don Antonio safely out of 
 prison, there were still many and great dangers to be faced 
 before the rescue was complete. The old gentleman lay in 
 a state of complete collapse and insensibility beside the 
 garden wall. It would be necessary to remove him at once 
 to some place of shelter and greater security. 
 
 Stephen gave orders to lower the bamboo framework 
 which had served as derricks. By detaching a section of 
 one of these, opening it out to a width of a little over two 
 feet, and lashing it with a rope in that position, they had 
 at their disposal a useful stretcher, upon which they laid 
 the unconscious man, and were thus able to carry him along 
 easily. 
 
 The streets were now deserted, in accordance with the 
 regulations of the Dictator, and as it was such a short 
 distance, and as the guards engaged on parade, Stephen 
 
THE LAST OF LOPEZ 271 
 
 thought that they might venture to take Don Antonio 
 to the house of his friend Don Eufino, where Pepita was 
 waiting in an agony of suspense. 
 
 The journey was accomplished in safety. The delight 
 of Pepita in being once more able to embrace her father, 
 even though he was still unable to respond, can easily be 
 imagined. Soon, by the aid of restoratives, Don Antonio 
 returned to consciousness, and was able to realize that he 
 was free from the horrible captivity, though still in great 
 danger. 
 
 There was no time to be lost, and a hurried consultation 
 took place as to the best means of getting down to the boat 
 and beyond the reach of Dr. Francia's vengeance. It was 
 Don Eufino who suggested the most likely means. Asuncion 
 had been for some weeks scourged by an epidemic of small- 
 pox, the daily number of victims being alarmingly great. 
 By order of the Dictator, who, it was reported, went in 
 constant dread of death, and hated anything which would 
 remind him of it, all funerals took place immediately, by 
 night, and, since the priests had been expelled, without 
 religious ceremonies. 
 
 From a neighbour's house there had been a funeral that 
 very night, which had been numerously attended. Don 
 Rufino suggested that, as he was upon intimate terms with 
 the people, he might be able, by representing that his sister 
 had just died, to borrow the garb in which mourners always 
 appeared in these sad processions. This garb consisted of 
 a long black domino with a hood covering the head, similar 
 to the costume worn by the "familiars" of the dreaded 
 "Holy Inquisition". When it had been donned it was 
 difficult for a casual spectator to discern the identity or 
 even the sex of the wearer. 
 
 Stephen and the others accepted the idea. Don Rufino 
 at once went on his quest, and soon returned with his arms 
 laden with the sombre garments. 
 
 The stretcher upon which Don Antonio had been brought 
 
272 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 to the house was then covered with black cloth, a pall was 
 improvised out of a couple of black shawls, while a cross, 
 cut out of white cloth, was hastily stitched upon it. All 
 then arrayed themselves in the funereal costume, including 
 Pepita, Don Rufino, and his sister. 
 
 The procession moved out slowly, but without any attempt 
 at secrecy. Sandy and Mick took up the stretcher, Don 
 Eufino preceded them bearing a torch, as was the custom, 
 the others formed up behind. 
 
 They had proceeded in this order for a few hundred 
 yards when they suddenly heard the clatter of horses' 
 hoofs at a gallop, and presently a troop of horsemen sur- 
 rounded them. 
 
 It was the Dictator and his staff on one of their midnight 
 rounds. 
 
 The cavalcade stopped suddenly, and a voice, which 
 Stephen recognized as Dr. Francia's, called upon the funeral 
 procession to halt. 
 
 From the light of the torch they could see the gaunt 
 form of the Dictator, who was closely followed by Captain 
 Rugerio and Don Ignacio Lopez. 
 
 "Who is this that you are burying? Where is your 
 license?" cried Dr. Francia. 
 
 It was his foible that he should know the details of 
 everything that went on in the country. 
 
 The danger was imminent, Stephen saw at once, but he 
 had presence of mind to reply in a deep voice : " We have 
 left our license at home, your excellency !" 
 
 " Ha! That is quite out of order!" retorted Dr. Francia. 
 " But who is the person you are burying 1 " 
 
 This was a poser for Stephen. It would be useless to 
 give a name at random, for Dr. Francia prided himself 
 upon knowing the names of all people in Asuncion. 
 
 Had Don Rufino preserved his presence of mind he might 
 have avoided suspicion by giving some well-known name, 
 his own for example, but instead of this he merely aroused 
 
THE LAST OF LOPEZ 273 
 
 the curiosity and suspicion of Dr. Francia by muttering in 
 reply : 
 
 "Only a poor man of no importance, your excel- 
 lency." 
 
 With anger raised to a high degree by this evasive 
 answer, the Dictator cried, " Ha, I must see more into this!" 
 and, leaping from his horse, he strode to the head of the 
 bier, evidently with the intention of throwing back the pall 
 from the face of the corpse. 
 
 An instant more and detection was inevitable. But 
 Stephen cried, "Take care, your excellency, he died of 
 the small-pox." 
 
 As if stung by a viper, Dr. Francia started back, mounted 
 his horse, and rode off followed by his escort. 
 
 "Another terribly narrow escape," said Stephen; "but 
 fortune seems to favour us to-night, my friends. Be of 
 good courage, all danger is now past." 
 
 In this, however, he was mistaken, for though the pro- 
 cession reached the dark and deserted cemetery unmolested, 
 when it was passing on towards the river, where the boat 
 awaited them, they again heard the clatter of hoofs and 
 a loud voice commanding them to halt. 
 
 As the horseman approached, they recognized, to their 
 horror, the sinister figure of Don Ignacio Lopez. 
 
 His face was contorted with rage, and he yelled out furi- 
 ously: "Ah, I knew I was right in my suspicions! I am 
 glad I rode back. It's no use trying to deceive me, you 
 are contriving the escape of Don Antonio Rodriguez!" 
 
 Further concealment was indeed useless, and now all that 
 could be done was to escape to the boat as quickly as 
 possible. 
 
 Fortunately the watchers were on the alert, and brought 
 the boat up at once to the land. 
 
 "Now," said Stephen, "Don Rufino, you see about 
 getting in the women and Don Antonio. We will hold 
 this man in check, he is only one against three." So say- 
 
 (M806) S 
 
274 IN THE dictator's grip 
 
 ing, he unsheathed his knife and the sailors drew their 
 pistols. 
 
 At this moment the attention of all was drawn off by the 
 shouts of another horsemen, who was riding up through 
 the darkness. It was Captain Rugerio. 
 
 "Get into the boat, men!" he shouted in English; "leave 
 me to deal with this fellow!" 
 
 A yell of surprise and rage burst from Lopez. "What, 
 you too — you a traitor!" 
 
 Instantty two reports resounded in the air. The shot of 
 Captain Rugerio appeared to have missed, but that of Lopez 
 had told ; the commandante fell from his horse as if dead. 
 
 Lifting the apparently lifeless body in their arms, Stephen 
 and his friends bundled it into the boat, then jumped in 
 themselves and pushed from the shore before Lopez had 
 time to recover his presence of mind. 
 
 When he realized that his prey was escaping from him, 
 he seemed to lose all reason, and, leaping from his horse, 
 jumped frantically into the river as if with the mad idea of 
 overtaking them. 
 
 An instant later a wild yell rang through the darkness. 
 
 "An alligator has caught him!" exclaimed Don Rufino. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII 
 
 SAFETY AND HAPPINESS 
 
 AIDED by the current, the boat soon reached the 
 schooner. Don Antonio, and the still insensible form 
 of Captain Rugerio, were carefully lifted on board, and the 
 captain was instructed to cast off the moorings of the 
 schooner, and to make away as rapidly as possible down 
 the river. 
 
 Father Anselmo, who was akeady waiting on board, 
 
SAFETY AND HAPPINESS 275 
 
 proved to be of invaluable assistance. In his capacity of 
 missionary in a remote part of the country he had acquired 
 some experience in simple medicine and surgery, and he 
 now offered his services to attend to Captain Rugerio. 
 While the schooner was lying at the Indian village he had 
 occupied himself by making a collection of the medicinal 
 herbs which abound in those regions, so that he was also 
 able to do much to restore Don Antonio. 
 
 An examination of Captain Rugerio showed that he was 
 not dangerously wounded. Lopez's bullet had struck him 
 on the breast, just over the heart, but had glanced off a 
 rib and embedded itself in the muscles, whence it was 
 easily removed. His greatest injury, that which had made 
 him insensible, had been caused by the headlong fall from 
 his horse. 
 
 By next morning the Tridente was miles below Asuncion 
 and free from danger of pursuit. 
 
 Both the invalids were doing well, but Captain Rugerio 
 was too weak to be able to talk. Don Antonio, on the 
 contrary, was now quite elated, and more anxious to con- 
 verse than perhaps his strength allowed. He questioned 
 Stephen eagerly with regard to the events of his escape, of 
 which he had but a dim recollection. He thanked him 
 and the sailors repeatedly for what they had done, and he 
 expressed regret that his physical weakness had caused him 
 to lose consciousness, a circumstance of which he appeared 
 to be rather ashamed. 
 
 Stephen discussed with Don Antonio the character of 
 Dr. Francia, and expressed surprise that a man of such 
 great intelligence as he remembered him to have shown 
 in the interview they had at his country house should have 
 developed so rapidly into a brutal tyrant. 
 
 "I confess," said Don Antonio, "that he is an enigma to 
 me also, and the most charitable construction I can put 
 upon his acts is that he is really partially insane. Born to 
 a certain extent a genius, with faculties and education far 
 
276 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 above the level of those surrounding him, with learning far 
 greater, he has overestimated his own capacity by comparing 
 it with that of his neighbours, and there has thus arisen in his 
 mind exaggerated self-esteem, and contempt for all others. 
 He cannot bear to have near him anyone with pretensions 
 to education, nor one who is regarded by the people with 
 any degree of affection and respect. I fear that this explains 
 the cause of his great enmity to me. Then the docile nature 
 of the Paraguayans, of which you have had some experience, 
 and which caused them to be so easily subjugated by the 
 Jesuits long before Dr. Francia's time, facilitates the carry- 
 ing out of his arrogant pretensions. Bad as the times now 
 are, I fear they will be much worse if Dr. Francia is allowed 
 to carry on his rule without restriction." 
 
 And now Stephen imparted to Don Antonio and Pepita 
 the great news of the recovery of the Jesuits' treasure, 
 which they naturally received with much emotion, showering 
 upon him their hearty congratulations. 
 
 A favourable, uneventful voyage of four days brought 
 the Tridente to the port of Corrientes. There they decided 
 to remain some time to allow Stephen and the two sailors 
 to bring down the treasure to the schooner. This would 
 also give an interval of rest to the invalids and aid their 
 recovery, and an opportunity for the disposal of the cargo 
 of the schooner. 
 
 All went as well as could be desired. The treasure was 
 found as it had been left, and was safely brought on board, 
 and in about a fortnight Don Antonio and Captain Rugerio 
 were sufficiently well to continue the voyage. 
 
 With feelings of satisfaction and happiness such as may 
 be imagined but scarcely described, Stephen stood on the 
 deck of the Tridente as she sailed from Corrientes on her 
 way down -stream to Santa Fe. For now he had attained 
 the position he had so long hoped for, and that more 
 quickly than he had ventured to anticipate. The value of 
 the treasure turned out upon examination to be quite equal 
 
SAFETY AND HAPPINESS 277 
 
 to, if not greater than, Father Anselmo's estimate, so that, 
 even judged by an old-world standard, he was no longer 
 a poor man, with the certain prospects of increasing his 
 capital at a much quicker rate than he could have done in 
 Europe. 
 
 Don Antonio had quite recovered his health and spirits, 
 and naturally Pepita's happiness had correspondingly in- 
 creased. They had both congratulated Stephen heartily 
 upon the unexpected stroke of good luck which had come 
 to compensate him for the loss of his prospects in Paraguay, 
 and Don Antonio frequently discussed with him as to the 
 best means of using his fortune. 
 
 "Perhaps," said the old gentleman as they walked the 
 deck one moonlight night, "your idea will now be to return 
 to England. If so, I cannot blame you, as I remember you 
 left a dear mother there; and besides, this country, if it 
 offers more opportunities for money - making, is now so 
 disturbed by political misrule, and apparently likely to be 
 so for years, that there is little to induce one who desires 
 to lead a tranquil life to remain in it." 
 
 "At one time," replied Stephen, "it certainly would have 
 been my idea to go home at once, had I possessed far less 
 money than that which I now own; but, my dear friend, 
 has it not struck you that there is in this country an attrac- 
 tion which holds me with even a greater force than the 
 calls of love and duty to my mother?" 
 
 " Indeed," said Don Antonio, glancing slyly at him, " and 
 what can that be ? Is it the scenery and free life upon our 
 boundless pampas'?" 
 
 "No," boldly replied Stephen, though his voice trembled 
 slightly, " I think I can credit you with more perspicacity, 
 in spite of your jesting words. Have you not guessed, 
 have you not seen, that I love Pepita with all my heart 
 and soul? Great as has been the struggle, I have never 
 ventured to say a word of this before, either to you or to 
 her; but now I hope you will consider my position is such 
 
278 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 as may enable me to ask for her hand without presump- 
 tion." 
 
 "My boy," said Don Antonio, laying his hand kindly 
 upon his shoulder, "I have long foreseen and hoped for 
 this; and believe me, had you come to me without a 
 cent you could call your own, I would still have gladly 
 acceded to your request. I have watched your character 
 for j^ears; I have found much in it to admire, and but 
 little to censure. I am sure you will make Pepita happy, 
 and to assure her happiness is now my sole object in life. 
 You should also remember that you have really put us 
 under an obligation which we can never repay. I cannot 
 forget that you have saved our lives, hers once and mine 
 twice, so that you have fairly won your reward. Now go 
 to Pepita with my blessing, and I think she will not receive 
 you unkindly." 
 
 As if treading on air, exalted to the seventh heaven, 
 Stephen left the side of his old friend in search of his 
 lady-love. But she was nowhere to be seen, upon the 
 deck or below. Suddenly he recalled that eventful night 
 in Asuncion when, in the delight of meeting him once 
 more, she in her excitement actually betrayed her love. 
 Strangely affected by the association of ideas, he almost 
 involuntarily gave utterance to the well-remembered cry, 
 "Pep-eeta!" 
 
 Almost immediately the young lady appeared on deck. 
 She too remembered the circumstances under which she 
 had last heard that signal, and, rushing up to her father, 
 she cried: "Do you want me, Papa 1 ?" 
 
 "No," replied Don Antonio waggishly, "but Stephen 
 does; and I have promised that if you don't object I will 
 make a present of you to him." 
 
 The blush which mantled the cheeks of the young 
 girl was sufficient proof to both that she did not object, 
 and Don Antonio, gently taking her hand, placed it in 
 Stephen's. 
 
CAPTAIN RUGERIO'S STORY 279 
 
 What need is there to intrude upon the sacred interview 
 which followed between the now affianced lovers, at last 
 free to express the feelings they had so long cherished in 
 secret 1 
 
 CHAPTER XLVIII 
 
 CAPTAIN RUGERIO'S STORY 
 
 THE news was too good to keep, and Don Antonio could 
 not refrain from telling it next morning to Captain 
 Rugerio, who lay in a long chair upon the deck, still too 
 weak to move about. Don Antonio and Stephen had often 
 discussed the mysterious man. In spite of Father Anselmo's 
 diagnosis he appeared to have been much more seriously 
 injured than had been believed, for, after nearly a fortnight, 
 he was still too ill to be able to converse at any length 
 with his fellow-passengers. Upon this morning, however, 
 he had recovered wonderfully, and seemed to be really 
 anxious to talk. He called Stephen to his side, and after 
 congratulating him upon the good news which he had just 
 heard from Don Antonio he said: "And now let me thank 
 you for saving my life and rescuing me from the terrible 
 position in which I was placed." 
 
 "Rather," said Stephen, "we should thank you for the 
 invaluable aid you rendered to us. Without such help we 
 should not have been now in the happy position in which 
 we find ourselves." 
 
 "Tush, that was nothing ! " hastily replied Captain Rugerio ; 
 "I really acted as much for myself as for you, as you will 
 see when you know all." 
 
 There was something pathetic in seeing this great bearded 
 man lying so helpless, and still endeavouring to conceal by 
 brusqueness any softness of feeling which the others might 
 wish to attribute to him. Stephen somehow felt strongly 
 
280 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 drawn to him, for he fancied he saw under the affected 
 fierceness of his manner a noble, kindly disposition. 
 
 " No doubt," resumed Captain Kugerio, addressing 
 Stephen, " you and your friends have often wondered that 
 I, who claim to be your countryman, should have been 
 found in such an invidious position as that of the com- 
 mander of the military forces of a tyrant like Dr. Francia. 
 Mine is a curious story, and it is right that you should hear 
 it before judging me. Twenty years ago I was a light- 
 hearted British sailor, happy in the enjoyment of success 
 achieved, with still brighter prospects, when the event 
 happened which cast a gloom over my whole life and 
 entirely altered my career. I had sailed from Bristol as 
 first mate of one of the finest ships which ever left that 
 port, bound for the East Indies, and I had the promise of 
 the owners that if all went well on that voyage I should be 
 promoted to captain on the next. My only grief was in 
 separating from my darling wife for a little over two years, 
 and from my child, as fine a boy as a father could desire. 
 Seafaring men, however, must put up with such separations; 
 it is a part of their calling. Our voyage went on prosper- 
 ously until we had arrived in the latitude of the River 
 Plate, where we were one day attacked by a heavily-armed 
 vessel flying the flag of Spain, I do not remember whether 
 England was actually at war with Spain or not in those 
 days, but it mattered little to those privateers, who were 
 really no better than pirates. Of course we resisted. No 
 English vessel would strike its flag to a Spaniard without a 
 fight, however great the disproportion might appear to be 
 between their relative strengths. It was only after a long 
 and severe struggle, in the course of which our captain and 
 more than half the crew fell, that we were at last forced to 
 surrender. Our ship was brought into Buenos Ayres as a 
 prize, and we, the survivors, were sent as close prisoners to 
 various places in the interior, probably as much with the 
 object of preventing us from communicating to our govern- 
 
281 
 
 ment how we were captured as from any idea of our being 
 dangerous to Spanish rule. For many months I was closely 
 confined, until at last the Spaniards, finding themselves in 
 need of help to repulse the frequent raids of the Indians, 
 offered me my freedom if I would enlist in their army 
 for service on the frontier. I would have done almost 
 anything to escape from the vile durance in which I 
 had been held, and so gladly accepted the proposal. For 
 years after that I was kept constantly on active service, 
 and I suppose that my conduct met with approval, for I 
 was gradually promoted to the rank of sergeant; and 
 finally, upon the occasion of a more than usually successful 
 expedition against the Indians, I was given a lieutenant's 
 commission. By this time I had become, in my language 
 and ways, so assimilated to the Spaniards that they almost 
 seemed to forget that I was not one of themselves. The 
 name I now go by is really a corruption of my English 
 baptismal name. I became habituated to the life, and even 
 liked it, and would scarcely have left it even if I had had the 
 opportunity, for, truth to tell, I really enjoyed the celebrity 
 I now had throughout all the northern provinces. My 
 reputation must have reached the ears of that wonderfully 
 astute man Dr. Francia, for about two years ago a secret 
 emissary of his waited upon me, and with much circum- 
 locutionary caution he conveyed to me an idea of that 
 ambitious man's projects, and sounded me as to my willing- 
 ness to co-operate with him. He led me to expect great 
 advantages if I would accept his overtures, and finally, for 
 I will not deny that I too am ambitious, I agreed. You 
 know that to a certain extent Dr. Francia complied with 
 the undertaking of his agent, and that he put me in 
 command of his army. I soon discovered, however, that 
 my new position, though exalted, was untenable by any 
 man of honour or scruples, and I longed to get out of it; 
 but it is no easy matter to extricate one's self from the toils 
 of such a suspicious tyrant, and there were none around me 
 
282 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 whom I could trust. You know how at last I was so 
 fortunate as to escape through your aid. I have said that 
 I was ambitious, yet when I had attained to an elevation 
 far higher than I had ever ventured to expect, believe me, 
 I was by no means so satisfied as I had anticipated, and I 
 have often looked back with regret upon the happy days 
 when I was merely the first mate of the British Clipper.'" 
 
 " Mate of the British Clipper ! " cried Stephen excitedly. 
 " What, then, was your name in England?" 
 
 "Why, I thought I had told you! It was Roger 
 Herrick." 
 
 "Roger Herrick!" repeated Stephen, becoming still more 
 excited; " then I am your son, the little boy you left behind 
 you ! What wonderful things happen ! Oh, Father, Father, 
 at last I have found you!" and he threw his arms round 
 Captain Rugerio's neck. 
 
 It took some little time for Roger Herrick, as now we 
 must call him, to understand the position, and when at last 
 he realized it he became quite as excited as Stephen. He 
 plied his new-found son with questions about his mother, 
 and groaned when he heard of her troubles, and how she 
 had married again. He expressed his intention of going 
 immediately to England to claim her. Then, suddenly 
 recollecting the relations between Stephen, Don Antonio, 
 and Pepita, he called them all together and told them how 
 happy he was to be present as a father to bless the proposed 
 union. 
 
 The few remaining days of the voyage were spent in 
 complete happiness by Stephen and his friends. For 
 hours the young man would sit with one hand in his 
 father's, the other in that of his affianced, talking of their 
 past and of their future, while Don Antonio looked smilingly 
 on. 
 
 At Santa Fe the treasure was landed, the remainder of 
 the schooner's cargo sold, and the Tridente was released to 
 return to Buenos Ayres. 
 
FIVE YEARS LATER 283 
 
 Here Mick Scanlon announced his intention to leave the 
 party. He had arranged to marry Dona Manuelita, and to 
 start as an estanciero with the capital realized from his 
 portion of the treasure. 
 
 Roger Herrick was impatient to go off to England, and 
 Sandy Fulton decided to accompany him. Before they left, 
 however, they had the pleasure of seeing Stephen and 
 Pepita married by the bishop of the province, the wedding 
 being attended by all the dlite of the society of Santa Fe. 
 
 It was announced that they would henceforth reside with 
 Don Antonio at the estancia El Porvenir. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX 
 
 FIVE YEARS LATER 
 
 IT is a summer evening, and the sun is just about to dip 
 below the level horizon which bounds the view across 
 the plains at El Porvenir. Its parting rays gild a scene 
 which Stephen, as he rides up to the gate, remembers to 
 have been a very different one when he first saw it some 
 nine years ago. For the estancia has been greatly im- 
 proved. A handsome house, in the middle of an extensive 
 garden, has taken the place of the simple structure which 
 then stood there, and the enclosures for the cattle, as well 
 as the houses of the peons, are all neatly and substantially 
 built. 
 
 Stephen is not alone. With him there rides, dressed in 
 a general's undress uniform, a gentleman, who, though his 
 hair and beard are now iron-gray, one would have no 
 difficulty in recognizing as Roger Herrick, the quondam 
 Captain Rugerio, still apparently as vigorous as when he 
 commanded the guard of the Dictator of Paraguay. 
 
 As they approach, a graceful young lady with a baby in 
 
284 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 her arms, and followed by two toddling children, comes out 
 to meet them. 
 
 "Well, Querida Esposa," cries Stephen, "has all gone 
 right during my absence?" 
 
 " Perfectly," replies Pepita, who looks even more beauti- 
 ful than when we saw her last, " but the children have so 
 longed for Papa!" 
 
 " Dear little fellows ! " exclaims the happy father. " Come 
 and see what Papa has brought you from Buenos Ayres; 
 and here is Grandpa too, anxious to kiss you. Doesn't 
 he look grand! Just back from the wars, safe and 
 sound." 
 
 The gallant general and his son leap from their horses 
 and throw the bridles to a peon, and in a minute have each 
 a happy little chap riding on his shoulder with arms round 
 his neck, and so make a triumphant procession up to the 
 house. 
 
 There the other grandfather is waiting for them in the 
 veranda. Don Antonio has evidently just risen from his 
 bamboo reclining-chair, in which it is his wont to spend the 
 hot hours of the afternoon. He is still hale and hearty, 
 though his beard and hair have now blanched to a silvery 
 white. 
 
 " And Mother?" cries Stephen somewhat anxiously. 
 
 "Much better," replies Pepita; "she will be here presently," 
 and immediately there appears in the veranda a gentle- 
 looking graj^-haired lady, who welcomes her husband and 
 son in that sweet voice which Stephen loved so much as a 
 child. 
 
 Stephen has become accustomed to her appearance now, 
 but he still remembers the shock which he felt when, after 
 their long separation, she arrived from England about 
 three years ago, and he observed the great change that 
 had come over her. Little wonder that it did, when the 
 trials and sufferings she had undergone were remembered. 
 She had related to him the intense anxiety which his 
 
FIVE YEARS LATER 285 
 
 hurried departure had given her, especially when months 
 and then years sped past without her ever hearing from 
 him. How Ebenezer Herrick, after his first outbreak of 
 wrath, had given orders that the boy's name should never 
 again be mentioned, and how he became more stern and 
 sullen than ever. "Perhaps," charitably suggested his 
 mother to Stephen, "some of this change may have been 
 attributable to remorse for the manner in which he treated 
 you." But things had gone from bad to worse at the farm- 
 house. Trouble after trouble arose, and finally the old 
 man only escaped being carried off to a debtor's prison by 
 falling ill and dying just at the time when his creditors 
 were about to foreclose upon him. Then the farm had 
 been sold up, and the desolate widow had sought refuge 
 with some old friends in Bristol, in whose hospitable home 
 she was discovered by her long-lost Boger. 
 
 "It was an awful experience," she said, "to meet with 
 one so long mourned as dead; but at the same time full of 
 rapturous joy when I had realized that it was no illusion, 
 my love had actually returned, and still more delightful to 
 hear that he brought such good news from you, my dear- 
 boy. 
 
 " You can picture my feelings; one day brooding over my 
 sad lot, husband and son both gone, and nothing but a life 
 of sadness and poverty before me — nothing to live for, and 
 only the kindness, the charity of friends to depend upon, — 
 the next day to know that my real, my only loved husband 
 had come to take me to his arms, and that my son lived 
 and was wed in a beautiful land across the seas, and had 
 called for us to come and share his home." 
 
 But the reaction had been almost too much for the poor 
 mother, and for many days she lay between life and death, 
 nor for months did she recover sufficiently to venture upon 
 the arduous undertaking of the long voyage to the southern 
 seas. 
 
 At length, however, the start was made, and Stephen had 
 
286 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 the supreme pleasure of welcoming his parents under his 
 own roof; for it was his own by that time, his father-in-law 
 having retired and formally made over the estate to his 
 daughter and her husband. 
 
 For long after his mother's arrival she was but a feeble 
 invalid, but gradually the fresh strong airs of the pampas 
 restored her to a certain measure of strength, and though 
 every now and again she had recurrences of weakness, she 
 was now apparently steadily returning to health. So 
 Stephen saw when he affectionately saluted her as he ex- 
 claimed: " Why, Mother, you have wonderfully improved 
 while I have been away; the roses have returned to your 
 cheeks." 
 
 Captain Eugerio had found the tranquil life at the 
 estancia hang heavy on his hands, but there was no need 
 for a man of such energy to remain idle. The new colonial 
 government, now constituted under the name of the 
 Argentine Confederation, had many battles to fight for its 
 existence, both with political opponents and with the 
 Indians. The services of a soldier with such a brilliant 
 reputation were eagerly sought for, and in the army of the 
 republic he rapidly rose to the rank of general. He had 
 now just returned from a successful campaign, and hoped 
 to enjoy a well-earned furlough. Stephen had gone to 
 meet him at Buenos Ayres. 
 
 "But come in, come in," cried Don Antonio, "you must 
 be famishing after your long ride." 
 
 Soon they were seated at table in the handsomely-fur- 
 nished dining-room, which might have been taken for one 
 of the best rooms in a Buenos Ayres or Montevidian 
 mansion. There was one object in it to which Stephen's 
 eyes always turned with affectionate interest, especially after 
 an absence. It was the painting of the naval battle round 
 which his boyish imagination had woven so many delightful 
 fancies. 
 
 The conversation turned upon the affairs of the estancia, 
 
FIVE YEARS LATER 287 
 
 now one of the richest in the whole province, with cattle, 
 horses, and sheep in thousands. Little wonder that Don 
 Esteban Herrico, as he was generally called by his neigh- 
 bours, was looked upon as a personage who, had he cared 
 to become a citizen of the republic and to enter politics, 
 might have been elected to high office, or even to the 
 governorship of the province. 
 
 "Whom do you think we met in Buenos Ay res'?" said 
 Stephen to Don Antonio. "Why, our old comrade Mick 
 Scanlon, who told us how greatly he was prospering on his 
 cattle estancia in Santa Fe. He has now four children, and 
 he told us that his Manuelita had turned out even a greater 
 'threasure' than he had expected. He was handsomely 
 dressed, and his horse-gear was resplendent in solid silver. 
 Few would recognize now in the rich Don Miguel Escanlon, 
 the poor 'gossoon', who left his home so hurriedly on 
 account of the trouble over ' Biddy Malone's pig '. He was 
 tremendously pleased to hear from a man newly arrived at 
 the Plate who came from Ballymashanty, that his old mother 
 was living comfortably upon the small fortune which had 
 been sent her by her ' son away out there in the Indies '. 
 You see she can't write, poor thing, so that it isn't often 
 that Mick hears of her. 
 
 "But Mick has a good piece of news for us; for he says 
 that he has had a letter from our old friend Sandy Fulton, 
 who has at last found Scotland too cold for him. He has 
 decided to come out and settle in this sunny clime, and he 
 is bringing a wife with him." 
 
 After dinner the gentlemen went out to smoke under 
 the veranda, and the conversation soon turned upon the 
 career of Don Francia, who still ruled with a rod of iron 
 over the timorous and submissive Paraguayan people. 
 Terrible stories of his cruelties were constantly reaching 
 Buenos Ayres, although some people professed to admire 
 the strength of his character, and even wished they had 
 such a dictator to preserve order amongst the turbulent 
 
288 IN THE DICTATOR'S GRIP 
 
 politicians who were constantly fomenting revolutions. 
 "They would very soon change their opinion if they 
 were brought into close quarters with him," said Don 
 Antonio. "For myself, I can never be too grateful for my 
 escape from his country, nor too thankful to you, my dear 
 friends, who rescued me from Francia's grip. 
 
 THE END 
 

 IT! JO^U'-t 
 
 13 3 
 
 '"in t'he dictator's gj'ip 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M13264 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY